X5

Owner's Handbook
Contents
for Vehicle
The Ultimate
A-Z
Driving Machine
Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 013 209 - © 04/07 BMW AG

X5 3.0si Owner's Handbook for Vehicle
X5 4.8i Congratulations on your choice of a BMW.
X5 3.0d The better you are acquainted with your car, the easier you will
find it is to handle. We would therefore like to offer you the follow-
ing advice:
Please read the Owner's Handbook before setting out in your
new BMW. It contains important notes on how to operate the car,
enabling you to derive maximum benefit from the technical
advantages of your BMW. It also contains useful information
which will help you to uphold both the car's operating safety and
its full resale value.
Supplementary information is provided in the other documents
of on-board literature.
We wish you many a safe and enjoyable journey,
BMW AG

© 2007 Bayerische Motoren Werke
Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Not to be reproduced, wholly or in part, without
written permission from BMW AG, Munich.
Order No. 01 41 0 013 209
English III/07, 07 03 510
Printed in Germany
Printed on environmentally friendly paper,
bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.

Contents
Overview
The quickest way to access a particular topic or Mobility
item is by consulting the detailed alphabetical 214 Refuelling
index, see page 250. 216 Wheels and tyres
219 In the engine compartment
About this Owner's Handbook
223 Maintenance
4 Notes
225 Replacing parts
Controls
Overview 234 Mutual aid
8 Driving area
Reference
14 iDrive
240 Technical data
21 Voice input system
244 Short commands for the voice input
Controls system
Driving hints
26 Opening and closing 250 From A-Z
38 Adjusting
50 Carrying children in safety
54 Driving
65 Everything under control
78 Technical features for driving comfort and
safety
Navigation
92 Lights
98 Climate
113 Practical interior equipment
Driving hints
126 Driving precautions
Entertainment
Navigation
136 Starting the navigation system
138 Destination input
151 Route guidance
160 What to do if ...
Entertainment
164 On/off and settings
168 Radio
174 Digital radio DAB
Mobility
179 CD player and CD changer

185 DVD changer
192 AUX-In connection
193 USB audio interface
196 TV
Reference
199 DVD system at rear

Notes
Notes
About this Owner's Symbols used

Handbook Indicates precautions that must be fol-
We have tried to make all the information in this lowed precisely in order to avoid the pos-
Owner's Handbook easy to find. The quickest sibility of personal injury and serious damage to
way to access a specific topic or item is by con- the vehicle.<
sulting the detailed alphabetical index at the Indicates information that will assist you
end. Consult the first chapter for an overview of in gaining the optimum benefit from your
your car. vehicle and enable you to care more effectively
When the time comes to sell your BMW, please for your vehicle.<
remember to hand over this Owner's Hand- Refers to measures that can be taken to
book; it is an important part of the car. help protect the environment.<
< Marks the end of a specific item of informa-
Additional sources of information tion.
If you have any queries, BMW Service will be * Identifies optional extras or specific national-
glad to advise you. market items of equipment, as well as equip-
Information about BMW, e.g. technical issues, ment and functions not yet available at the time
can also be found on the Internet at of printing.
www.bmw.com. "..." Identifies texts on the control display for
selecting functions.
{...} Identifies commands for the voice input
system.
{{...}} Identifies replies by the voice input sys-
tem.
Symbol for components and

assemblies
Recommends that you study the relevant
section of this Owner's Handbook in con-
nection with a particular part or assembly.
4
Your car For your own safety
Overview
When you ordered your BMW, you chose vari-
Maintenance and repair
ous items of equipment. This Owner's Hand-
book describes all models and equipment The advanced technology behind this car,
specifications which BMW offers within this for example the use of modern materials
particular model line. and high-performance electronics, means that
specially adapted methods of maintenance and
This explains why the Owner's Handbook may
repair are required. Always have the necessary
also contain details of items which you have not
work on your BMW performed either by BMW
ordered. The differences can easily be identi-
Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW
Controls
fied by the asterisk * shown against optional
specifications and has suitably trained person-
extras.
nel. If such work is performed inexpertly, it could
If your BMW contains equipment that is not result in consequential damage and thus con-
described in this Owner's Handbook, Supple- stitute a safety risk.<
mentary Owner's Handbooks will be supplied
and you are requested to study and comply with Parts and accessories
Driving hints
them.
BMW recommends using parts and
In cars with right-hand drive, some of the accessory products on this car that are
controls are arranged differently from specifically approved for this purpose by BMW.
those shown in the illustrations of this Owner's You are recommended to consult BMW Service
Handbook.< for advice on Genuine BMW parts and accesso-
ries, other BMW-approved products and com-
petent advice on all related matters.
Status at time of printing The safety and compatibility of these parts and
Navigation
products in conjunction with BMW vehicles
The high safety and quality standards of BMW
have been checked by BMW. BMW accepts
vehicles are maintained by unceasing develop-
product liability for them.
ment work on designs, equipment and acces-
BMW cannot accept liability for parts or acces-
sories. In rare instances, your car may therefore
sory products of any kind which it has not
differ from the information supplied in the
approved.
Owner's Handbook.
Entertainment
BMW is unable to assess each individual prod-
uct of outside origin as to its suitability for use
on BMW vehicles without safety risk. Nor can
suitability be assured if an official permit has
been issued for it in a specific country. Tests
performed for such permits cannot always
cover all operating conditions for BMW vehi-
cles, and some of them therefore are insuffi-
cient.<
Mobility
Reference
5
Overview
This summary of buttons, switches and
displays serves as an initial guide.
It also gives you an insight into the principles
behind the various ways in which functions
can be performed.

Driving area
Driving area
Around the steering wheel: controls and displays
1 Safety switch for rear windows 36

6
2 Opening and closing windows 35 Side lights 92
3 Folding outside mirrors in and out* 47
Low-beam headlights 92
4 Adjusting outside mirrors 47
Automatic parking function* 47 Automatic driving lights
control* 92
5 Adaptive Head Light* 94
Instrument lighting 97
High-beam headlights
assistant* 95
Front fog lights 96
8
13 Buttons on the steering wheel
7
Rear fog lights* 97 Telephone*:
Overview
> Press: receiving and ending a
Headlight beam throw
call, dial starting* for a
adjustment 94
selected phone number and
Head-Up Display* 90 redialling if no phone number
has been selected
> Press and hold down: redial-
8 ling
Flashing turn indicators 60
Controls
High-beam headlights, headlight
Volume control
flasher 60
assistant* 95 Activating/deactivating voice input
system* 21
Driving hints
Parking lights* 95
Changing radio station
Time, date, outdoor temperature, Selecting a music track
Check Control 65, 73 Changing TV channel*
Scrolling in the telephone book
Computer 67 and in lists of stored numbers
Individually programmable 49
9 Instrument cluster 10
Navigation
Individually programmable 49
10
Windscreen wipers 61
Heated steering wheel* 49
Rain sensor 61
14 Horn, entire surface
Entertainment
Rear window wiper 62
15
Steering wheel adjustment* 48
11 Switching the ignition on/off and
starting/stopping the engine 54
16
Cruise control* 62
12 Ignition lock 54
17 Releasing the engine compartment lid 219

Mobility
Reference
9
Instrument cluster
Driving area
1 Flashing turn indicators 7 Display for

2 Speedometer > Distance recorder – odometer – and
3 Indicator and warning lights 11 trip distance recorder 65
4 Revolution counter 66 > Computer 67
5 Energy control 66 > Date and remaining distance to next

service 69
6 Display for
> Automatic transmission positions 57
> Time/date 65
> Hill Descent Control HDC 84
> Outside temperature 65
> High-beam headlights assistant* 95
> Indicator and warning lights 72
> Current Check Control message 72
> Cruise control* speed 62
> Adaptive Drive* 85
8 Fuel gauge 66
9 Resetting trip distance recorder 65
Displaying service requirements 65
10
Indicator and warning lights In urgent cases, this information will be shown
immediately when the corresponding light
Overview
Principle lights up.
Indicator lights not accompanied by

text messages
The following indicator lights indicate that spe-
cific functions are active:
Parking brake applied 56
Controls
Front fog lights 96
Indicator and warning lights can light up in a

variety of combinations and colours. Dynamic Traction Control DTC 84
Some lights in the panel are checked for proper
Driving hints
functioning and thus light up briefly when the High-beam headlights/
engine starts or the ignition is switched on. headlight flasher 95
Rear fog lights* 97
Explanatory text messages
Light flashing:
DSC or DTC is regulating the propul-
sive and brake forces in order to main-
tain driving stability 83
Navigation
Text messages appearing along the lower edge
Entertainment
of the control display explain the meaning of the
indicator and warning lights that have lit up.
Mobility
You can call up further information, e.g. about

the cause of a fault and what action is required,
via the Check Control, see page 72.
Reference
11
Around the centre console: controls and displays
Driving area
12
1 Microphone for hands-free operation of the 13 Ejecting navigation DVD for navigation
telephone* and for the voice input system* 136
Overview
system* 21
2 Making an emergency call* 234 14
Opening the tailgate 31
3 Reading lights 97
4 Panorama glass roof* 36 Active seat* 46
5 Interior light 97
Park Distance Control PDC* 78
6 Control display 14 Rear view camera* 80
Controls
7 Hazard warning flashers
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 84
8 Central locking system 28
9 Opening glove box 116 Hill Descent Control HDC 84
10 Automatic air conditioning 99
Automatic air conditioning with extended
15 Controller 14
range of features* 103
Driving hints
Can be turned, pressed, or moved horizon-
tally in four directions
Manual air distribution* 100, 104 16 Calling up start menu on control display 15
Automatic air distribution and 17 Parking brake 55
volume 99, 103 18 Adaptive Drive* 85
Cooling function 101, 105 19 Favourites/programmable memory

buttons 19
Automatic Recirculated Air Control
Navigation
20 Switching entertainment audio output on/
AUC* 105 off and adjusting volume 164
Recirculated-air mode 101
Maximum cooling effect* 105
Entertainment
Air volume 100, 104
Residual heat utilisation* 106
Defrosting windows and removing
mist 100, 104
Heated rear window 100, 104
Heated seats* 45, 46
Active seat ventilation* 46

Mobility
11 Ejecting audio CD
12 Changing
> Radio stations 164
> Tracks 164
Reference
13
iDrive
iDrive
iDrive integrates the functions of a large below. Details of how to control individual func-
number of switches. These functions can now tions are provided under the descriptions of the
be controlled from one central point. The basic items of equipment concerned.
menu-guided operating principle is explained
Controls
1 Control display
2 button
To call up the start menu
3 Controller
You can select menu items and adjust set-
tings with the controller:
> Move it in four directions, arrows 4
> Turn it, arrow 5
> Press it, arrow 6
Only make adjustments if the traffic con-
ditions are sufficiently quiet or clear, so as
not to endanger the car's occupants and other
road users by being distracted.<
14
Menu summary Operating principle
Overview
Communication Start menu
> Telephone*, see separate Operating
Instructions
> BMW Assist*, BMW Online* or
TeleService*, see separate Operating
Instructions
Controls
Navigation or on-board information
> Navigation system*
> On-board information, e.g. to display the
average fuel consumption All iDrive functions can be called up via five
menu items.
Entertainment
Driving hints
> Radio
Calling up the start menu
Press the button.
> CD player and CD changer*
To call up the start menu from the menu:
> External audio equipment
Press the button twice.
> TV*
Calling up menu items in the start menu

Climate
> Air distribution
Navigation
> Seat climate control*
> Automatic program
> Independent ventilation system*/auxiliary
heater*
menu
Entertainment
> Switching off control display
> Tone and display settings From radio readiness, see page 54:
You can call up the four menu items Communi-
> Settings for traffic information*
cation, Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
> Settings for your car, e.g. for the central via the start menu by moving the controller left,
locking right, forwards or back.
> Indication of service requirements and Press the controller to call up the menu.
deadlines for legally required inspections
> Settings for telephone*
Mobility
Reference
15
Comfort menu item selection
iDrive
The comfort selection feature enables you to:

> Call up a menu item in the start menu in the
last configuration used
> Toggle directly between Communication,
Navigation, Entertainment and Climate
without needing to press the button
To do this, move the controller in the relevant
direction and hold it in position for more than
about 2 seconds. 1 Menu items are usually grouped in horizon-
tal or vertical lists.
Displays in the menu 2 Arrows indicate that there are additional
menu items within a list, but that they are
not currently visible.
3 Settings are represented graphically or as
numerical values.
1 Each menu is subdivided into different

fields. The field currently selected appears
highlighted in the display.
2 A symbol shows you which menu item of
the start menu was last selected:
Communication
Navigation or on-board information
Entertainment
Climate
menu
16
Operating principle at a glance
This illustration shows how the car can be oper- The individual steps are explained under Set-
Overview
ated via iDrive. tings on the control display, Brightness of the
control display, see page 76.
Controls
Driving hints
Navigation
Entertainment
1 To select a menu item: 4 To switch between fields:
> Turn the controller; the highlighted > Move the controller briefly to the left,
marker moves right, forwards or backwards
> Menu items in white can be selected by > Release the controller
highlighting them > The active field becomes brighter in col-
2 To activate a menu item: our
Mobility
> Press the controller 5 To perform adjustments:

> New menu items are displayed or the > Turn the controller
function is executed > Graphic display, numerical value or text
3 To select a menu item: see 1 displays can be changed
> Confirm by changing the field
Reference
17
Status information 3 Display for traffic information*:
iDrive
> "TMC":
Traffic information for the navigation
system can be received and broadcast-
ing is switched on
> "TI+":
Traffic info + traffic information can be
received and broadcasting is switched
on
4 Display for:
> New entries pending in "Calls not
1 Display for:
accepted"*
> Entertainment:
> Roaming active
Radio, CD, TV*
5 It is possible to use the telephone* if the
> Telephone*:
mobile phone is registered with the car
Name of network operator, no network,
Mobile phone network reception
or name of mobile phone registered with
strength, display depends on the mobile
the car
phone
> "Car Phone"*:
6 Time
Active voice connection for emergency
calls if BMW Assist is not enabled Other displays:
Status information is temporarily hidden during
> "BMW Assist"*:
Check Control message displays or inputs via
Active voice connection with a
the voice input system*.
BMW Assist service
> "Online" or "GPRS Online"*:
Active connection with BMW Online*
Assistance window*
2 Entertainment sound output off or dis-
play for traffic announcements*:
> "TP":
Traffic Programme switched on
> "T":
The Traffic Programme is off but traffic
reports can be received
> No display:
No traffic reports can be received
Additional information can be displayed in the

assistance window:
> The computer or journey computer
> The arrow or map view for cars with naviga-
tion system*
> The car's position*
18
Selecting display 3. Select "Display off" and press the control-
1. Move the controller to the right to switch to ler.
Overview
the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
Controls
Press the controller to switch on.
2. Select a menu item.

3. Press the controller.
Favourites/programmable
Driving hints
memory buttons
Switching assistance window on/off You can assign certain iDrive functions to the
1. Move the controller to the right to switch to programmable memory buttons and use these
the assistance window and press the con- buttons to perform them:
troller. > Destinations for navigation*
2. Select "Exit assist. window" and press the > Telephone, phone numbers*
controller.
> Entertainment:
Navigation
> Radio stations
> CD
> CD compartment of CD changer*
> TV*
> AUX
Entertainment
The functions assigned to the programmable
memory buttons are saved for the remote con-
trol currently in use.
To turn back on, switch to the assistance win-
dow and press the controller. Memorising a function
Destinations for navigation*

Switching control display 1. Select a destination, e.g. from the destina-
on/off tions list or the address book.
Mobility
1. Press the button. 2. Press button ... for longer than

The start menu is called up. 2 seconds.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu. Special features:
> When route guidance is started in the map
view, the current destination is memorised.
Reference
19
> If destination input is performed via the
iDrive
map, the coordinates under the cross-hairs

are memorised, not the current destination.
Telephone, numbers
1. Enter a phone number or select one from a
list of memorised phone numbers, e.g. from
the "A - Z" list.
2. Press button ... for longer than
2 seconds. Navigation destination
If a name has been assigned to the phone Entertainment source
number, the name is likewise memorised.
Telephone, number
Entertainment No function assigned

In the entertainment menu, whatever you are
currently listening to is memorised regardless
Showing detailed information
of what is selected on the control display, e.g. a Touch button ... for longer.
radio station.
1. Select the desired function, e.g. radio sta-
Clearing assignment of buttons
tion or CD. 1. Press the button.
The start menu is called up.
2. Press button ... for longer than
2 seconds. 2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
On models equipped with two drives, the 3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
current track is memorised for CDs with 4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
compressed audio files.< troller.
5. Select "Favourite keys" and press the con-
Performing a function troller.
Press button ... .
The function is carried out immediately. This
means e.g. that the connection is also estab-
lished if a phone number is selected, or route
guidance is started if a navigation destination is
called up.
Displaying assignment of buttons

You can display which functions are assigned to
the buttons by touching them with your finger.
6. Select "Delete assignment of all Favourite
Please do not wear gloves while doing this.
keys" and press the controller.
Touching the buttons with an object, e.g. a pen,
will not work. 7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Displaying brief information

Touch button ... .
The functions assigned to the buttons are dis-
played.
20
Voice input system*
Overview
Principle Speaking commands
The voice input system enables you to operate
Activating voice input
various items of equipment on your car without
having to take your hands off the steering 1. Press the button on the steering wheel.
wheel. This symbol on the control display and an
audible signal indicate that the voice input
Controls
Individual menu items on the control display
can be selected by means of short commands. system is ready to pick up commands.
It is not necessary to use the controller to select
them.
The voice input system translates your com-
mands into control signals for the system in
Driving hints
question, and prompts you by means of
announcements or questions.
The voice input system includes a special
microphone positioned near the interior mirror,
see page 12.
2. Issue the command.
Condition The command appears on the control dis-
Via iDrive, select the dialogue language for the play.
Navigation
voice input system, so that the spoken com-
mands can be identified. Selecting the lan-
guage for iDrive, see page 77.
Symbols in the Owner's Handbook

{...} Say the commands marked with this
Entertainment
symbol word for word.
{{...}} Identifies replies by the voice input
system.
This symbol appears on the control display if
you are able to say further commands.
If no further commands are possible, continue
by operating the item of equipment via iDrive.
Mobility
Reference
21
Ending or interrupting voice input Calling up start menu
Voice input system
Press the button on the steering wheel {Main menu}

or
{Cancel} An example: selecting a track
1. If necessary, switch on entertainment audio
Commands output.
2. Press the button on the steering wheel.
Having possible commands read aloud
3. {Entertainment}
You can prompt the system to read out the The system says:
commands that are possible, depending on {{Entertainment}}
which menu item is selected on the control dis-
play.
To have the possible commands read out to
you:
{Options}
For instance, if you have selected "CD", the
commands available for operating the CD
player and CD changer* will be read out.
Requesting help
{Help} 4. {CD}
The system says:
Using alternative commands {{CD drive switched on}}
There are often several different commands
available for performing the same function, e.g.:
{Radio on} or {Switch radio on}
Calling up functions immediately using

short commands
Short commands enable you to perform certain
functions straight away, irrespective of which
menu item is selected, see page 244.
22
6. Select a music track, e.g.:
Overview
{Track 1}
The system says:
{{Track 1}}
Controls
Driving hints
Notes
For more information about voice control
of the telephone, see the separate Oper-
ating Instructions.<
When speaking commands, note the following:
> Say the commands and numbers fluently
and at normal volume; avoid unnatural
Navigation
emphases and pauses between words. This
also applies to spelling a destination entry.
> Speak the commands in the language of the
voice input system.
> When selecting a radio station, use the
standard pronunciation of the station name.
Entertainment
> When making entries in the voice-activated
phone book, use only names in the lan-
guage of the voice input system, and do not
use abbreviations.
> Keep the doors, windows and panorama
glass roof* closed in order to avoid noise
interference from outside the car.
> Avoid background noises in the car while
you are speaking.
Mobility
Reference
23
Controls
This chapter enables you to operate your car
with greater ease. All items of equipment that
are of relevance for driving and make your
journey safer and more comfortable are
described here.

Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Key/remote control Integrated key
Press button 1 to release the key.

1 Remote control with integrated key
The integrated key fits the following locks:
2 Spare key
> Driver's door, see page 30
3 Adapter for spare key
> floor panel flap in luggage compartment,
see page 121
Remote control with integrated key
Every remote control contains a rechargeable New remote controls
battery that is automatically recharged when it
BMW Service can supply new remote controls
is in the ignition lock while the car is being
with integrated keys, as additional units or as
driven. Drive a longer distance with each
replacements in the event of loss.
remote control at least twice annually in order to
keep the battery charged. If your car is fitted
with comfort access*, the remote control will Spare key
feature a replaceable battery, see page 35. Spare key, to be kept in a safe place, for
instance in a purse or wallet. This key is not
On the basis of the remote control detected
intended for regular use.
when unlocking the car, various settings will be
called up in the car and applied, see Personal The spare key and integrated key fit the same
Profile, page 27. locks.
In addition, information about service require-
ments is stored in the remote control, see Adapter for spare key
Service data in the remote control, page 223. You need the adapter to start the car with the
spare key or to switch on radio readiness.
26
> Settings shown on the control display:
> Brightness of the control display, see
Overview
page 76
> Units of measurement for fuel consump-
tion, distance, temperature and pres-
sure, see page 76
> Language on the control display, see
page 77
> 12-hour/24-hour clock mode, see
Controls
Remove the adapter from the holder in the page 76
glove box and insert the spare key into the
> Date format, see page 76
adapter prior to use.
> Displaying optical warning for Park Dis-
tance Control PDC*, see page 79
Personal Profile > Selection, brightness and position of Head-
Driving hints
Up Display*, see page 90
Principle > Automatic air conditioning settings, see
You can set many of your BMW's functions to page 99 and automatic air conditioning with
suit your personal needs and preferences. extended range of features*, see page 103
Without any action on your part, Personal Pro- > Position of driver's seat, outside mirrors and
file ensures that most of these settings are steering wheel*, see page 40
saved for the remote control currently in use.
> The last suspension settings selected for
When you unlock the car the remote control
Adaptive Drive*, see page 85
used for the purpose is recognised and the set-
Navigation
tings saved for it are called up and imple- > The volume and tone settings for audio and
mented. video sources*, see page 165
This means that your personal settings are > The display of memorised stations for the
active when you return to your BMW, even if the radio, see page 168
car was used in the interim by someone else > Headlight courtesy delay feature, see
with a remote control of their own and the set- page 93, and daytime running lights*, see
Entertainment
tings were changed accordingly. Individual set- page 93
tings are saved for up to three remote controls. > Triple turn signal, see page 60
> For the rear view camera*, selecting func-
Personal Profile settings
tions, see page 80, and the method of dis-
See the pages indicated for more detailed infor- play, see page 82
mation about the settings.
> For favourites/programmable memory but-
> When unlocking with the remote control, tons, the memorised functions chosen, see
either the driver's door only or the entire car page 19
is unlocked, see page 28
Mobility
> Locking the car after a short time or after

setting off, see page 30
> Assignment of the programmable buttons
on the steering wheel, see page 49
Reference
27
Central locking Unlocking
Opening and closing
Press the button.

Principle This will unlock the car.
The central locking becomes active when the You can set the mode for unlocking the car. The
driver's door is closed. setting is saved for the remote control currently
The following are unlocked or locked in combi- in use.
nation: iDrive, principle, see page 14.
> Doors 1. Press the button.
> Upper tailgate The start menu is called up.
> Fuel filler flap 2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
Operating from outside 4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
> Via the remote control troller.
> Via the door lock 5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker
> With comfort access* via the door handles to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Door locks" is selected and press the
The alarm system is also operated at the same
controller.
time. This prevents the doors being unlocked
either at the safety lock buttons or door han-
dles. The interior light and the ground lights*
are also switched on or off with the remote con-
trol. The alarm system* is also armed or dis-
armed.
For more information about the alarm system*,
see page 32.
Operating from inside

Via the button for the central locking system, 6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-
see page 30. The fuel filler flap is not locked*. troller.
In the event of an accident of sufficient severity, 7. Select "Lock button" and press the control-
the central locking is released automatically. ler.
The hazard warning flashers and the interior
8. Select a menu item:
light are in addition switched on.
> "All doors"
Press the button once to unlock the
Opening and closing: entire car.
with the remote control

Persons remaining in the car or pets left
inside can lock the doors from the inside.
You should therefore take the remote control
with you when you get out of the vehicle so that
the car can be opened from the outside.<
28
> "Driver's door only" Panic mode*
Press the button once to unlock only You can also activate the alarm system in the
Overview
the driver's door and the fuel filler flap. event of danger:
Press it twice to unlock the entire car.
Press the button for at least 3 seconds.
To switch the alarm off: press any button.
Unlocking upper tailgate

Press the button for about one second.
The tailgate opens slightly, regardless of
Controls
whether it was locked or unlocked.
On certain national-market versions, the
tailgate can only be opened if the car has
first been unlocked.
The tailgate swings out and up when opened.
Make sure that there is sufficient clearance.
Driving hints
Comfort opening
To avoid locking yourself out of the car inad-
Press and hold down the button. The win- vertently, do not leave the remote control in the
dows and the panorama glass roof* are load area. If the tailgate was previously locked, it
opened. will be locked again as soon as it is closed.<
Wrap protective material around any
Locking
sharp ends or edges of items of luggage
Press the button. that could strike the rear window while the car is
Do not lock the car from the outside when moving, to prevent these damaging the heating
Navigation
there is someone inside it, as it cannot conductors in the rear window.<
then be unlocked from the inside in some
national-market versions.< Adjusting confirmation signals
You can also deactivate the optical acknowl-
Comfort closing edgement signal for unlocking or locking.
Press and hold down the button. The 1. Press the button.
Entertainment
windows and the panorama glass roof* are The start menu is called up.
closed.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
Watch the closing movement to ensure
that no-one is trapped. The closing pro-
cedure is interrupted immediately if the button 4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
is released.< troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker
Switching on the interior light to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
When the car is locked: until "Door locks" is selected and press the
Press the button. controller.
Mobility
This function enables you to locate the car, for

instance in a parking garage.
Reference
29
6. Select "Confirmation" and press the con- In some national versions, the alarm sys-
Opening and closing
troller. tem* is triggered when the door lock is

unlocked.
To switch off the alarm:
Unlock the car with the remote control, see
page 28, or insert the remote control fully into
the ignition lock.<
For more information about the alarm system*,
see page 32.
Comfort operation
The windows and the panorama glass roof* can
7. Select the desired signal.
also be operated via the door lock.
Hold the key in the lock or unlock position.
The signal is switched on.
Watch the closing movement to ensure
Malfunctions that no-one is trapped. The movement is
stopped when the key is released.<
The remote control may malfunction as a result
of interference from localised radio signals. If
Manual operation
this occurs, unlock and lock the car by inserting
a key into the door lock. In the event of an electrical fault, you can lock
and unlock the driver's door by turning the key
If the car can no longer be locked with a remote
to the limit positions in the door lock.
control, the battery in the remote control is flat.
Use this remote control when driving a relatively
long distance to recharge its battery, see
page 26.
Opening and closing:
from the inside
Opening and closing:

via the door lock
This button unlocks or locks the doors and

upper tailgate when the front doors are closed,
but does not deadlock them. The fuel filler flap
remains unlocked*.
Do not lock the car from the outside when
there is someone inside it, as it cannot You can in addition determine in which situa-
then be unlocked from the inside in some tions the vehicle is locked.
national-market versions.<
30
iDrive, principle, see page 14. Locking
1. Press the button. > Either lock all doors by pressing the central
Overview
The start menu is called up. locking button, or
2. Press the controller to call up the menu. > Press down the safety lock button on one of
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller. the doors. To avoid being shut out of the car
accidentally, the driver's door cannot be
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
locked with the safety lock button when it is
troller.
open.
Persons remaining in the car or pets left
to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
Controls
inside can lock the doors from the inside.
You should therefore take the remote control
controller.
with you when you get out of the vehicle so that
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con- the car can be opened from the outside.<
troller.
Upper tailgate
Driving hints
The tailgate swings out and up when
opened. Make sure that there is sufficient
clearance.<
Opening from inside
Navigation
7. Select a menu item:
> "Relock if no door opened"
The central locking is engaged automat-
ically after a short while if no doors have
been opened.
> "Lock after moving off"
Entertainment
The central locking is engaged as soon
as you drive off. Press the button: the tailgate will open slightly
8. Press the controller. as long as it is not deadlocked.
indicates that the setting is selected.
The setting is saved for the remote control cur- Opening from outside
rently in use.
Unlocking and opening

> Either use the central locking button to
Mobility
unlock all doors at once, then pull the door

handle above the armrest, or
> Pull the handle on each individual door
twice: the first time to unlock the door, and
the second time to open it.
Press the button on the tailgate or press the
Reference
button on the remote control for approx.
31
1 second: the tailgate opens slightly. It can now Wrap protective material around any
Opening and closing
be swung upwards. sharp ends or edges of items of luggage

On certain national-market versions, the that could strike the rear window while the car is
tailgate can only be opened with the moving, to prevent these damaging the heating
remote control if the car has first been conductors in the rear window.<
unlocked.<
Opening manually Lower tailgate

In the event of an electrical fault:
Opening
1. From inside the load area, press out the
handle in the tailgate, see arrow, with the aid
of a screwdriver and pull it. This will unlock
the tailgate.
Pull the lever and swing the tailgate down.

The open tailgate can support loads of up
to 250 kg, approx. 550 lb.<
2. Open the tailgate and press the handle back

Closing
into place.
Swing the tailgate up and press it shut.
The tailgate is locked again as soon as it is
closed.
Closing
Alarm system*
To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing Principle
area of the tailgate is unobstructed.<
The alarm system will respond if:
> A door, the engine compartment or the
upper tailgate are opened
> There is any movement inside the car: inte-
rior movement detector, see page 33
> The car's inclination changes, for instance
if an attempt is made to jack it up and steal
the wheels or to raise it prior to towing away
> There is an interruption in the power supply
from the battery
The recessed handles in the tailgate lining
make it easier to pull the tailgate down. The alarm will respond briefly as follows to indi-
cate unauthorised attempts to access the car:
> Audible alarm
> Activation* of the hazard warning system
32
Arming and disarming > The indicator light flashes after unlocking
Whenever the car is locked or unlocked, either until the remote control is inserted into the
Overview
with the remote control or at the door lock, the ignition, but for no longer than approx.
alarm system is armed or disarmed at the same 5 minutes: an attempt was made to tamper
time. with the car.
Even when the alarm system is armed, you can

Tilt alarm sensor
open the upper tailgate by pressing the
button on the remote control, see page 29. The car's angle is monitored. The alarm will be
When you close the tailgate subsequently, it will triggered for instance if an attempt is made to
be locked and monitored. steal the car's wheels or tow it away.
Controls
On certain national-market versions, the
Interior movement detector
upper tailgate can only be opened with
the remote control if the car has first been Before the interior movement detector can
unlocked. operate correctly, the windows and panorama
Opening certain national-market versions via glass roof* must be closed.
Driving hints
the door lock triggers the alarm.<
Avoiding false alarms
Switching off the alarm The tilt alarm sensor and the interior movement
> Unlock the car with the remote control, see detector can be switched off together. This pre-
page 28. vents false alarms, e.g. in the following situa-
tions:
> Insert the remote control fully into the igni-
tion lock. > In two-level garages
> When being transported on car-carrying
Navigation
Indicator light displays trains, boats/ships or trailers
> If pets are to remain inside the car
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

interior movement detector
Press the button on the remote control
Entertainment
again as soon as the car is locked.
The indicator light lights up briefly, then contin-
ues to flash steadily. The tilt alarm sensor and
interior movement detector are switched off
> The indicator light beneath the inside mirror until the next time the car is unlocked and
flashes steadily: the system is armed. locked.
> The indicator light flashes after the car has
been locked: the doors, engine compart-
ment lid or upper tailgate have not been Comfort access*
closed properly. Even if an item is not
Mobility
Comfort access enables you to access your car

closed fully, the remaining items are dead- without having to take hold of the remote con-
locked and the indicator light begins to flash trol. It is sufficient to have the remote control on
steadily after 10 seconds. However, the your person, for example in your hand or in a
interior movement detector is not activated. jacket pocket. The car automatically recognises
> The indicator light goes out after the car has your remote control when it is in the immediate
been unlocked: no attempt was made to vicinity or inside the car.
Reference
tamper with the car during your absence.
33
Comfort access supports the following func- Releasing
Opening and closing
tions:
> Unlocking/locking the car
> Comfort closing
> Opening upper tailgate
> Starting the engine
Operating requirements
> The car can only be locked once it ascer-
tains that the remote control being carried is
Take a firm hold of one of the door handles,
not located inside the car.
arrow 1. This corresponds to pressing the
> Approximately two seconds need to elapse button.
before the car can be unlocked and locked
again. Locking
> The engine can only be started once the car Touch the area highlighted in the illustration,
ascertains that the remote control is located arrow 2, with your finger for approx. 1 second.
inside the car.
This corresponds to pressing the but-
ton.
Comparison with conventional remote
control Please make sure that all electrical con-
sumers are switched off prior to locking in
You can control the above functions using com-
order to preserve the battery.<
fort access or by pressing the buttons on the
remote control. Consequently, you should
begin by familiarising yourself with the instruc-
Comfort closing
tions for opening and closing, starting on Hold your finger or the back of your hand
page 26. against the area, arrow 2. Comfort closing, see
page 29.
The features specific to comfort access are
described below.
Opening upper tailgate
A short delay when opening or closing the
Press the button on the upper tailgate. This cor-
windows or panorama glass roof* indi-
responds to pressing the button.
cates that a test is being carried out to ascertain
whether there is a remote control inside the car. If the car detects a remote control which
You may need to repeat the opening or closing has been left in the load area accidentally
operation.< once the upper tailgate has been closed, the lid
will reopen. The hazard warning system flashes
and an audible signal* sounds.<
Switching on radio readiness

Briefly touching the start/stop button switches
on radio readiness, see page 54.
Do not depress the brake, otherwise the
engine will start.<
34
Starting the engine inserting a different remote control in the igni-
You can start the engine or switch on the ignition lock.
Overview
tion when a remote control is inside the car. It is The warning light in the instrument
not necessary to insert the remote control into cluster comes on when the engine is
the ignition lock, see page 54. running: the remote control is no
If the car is unable to detect a remote control, longer inside the car. After the engine has been
once the engine has been switched off, you will switched off, it can only be restarted within
only be able to restart it within approx. approx. 10 seconds, provided no door has been
10 seconds, provided no door has been opened.
opened. The indicator light in the instrument
Controls
cluster comes on and a message
Stopping the engine appears on the control display:
> Remote control not in ignition lock: change the battery in the remote control.
Transmission position P is automatically
engaged after the engine has been Changing the battery
Driving hints
switched off. The battery in the remote control for comfort
> Remote control in ignition lock: access requires replacement from time to time.
If transmission position N is engaged, the 1. Remove the integrated key from the remote
transmission remains in that position after control, see page 26.
the engine has been switched off. 2. Remove the cover.
Before entering a car wash

The vehicle will be able to roll if you observe the
Navigation
following steps:
1. Insert the remote control into the ignition
lock.
2. Depress the brake.
3. Engage transmission position N.
4. Release parking brake.
Entertainment
5. Switch off the engine. 3. Insert a new battery with the plus side up.
6. Leave remote control in the ignition lock. 4. Press the cover back into position.
Dispose of the old battery only at an
Malfunction authorised collecting point or hand it in to
Comfort access may malfunction as a result of BMW Service.<
interference from local radio signals. In this
case, open or close the car using the buttons on
the remote control or the key. You can subse- Windows
quently start the engine by inserting the remote
Observe the windows during the closing
Mobility
control into the ignition lock.

procedure, to avoid any injuries.
The warning light in the instrument Take the remote control with you when you
cluster comes on if an attempt is leave the car, otherwise children, for example,
made to start the engine: engine could operate the windows and possibly injure
starting not possible. The remote control is not themselves.<
inside the car or is faulty. Bring the remote con-
Reference
trol inside the vehicle or have it checked. Try
35
Opening, closing Closing without the trap protection
Opening and closing
function
If an external hazard or ice on the windows does
not allow you to close the windows normally,
proceed as follows:
1. Pull the switch past the pressure point and
keep it there.
2. Pull the switch beyond the pressure point
again within about 4 seconds and keep it
there. The window closes without the trap
> Press the switch until the pressure point is protection function.
felt:
The window is opened for as long as you Safety switch
press the switch.
> Press the switch beyond the pressure point:
The window opens automatically. Press the
switch again to halt the opening movement.
Close the window similarly by pulling the
switch.
There are separate switches in the rear of the
car for the rear windows.
Comfort operation using the remote control or
door lock, see pages 29 or 30. This enables you to prevent the rear door win-
dows being opened and closed at the switches
Comfort closing with comfort access, see
in the rear seat area, for instance by children.
page 34.
When the safety function is switched on, the
LED lights up.
After the ignition is switched off
Press the safety switch when carrying
You can still operate the windows for approx.
children on the rear seat, otherwise care-
1 minute after the remote control has been
less closing of the windows could result in
removed or the ignition switched off.
injury.<
Trap protection
If the closing force of a window exceeds Panorama glass roof*
a specific value as it closes, the closing action is
interrupted and the window reopens slightly. Observe the panorama glass roof during
the closing procedure, to avoid any inju-
Despite the trap protection function,
ries.
make sure that the windows are not
Take the remote control with you when you
obstructed as they close; if this precaution is
leave the car, otherwise children could operate
not taken, the risk remains that thin objects, for
the roof and possibly injure themselves.<
instance, could fail to interrupt the closing
movement.
Do not install any accessories in the movement
range of the windows in order not to impair the
trap protection function.<
36
Raising, opening, closing Comfort position
Each time it is fully opened and subsequently
Overview
closed, the panorama glass roof halts in the
comfort position. If desired, the movement can
then be continued using the switch.
The comfort position minimises wind noise
inside the car.
Trap protection
Controls
If the panorama glass roof or sliding trim
Press the switch or push it in the required direc- encounters an obstruction during closing from
tion as far as the pressure point. approximately one-third of the roof aperture, or
With the sliding trim open, the roof can be during closing from the raised position, the
closed, opened and tilted independently. closing movement is interrupted and the pano-
rama glass roof and sliding trim are opened
When the roof is closed or in the raised position,
Driving hints
again slightly.
the sliding trim can be opened or closed inde-
pendently. Despite the trap protection function,
make sure that the roof is not obstructed
Comfort operation using the remote control or
as it closes; if this precaution is not taken, the
door lock, see pages 29 or 30.
risk remains that thin objects, for instance,
Comfort closing with comfort access, see could fail to interrupt the closing movement.<
page 34.
Closing without the trap protection
Vent position function
Navigation
Press the switch: If there is an external hazard, slide the switch
The glass roof is raised and the sliding trim forward beyond the pressure point and keep it
opened a short distance. there. The roof closes without the trap protec-
tion function.
After the ignition is switched off
After a power failure
Entertainment
You can still operate the roof for approx.
1 minute after the remote control has been After a power failure, it is possible that the roof
removed or the ignition switched off. will only move to the raised position. Then have
the system initialised. BMW recommends that
Automatic opening and closing you have this work performed by BMW Service.
Press the switch beyond the pressure point.
Pressing the switch again stops this movement.
Opening and closing roof and sliding

trim together
Mobility
Press the switch twice in rapid succession

beyond the pressure point.
Pressing the switch again stops this movement.
Reference
37
Adjusting
Adjusting
Safe seated position The locations of the airbags and additional

notes are given on page 89.
A seated position that suitably reflects your
requirements is a vital condition of relaxed driv- Head restraint
ing with a minimum of fatigue. In conjunction
Head restraints adjusted to the correct height
with the seat belts, the head restraints and the
reduce the risk of injuries to the neck in the
airbags, the seated position has a major influ-
event of an accident.
ence on your safety in the event of an accident.
You should therefore observe the following Adjust the head restraint in such a way
notes in order to maintain the protective func- that its centre is at approximately ear
tion of the car's safety systems. level; otherwise, there is an increased risk of
injury should an accident occur.<
For additional notes on carrying children in
safety, see page 50. Push the head restraints for the third row of
seats* to their uppermost position.
Airbags Head restraints see page 42.
Keep your distance from the airbags.
Always grip the steering wheel on the rim, Seat belt
with your hands in the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock All occupants should always fasten their seat
positions, to minimise the risk of injury to the belts before you set off. The airbags are a com-
hands or arms in the event of the airbag being plementary safety feature and not a substitute
triggered. for the seat belts.
No other persons, pets or objects should be Never restrain more than one person with
held or permitted to remain between the airbag each seat belt. Babies or small children
and yourself. must not travel on the lap of another occupant.
Do not use the front airbag cover on the front Around the pelvis, make sure that the belt sits
passenger's side as a tray. Make sure that the firmly on the hips and does not press down on
front passenger likewise adopts a correct the stomach. Do not fasten the seat belt around
seated position and does not rest feet or legs on the neck, pull it across sharp edges or route or
the instrument panel, for example, otherwise fasten it over fixed or fragile objects. Pull the
they could sustain leg injuries in the event of the seat belt tight and without twisting across the
front airbag being triggered. pelvis and shoulder and keep it as close as pos-
Make sure that passengers do not use the side sible to the body in order to avoid it slipping over
or head-level airbags as headrests, otherwise the hips and injuring the stomach in the event of
they may sustain injuries in the event of the air- a frontal collision. Avoid wearing bulky clothing
bags triggering.< and regularly pull the belt in the upper-body
Even if all these instructions are complied with, area taut, otherwise its restraining effect could
certain injuries as a result of contact with the be impaired.
airbag cannot be entirely ruled out, depending If the centre seat belt is used, the wider seat
on the circumstances in which an accident back must be locked in position, see page 121,
occurs. Occupants with sensitive hearing may otherwise the centre seat belt will not have any
be subject to brief and generally temporary restraining effect.<
impaired hearing caused by the ignition and Seat belts, see page 44.
inflation noise.
38
Seats Thigh support*
Overview
Note before adjusting
Do not reposition or calibrate the driver's
seat while the car is in motion. The seat
could move unexpectedly, leading to the driver
losing control of the car, and possibly resulting
in an accident.
Do not adjust manual seats while the car is in
motion, otherwise the restraining effect of
Controls
these seats in the event of an accident could be
Pull the lever and move the thigh support for-
impaired.
ward or back.
Do not recline the driver's or front passenger's
seat back too far, otherwise there will be a risk
Electrical adjustment
of sliding under the seat belt in an accident, so
that the belt loses its protective effect.< Failure to comply with the notes on
Driving hints
page 38 may put your personal safety at
Also observe the notes on damage to seat belts
risk.<
on page 45 and on the head restraint height on
page 42.
Adjusting manually
Failure to comply with the notes on
page 38 may put your personal safety at
risk.<
Navigation
3 Height
4 Seat back
Entertainment
Non-standard, depending on seat:
1 Forward/back
2 Angle of driver's seat
Forward/back: pull the lever up and slide the
seat to the preferred position. After releasing
the lever, move the seat gently forward or back
to make sure it engages properly in position.
Mobility
Angle of driver's seat: pull the lever up and 1 Longitudinal direction*

move the seat until the desired angle is 2 Height*
obtained. After releasing the lever, move the
3 Seat tilt*
seat gently forward or back to make sure it
engages properly in position.
Reference
39
Adjusting lumbar support*
Adjusting
4 Seat back*
Additional, depending on seat: The seat back contour can be altered to provide
more support to the curved, lumbar section of
the spine.
The upper edge of the pelvis and the spinal col-
umn are supported, to encourage an upright but
relaxed seated position.
> To increase or reduce the curvature:
Press switch at front or rear edge.
> To move the curved section up or down:
Press switch at top or bottom.
1 Seat back width*
2 Shoulder support*
Seat, mirror and steering
3 Thigh support*
wheel position memory*
4 Lumbar support*, see further below
You can memorise and call up two different
driver's seat, outside mirror and steering wheel
Seat back width
positions.
The width of the seat back can be adjusted via
the side sections, to adapt lateral support to The seat back width and lumbar support set-
individual requirements. tings are not stored in the position memory.
Shoulder support Memorising

This also supports the back around the shoul-
ders. This results in a relaxed seated position
and reduces the load on the shoulder muscles.
1. Switch on radio readiness or the ignition,

see page 54.
2. Select the desired seat, outside mirror and
steering wheel positions.
40
3. Press the button: 7. Select "Last seat pos." and press the con-
The LED in the button lights up. troller.
Overview
4. Press the desired memory button 1 or 2: 8. Select "After unlocking" or "After door
The LED goes out. opens".
The driver's seat and exterior mirror posi-
tion is saved for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Calling up automatically
Controls
You can choose when the memorised driver's
seat and exterior mirror position is called up.
> Calling up when unlocking the car
> Calling up when opening the driver's door
If this function is used, first make sure that 9. Press the controller.
the footwell behind the driver's seat is
Driving hints
unobstructed. Otherwise persons could be Switching off automatic call-up
injured or objects damaged if the seat should Select "Automatic off" and press the controller.
start to move towards the rear.<
The adjusting procedure is halted when you Calling up manually
press a seat adjustment switch or touch one of Do not call up the memory while the car is
the MEMORY buttons. in motion, otherwise an unexpected seat
or steering wheel movement may cause an
Selecting automatic call-up accident.<
Navigation
iDrive, principle, see page 14.
Comfort function
1. Call up the start menu.
1. Unlock and open the driver's door or switch
on radio readiness.
2. Briefly press memory button 1 or 2 as
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con- desired.
Entertainment
troller.
The adjusting procedure is halted when you
5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker press a seat adjustment switch or touch one of
to the uppermost field. Turn the controller the MEMORY buttons.
controller. Safety function
1. Close the driver's door and switch the igni-
tion on or off.
2. Press memory button 1 or 2 as desired until
the adjusting procedure has been com-
Mobility
pleted.
If the button was pressed accidentally:
Press the button again; the LED will go out.
6. Select "Central locking" and press the con-

Reference
troller.
41
Head restraints Adjusting electrically*
Adjusting
Head restraints adjusted to the correct height

reduce the risk of injuries to the neck in the
event of an accident.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way
that its centre is at approximately ear
level; otherwise, there is an increased risk of
injury should an accident occur. Only remove
the head restraints if no one will be sitting on the
seat in question. Reattach the head restraints
before transporting any passengers on the To remove:
seats; otherwise the passenger's head will be 1. Tilt the seat back to the rear.
unprotected.<
2. Pull the head restraints right up.
3. Give the head restraints a good tug and pull
Front seats: adjusting head restraint
them out.
height
You can adjust the height of the head restraints To fit:
manually or electrically, depending on the type 1. Slide the switch up until the buzzer tone
of seat. changes to indicate that an installed head
restraint would have reached in the upper-
Adjusting manually most position – this should take no longer
than 10 seconds.
2. Insert the head restraints and push them
down on both sides until you hear and feel
them snapping into place.
Front seats: adjusting head restraint

angle
Tilt the head restraint as required.
On the Comfort seat, you adjust the distance
> Up: pull. between the head restraint and the back of your
head via the shoulder support.
> Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
the head restraint down.
Adjusting side sections* of head
To remove:
restraints on the Comfort seat
1. Pull the head restraint up as far as its limit of
travel.
2. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the head
restraint fully out.
Fold the side sections forward to provide

greater lateral support in the rest position.
42
Rear seats and third seat row* Seat back
The seat backs can be adjusted in four stages.
Overview
Adjusting head restraint height
Controls
Pull up the lever and either apply your weight to
> Up: pull.
the seat back or lean forward to relieve it of load.
> Down: press the button, arrow 1, and slide
the head restraint down. Access to the third seat row
Driving hints
Seats at rear
Second seat row
With divided* seats, you can adjust both seats
individually.
Do not adjust the second seat row while
Navigation
the car is in motion, otherwise there is a
risk of injuring the occupants of the third seat Pull the lever and fold the seat forwards.
row.
Ensure that the catches of the second-row There is a recessed handle on the inside
seats engage properly after they have been trim of the door post for ease of entry.<
adjusted. Otherwise the restraining effect of the When folding back the second-row seats,
Entertainment
seat belts could be impaired in the event of an ensure that the footwell beneath the sec-
accident.< ond-row seats is not obstructed. Persons sit-
ting in the third seat row could otherwise be
Forward/back injured, or objects could be damaged.<
Warning light for second seat row:
comes on if the second seat row is
not engaged. In addition, a message
appears on the control display.
Third seat row*

Mobility
The third seat row is divided and offers space

for two persons.
1. Pull the lever up and slide the seat to the Folding up seat back
preferred position. Before folding up the seat back, remove the
roller cover, see page 120.
2. Release the lever and move the seat for-
Reference
ward or back slightly so that it engages.
43
1. Pull the lever, see arrow. This will unlock the Folding down seat back
Adjusting
seat back. 1. Push the head restraints down, see

page 43.
2. Pull the lever, see arrows. This releases the
seat backs.
2. Fold up the seat back and engage it in posi-

tion.
Make sure that the catches engage
properly. If this is not done, even brak- 3. Fold down the seat back.
ing or swerving could be sufficient to dis-
place items of luggage into the occupant
compartment, endangering the occu-
Seat belts
pants.<
3. Push the head restraints to their uppermost Failure to comply with the notes on
position. page 38 may put your personal safety at
risk.<
4. Release the tongue of the seat belt from the
holder, arrow. All occupants should always fasten their seat
belts before you set off. The airbags are a com-
plementary safety feature and not a substitute
for the seat belts.
5. Remove the second tongue from its holder,

arrow 1, and insert it in the seat belt's
release lock, see arrow 2. The belt tongue
must engage audibly. Fastening
The seat belt buckle must audibly engage.
Belt reminder for driver's and front

passenger's seat*
The indicator light lights up and an
audible signal sounds. In addition, a
message will appear on the control
display. Please check whether the seat belt is
fastened correctly.
44
The belt reminder is issued if the driver's seat Heated seats*
belt has not yet been fastened. On certain
Overview
national-market versions, the belt reminder is Front
also activated at road speeds above approx.
8 km/h, approx. 5 mph, if the front passenger's
seat belt is not fastened, if objects are placed on
the front passenger seat, or if the driver or front
passenger unfasten their seat belts.
Opening
Controls
1. Hold onto the belt.
2. Press the red button on the belt buckle.
3. Guide the belt back up to the reel. Press once per temperature stage. The highest
The upper belt anchorage is suitable for adults temperature is indicated by three LEDs.
of any stature as long as they are sitting cor- To switch off: press and hold down the button.
Driving hints
rectly, see page 39.
The two seat belt buckles integrated into the Temperature distribution*
rear bench seat are intended for the left and The temperature distribution between the seat
right seat occupants. The buckle marked cushion and seat back can be varied.
CENTER is only to be used by a person occupy-
ing the centre rear seat.
Damaged seat belts 2. Move the controller to the left to call up
Navigation
In the event of stress due to an accident "Climate".
or damage: replace the belt system, 3. Select "Seat-heating distribution" and
including the seat-belt tensioner and any child press the controller.
restraint systems and have the belt anchorage
4. Move the controller to the left or right to
tested. Have this work performed only by BMW
select "Driver" or "Passenger".
Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW
Entertainment
specifications and has suitably trained person-
nel, otherwise the correct functioning of this
safety equipment is not guaranteed.<
5. Turn the controller. The setting is adopted;

Mobility
you can now change to another field.

Reference
45
Rear 3. Select "Seat climate, driver" or "Seat
Adjusting
climate, front passenger" and press the

controller.
4. Turn the controller to adapt the distribution.
The setting is adopted.
Function as for front seat heating, without tem-

perature distribution.
Active seat ventilation* and

Rear heated seats
seat heating*
Function as front heated seats, no temperature
distribution, see page 45.
Front
Active seat*
1 Seat heating
2 Active seat ventilation
Press button 1 or 2 once per temperature or
ventilation stage. The LED in the corresponding The seat cushion is actively varied by the right
button lights up. and left halves of the seat cushion being raised
and lowered alternately. This helps to avoid
The temperature or ventilation stages are
muscular strain and signs of fatigue, and thus
shown on the control display.
guards against back pains in the lumbar region.
To switch off: press button 1 or 2 for longer.
To switch on, press the button; the LED lights
up.
Temperature distribution
When you switch off the active seat, it may take
The temperature distribution between the seat
up to 1 minute for the two halves of the base
cushion and seat back can be varied.
cushion to return to their home positions.
2. Move the controller to the left to call up
"Climate".
46
Mirrors Before putting the car through a car wash,
fold the mirrors in either manually or by
Overview
Outside mirrors pressing button 3, otherwise they could sustain
damage on account of the car's width.<
The outer sections of the mirrors depict a larger
field of view* than the inner sections. In this
Automatic heating
way, the view to the rear is extended and the
blind spot, as it is known, is reduced in size. When the engine is running or the ignition is
switched on, the automatic heating for both
The objects seen in the mirrors are closer
outside mirrors will be switched on when the
than they appear. Do not gauge your dis-
outside temperature reaches a certain level.
Controls
tance from following traffic based on what you
see in the mirrors, otherwise there is an
Passenger-side mirror tilt-down –
increased risk of accident.<
automatic parking function*
Activating
1. Push the switch to the position for the
Driving hints
driver-side mirror, arrow 1.
1 Adjusting
2 Switching over to the other mirror or auto-
Navigation
matic parking function
3 Folding mirrors in and out*
Memorising mirror positions, see Seat, mirror 2. Engage transmission position R.
and steering wheel position memory on The glass in the mirror on the passenger
page 40. side tilts slightly down. The road surface
Entertainment
close to the car, e.g. the kerb, is then
Adjusting manually brought within the driver's field of view in
The mirrors can also be adjusted manually: by the mirror, for instance while parking the
pressing the mirror glass at its edges. car.
The parking function is switched off if you
Folding mirrors in and out* are towing a trailer.<
At speeds up to approx. 20 km/h, approx.
12 mph, you can fold the mirrors in and back out Deactivating
again by pressing button 3. This can be useful Push the switch to the position for the passen-
for example in car washes or narrow roads, or ger-side mirror, arrow 2.
Mobility
for folding the mirrors back out into the correct

position after they have been folded in manu-
ally.
If the mirrors have been folded in, they are
folded out again when a speed of approx.
40 km/h, approx. 25 mph, is reached.
Reference
47
Inside mirror Adjusting manually
Adjusting
To reduce glare from following vehicles after 1. Fold the lever down.
dark, turn the knob. 2. Move the steering wheel to the preferred
height and angle to suit your seated posi-
Inside and outside mirrors, automatic- tion.
dim*
3. Fold the lever back up.
Adjusting electrically*
There are two photocells in the inside mirror for

this purpose. One photocell is in the mirror
glass, the other slightly offset on the back of the
The steering wheel can be adjusted in four
mirror.
directions.
In order to ensure that the system functions
Memorising the steering wheel position, see
correctly, keep the photocells clean, do not
Seat, mirror and steering wheel position mem-
cover the area between the inside mirror and
ory, page 40.
windscreen, and do not affix adhesive labels or
stickers of any kind to the windscreen directly in
front of the mirror.
Easy entry/exit*
To facilitate entry and exit, the steering wheel
temporarily moves to its highest position.
Steering wheel
Adjusting
Do not adjust the steering wheel position
while the car is in motion, or an accident
may result from any unexpected movement.<
48
Heated steering wheel* A list showing various functions is dis-
played:
Overview
> "Voice output of nav. system"
Spoken instructions for the navigation
system*
> "Air circulation on / off"
To shut off the entry of outside air per-
manently, see Automatic Air Recircula-
tion Control AUC* on page 105
Controls
> "Mute on / off"
With the ignition switched on, press the button; To mute the audio sources
the LED comes on. > "Display on / off"
To switch the control display on/off
Programmable buttons on the steering > "Telephone list"*
wheel To show/hide telephone book or last list
Driving hints
of saved numbers displayed
> "Next entertainment source"
To change the audio source
5. Select the desired function and press the
controller.
6. Select a button if appropriate and press the
controller.
Navigation
You can program the buttons with a function of
your choice.
The setting is saved for the remote control cur-
rently in use.
Entertainment
1. Press the button.
The chosen function can be operated with the
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller. appropriate button.
4. Select "Steering wheel buttons" and press
the controller. Operating a function
Press the appropriate button on the steering
wheel.
Mobility
If you have programmed "Voice output of nav.

system" for one of the buttons:
> Switching spoken instructions on/off:
Press and hold down the button.
> Repeating the last spoken instruction:
Press the button.
Reference
49
Carrying children in safety
Important considerations Fitting child restraint

Do not leave children unattended in the systems
car, as they could otherwise endanger BMW Service can supply suitable child restraint
themselves and/or other persons by opening systems for every age and weight category.
the doors, for example.<
When selecting, installing and using child
All the seats in your BMW, except for the restraint systems, observe the manufac-
driver's seat and the third seat row*, are in prin- turer's instructions, as the protective effect
ciple suitable for the installation of universal could otherwise be impaired.
child restraint systems for all age groups, pro- Following an accident, have all components of
vided these have been approved for the age the child restraint system and the seat belt that
group in question. was used to secure it checked and renewed if
necessary. Always have this work performed
Always carry children at the rear either by BMW Service or by a workshop that
Accident research has shown that the safest operates to BMW specifications and has suita-
place for children is on the rear seat. bly trained personnel.<
Children under 12 or smaller than Comply with the notes on seat belts on
150 cm, approx. 5 ft, should always travel page 38, or there may be a risk to your
on the second-row seats using suitable child personal safety.<
restraint systems, otherwise there is a greater If a third seat row* is fitted, ensure that
risk of injury in the event of an accident.< the second-row seat on which the child
restraint system is fitted is correctly engaged,
Exception for the front passenger's otherwise there is an increased risk of injury for
seat the child in the event of an accident.
If you nevertheless need to fit a child Do not fit child restraint systems on the third-
restraint system on the front passenger's row seats, as these child restraint systems will
seat, the passenger's front and side airbags afford less protection there.<
must be deactivated, otherwise a child travel-
ling on that seat will be at considerable risk of
injury if the airbags are triggered, even if it is
wearing a child restraint system.<
You can have a key-operated switch fitted for
disabling the front and side airbags on the front
passenger's side. BMW Service will be pleased
to advise you on this.
50
On the front passenger's seat car. The corresponding classes are indicated
Before fitting a child restraint system on on the child seats themselves.
Overview
the front passenger's seat, make sure
that the front and side airbags on the front pas- Rear seats
senger's side have been disabled, otherwise A - ISO / F3 D - ISO / R2
the child travelling on that seat will be at consid- B - ISO / F2 E - ISO / R1
erable risk of injury if the airbags are triggered.<
B1 - ISO / F2X F - ISO / L1
You can have a key-operated switch fitted for
disabling the front and side airbags on the front C - ISO / R3 G - ISO / L2
passenger's side. BMW Service will be pleased
Controls
to advise you on this. Brackets for lower ISOFIX mountings
Before fitting the child seat, pull the belt away
Seat height from the area around the mountings.
Before fitting a universal child restraint system Before fitting the child seat, remove the
to the front passenger seat, move the seat up as caps* from the mountings for the lower
Driving hints
far as it will go in order to achieve optimal place- ISOFIX anchorages, otherwise the ISOFIX
ment of the seat belt. Do not adjust the height of anchorages will have no restraining effect.<
the seat with the child restraint system fitted.
Seat back width*

The seat back width adjustment feature
of the front passenger's seat must be fully
extended. Once the child seat has been fitted,
do not call up a memory position, otherwise the
Navigation
stability of the child seat on the front passen-
ger's seat may be impaired.<
1. Open the seat back to its widest position,
Make sure that both of the lower ISOFIX
see page 40.
mountings are properly engaged and that
2. Fit the child seat. the child restraint system is resting securely
Entertainment
against the seat back.<
ISOFIX child seat mountings

For details of how to install and use ISO-
FIX child restraint systems, please con-
sult the separate operating and safety instruc-
tions supplied by the system's manufacturer.<
Correct ISOFIX child restraint systems

The following ISOFIX child restraint system
Mobility
may be used on the designated seats in your

The brackets for the lower ISOFIX mountings
are located at the positions marked by the
arrows, in the gap between the seat and the
seat back.
Reference
51
Attachment points for upper ISOFIX
retaining strap
Use the attachment points for the upper
ISOFIX retaining strap only for securing
child restraint systems, otherwise the attach-
ment points could be damaged.
Do not fit child restraint systems on the third-
row seats, as these child restraint systems will
afford less protection there.<
For ISOFIX child restraint systems with an

1 Direction of travel
upper retaining strap, there are two additional
attachment points on the second seat row, see 2 Head restraint
arrows. 3 Hook on upper retaining strap
4 Attachment point
Guide on upper retaining strap
5 Seat back
Ensure that the upper retaining strap
6 Upper retaining strap of child restraint sys-
does not run across sharp edges and is
tem
not twisted before it reaches the upper attach-
ment point, otherwise the belt may not secure When using the load area cover, feed the upper
the child restraint system in the intended man- retaining strap between the seat backs of the
ner in the event of an accident.< second row and the load area cover.
Fitting upper ISOFIX retaining strap on

second seat row
1. Push the head restraint up.
2. Guide the upper retaining strap between
the head restraint mounts.
52
3. Engage the upper retaining strap in the
attachment point with the hook.
Overview
4. Push the head restraint to its lowest posi-
tion.
5. Pull the upper retaining strap until taut.
When driving with children
Controls
Child safety catches in rear doors
Driving hints
Push down the locking lever on the rear doors:
the door in question can now only be opened
from the outside.
Navigation
Safety switch for window lifts
Press the safety switch for the window lifts, see
page 36, if children are travelling on the rear
seat.
Entertainment
Mobility
Reference
53
Driving
Driving
Ignition lock Radio readiness

Individual electrical consumers can operate.
The time and the outside temperature are dis-
played on the instrument cluster.
Radio readiness is switched off automatically:
> When the remote control is removed from
the ignition lock
> When you touch the sensitive panel on the
door handle, if the car is fitted with comfort
access*, see Locking on page 34
Insert the remote control fully into the ignition
lock.
Ignition on
Radio readiness switches on. Individual electri- All electrical consumers are ready for operation.
cal consumers can operate. The odometer and trip distance recorder
appear in the instrument cluster, see page 65.
Removing the remote control from the When the engine is switched off, please
ignition lock switch off the ignition and all electrical
Press the remote control in briefly; it is ejected a consumers you are not using in order to pre-
short way. serve the battery.<
The ignition switches off, if it was on before-
hand. Radio readiness and ignition off
All indicator and warning lights in the instru-
ment cluster go out.
Start/stop button
Starting the engine
Never run the engine in enclosed spaces,
as inhaling the harmful exhaust gas can
lead to loss of consciousness with fatal conse-
quences. The exhaust gas contains carbon
monoxide, which is colourless and odourless,
but highly toxic.
Do not leave the car unattended with the engine
running, as this constitutes a hazard.
Each time the start/stop button is pressed, Before leaving the car with the engine running,
radio readiness or the ignition is switched on or engage transmission positions N or P and apply
off. the parking brake to prevent the car from mov-
Pressing the start/stop button while the ing.<
brake is depressed starts the engine.< Do not warm up the engine with the car at a
standstill; it is preferable to set off, driving at
moderate engine speeds.
54
The engine will start if you depress the Stopping the engine
brake and press the start/stop button.<
Overview
Always take the remote control with you
Avoid starting, stopping and restarting
when you leave the car.
the engine in rapid succession or
When parking on an incline, apply the parking
repeated attempts to start the engine if it does
brake, otherwise the car could roll away.<
not fire, otherwise unburned or only partially
combusted fuel could reach the catalytic con-
Procedure
verter, which could overheat and sustain dam-
age as a result.< 1. With the car at a standstill, engage trans-
mission position P.
Controls
2. Press the start/stop button.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Remove the remote control from the igni-
tion lock, see page 54.
Driving hints
Before entering a car wash
The vehicle will be able to roll if you observe the
following steps:
Remote control in the ignition lock or with com- 1. With comfort access*: insert the remote
fort access in the vehicle, see page 33. control into the ignition lock.
1. Depress the brake. 2. Depress the brake.
2. Press the start/stop button. 3. Engage transmission position N.
Starting proceeds automatically for a certain 4. Release parking brake.
Navigation
time, and ceases automatically as soon as the 5. Switch off the engine.
engine has fired.
Transmission position P is engaged:
Diesel engine > Automatically after approx. 30 minutes
When the engine is cold and the temperature is > If you remove the remote control from the
below approx. 06/327, starting may be ignition lock
Entertainment
delayed by automatic preheating. The preheat-
ing indicator light in the instrument cluster
lights up. A message appears on the control Parking brake
display.
Principle
Your BMW is equipped with an electromechan-
ical parking brake that is applied and released
via a button.
The fundamental purpose of the parking brake
is to prevent the stationary vehicle from rolling
Mobility
away.
With the engine switched off, the parking brake
acts on the rear wheels via an electromechani-
cal system. With the engine running, the park-
ing brake acts on the disc brakes of both the
front and the rear wheels via the brake hydrau-
Reference
lics.
55
Applying When you leave the car, take the remote
Driving
control with you, otherwise e.g. children

could release the parking brake.<
Malfunction
In the event of failure or malfunctioning of the
parking brake, protect the vehicle from rolling
away e.g. with a chock if you leave the vehicle.
Releasing parking brake manually

Pull the button. The parking brake is applied. In the event of power failure or an electrical fault,
you can release the parking brake manually.
The indicator light in the instrument
cluster comes on red. The parking Before releasing the parking brake manu-
brake is applied. ally and each time the car is parked with
the parking brake released, make sure that
The remote control need not be in the ignition
position P of the automatic transmission is
lock in order to apply the parking brake.
engaged, see page 58. Note the display in the
instrument cluster.
While driving Protect the car additionally against rolling away,
If as an exception it is necessary to use the e.g. with a chock. Depending on the incline,
parking brake while on the move, pull the button there is otherwise a risk of the car rolling
for longer: away.<
The vehicle will be braked forcefully for as long
If the automatic transmission's interlock also
as the button is pulled.
needs to be released manually, observe the fol-
The instrument light in the instrument lowing sequence:
cluster lights up red, a gong sounds
1. If necessary, first release the parking brake
and the brake lights come on.
manually.
As soon as you have braked the vehicle almost
2. Then release the automatic transmission's
to a standstill, approx. 3 km/h, approx. 2 mph,
interlock manually, see page 59.
the parking brake will remain applied.
Starting assistance and towing away, see from
page 235.
Releasing
Releasing
1. Open the left-hand side trim in the load
area.
2. Remove the first aid pouch* and warning
triangle*. Close the warning triangle holder.
Press the button with the footbrake depressed.

The indicator light in the instrument
cluster goes out.
56
3. Insert the release tool, located in the tool kit The indicator light in the instrument
beneath the floor panel, see page 225, at cluster goes out as soon as the parking
Overview
the release point. brake is operational again.
Any noises heard during this process are nor-
mal. Restoring to use may take several sec-
onds.
Automatic transmission with

Steptronic
Controls
In addition to the fully automatic mode, you can
perform manual gearshifts with the Steptronic,
4. Pull the release tool up vigorously to over- see page 58.
come the mechanical resistance, see arrow,
until a noticeable increase in force is felt and Transmission positions
Driving hints
the parking brake is clearly heard to disen- P R N D M/S + –
gage.
Apply the brake until you are ready to
5. Stow away the release tool, warning trian- move off; this will prevent the car creep-
gle* and first aid pouch* and close the left- ing when a gear is selected.<
hand side trim in the load area.
Have any faults rectified either by the Displays in the instrument cluster
nearest BMW Service or by a workshop
that operates to BMW specifications and has
Navigation
suitably trained personnel. If the parking brake
has been released manually due to a fault, it can
only be restored to operation by expert person-
nel.<
If it has been released manually, the
actual status of the parking brake may not
Entertainment
tally with the status shown by the indicator
light.<
P R N D DS M1 to M6
Restoring to use after a power failure The transmission position is displayed, or the
Only if the parking brake has been current gear in manual mode.
released manually following a power fail-
ure may its use subsequently be resumed. The Engaging transmission positions
parking brake's functioning is otherwise not > The transmission positions D, R or N can
assured and there is the risk that the car will only be engaged when the engine is run-
start to roll away even if the parking brake is ning.
Mobility
applied.< > Before moving the lever away from P or N

with the car stationary, first depress the
Procedure brake, otherwise the desired gearshift will
1. Switch on the ignition. not be performed.
2. Press the button with the footbrake Apply the brake until you are ready to
depressed. move off; this will prevent the car from
Reference
creeping when a gear is selected.<
57
Engaging D, R, N P Park
Driving
Engage this gear only when the car is standing

still. The rear wheels are locked.
P is engaged automatically as soon as
you switch off the engine, unless N is
engaged and, on vehicles with comfort access,
the remote control is in the ignition lock, see
page 54.<
N Neutral
Briefly press the selector lever in the desired You can select this in a car wash, for example.
direction, possibly overcoming a pressure The car will be able to roll.
point. When moving from P or R, press button 1 N remains engaged after the engine has
simultaneously. been switched off if you leave the remote
The transmission position engaged is displayed control in the ignition lock. This function is use-
on the selector lever. ful e.g. in a car wash, see page 55. P is engaged
As soon as you release the selector lever, it automatically after approx. 30 minutes.<
returns to the centre position.
D Drive, automatic position
Engaging P Use this position for all normal driving. All for-
ward gears are selected as necessary.
Kick-down
You can achieve maximum performance in the
kick-down position.
Press the accelerator pedal down beyond the
regular full-throttle position; increased resist-
ance will be felt.
Sport program and M/S manual-shift

Press button P. mode
Observe also the supplementary information on
the automatic transmission.
P is engaged automatically if you
unfasten the driver's seat belt and open
the driver's door with the car at a standstill and
the transmission in position R or D.<
R Reverse
Engage this gear only when the car is standing
still. Press selector lever to the left from transmis-
An interlock prevents you from inadvertently sion position D:
engaging transmission position R. To cancel The Sport program is activated and DS appears
the interlock, press the release button 1. in the instrument cluster. This position is rec-
ommended for a performance-oriented driving
style.
58
When you press the selector lever forwards or Releasing
back, the manual-shift mode is activated and 1. Push back the drinks holder cover and take
Overview
Steptronic changes gear. The instrument clus- out the base mat on the web between the
ter shows M1 to M6. drinks holders, arrow 1.
Upshifts and downshifts are performed only at a
suitable engine or road speed; for example, the
transmission will not shift down if the resulting
engine speed would be too high. The gear
selected appears briefly in the instrument clus-
ter, followed by the gear actually in use.
Controls
To return to the automatic mode, press the
selector lever to the right into position D.
Releasing and engaging transmission

interlock manually 2. Use the release tool from the toolkit to open
the lid in the base of the drinks holders,
Driving hints
In the event of a power failure, e.g. battery
page 225, see arrow 2.
flat or disconnected or an electrical fault,
the transmission interlock must be released 3. Open the lock*, if fitted, with the integral
manually, otherwise the rear wheels will be key of the remote control, see page 26, and
blocked and it will not be possible to tow the take it out.
car.< 4. Insert the release tool in the aperture,
Press the brake when releasing the trans- arrow 3.
mission interlock manually, otherwise
there is a risk of the car starting to roll.<
Navigation
Only release the transmission interlock manu-
ally to allow the car to be towed. Engage the
transmission interlock again once the car has
been parked.
If the parking brake likewise has to be released
Entertainment
manually, observe the following sequence:
1. Protect the car against rolling.
2. Release the parking brake manually, see 5. Turn the release tool as far as its limit posi-
page 56. tion, arrow 4, then push it down. The trans-
mission interlock is released.
3. Release the transmission interlock of the
automatic transmission manually. Engage the transmission interlock again
once the car has been parked. There is
otherwise a risk of the car rolling away.<
Mobility
Reference
59
Locking If the indicator light flashes more rapidly
Driving
than usual, a flashing turn indicator bulb

has failed; if towing a trailer, the failed bulb
could be on the trailer.<
Indicating a turn briefly

Press and hold the lever as far as the pressure
point for as long as you wish to indicate a turn.
Triple turn signal

1. Pull out the release tool. Press the lever as far as the pressure point; the
The transmission interlock is engaged flashing turn indicator flashes three times.
again. You can activate or deactivate this function.
2. Insert the lock* if applicable and lock it. iDrive, principle, see page 14.
3. Close the cover in the drinks holder base 1. Press the button.
and insert the mat again. The start menu is called up.
4. Close the drinks holder cover and stow 2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
away the release tool. 3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
Starting assistance and towing away, from 4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
page 235. troller.
Flashing turn indicators/ until "Light" is selected and press the con-
headlight flasher/high-beam troller.
headlights
6. Select "Triple turn signal activation" and

press the controller.
1 High-beam headlights
The triple turn signal is activated.
2 Headlight flasher
3 Flashing turn indicators rently in use.
Indicating a turn
Press the lever beyond the pressure point.
To cancel it manually, press the lever as far as
the pressure point.
60
Wiper system Activating the rain sensor
Overview
Controls
Press the button, arrow 3. The LED in the but-
1 Switching on wipers ton lights up.
2 Switching off wipers or flick-wipe
3 Activating/deactivating intermittent opera- Adjusting rain sensor sensitivity
tion or rain sensor* Turn the knurled wheel 5.
Driving hints
4 Cleaning windscreen and headlights*
Deactivating the rain sensor
5 Adjusting the delay or the sensitivity of the
rain sensor Press the button again, arrow 3. The LED goes
out.
Switching on wipers Deactivate the rain sensor in an automatic
Pull the lever upwards, arrow 1. car wash, to prevent the car's wipers
being activated inadvertently and damaged.<
The lever returns to the home position when
released.
Navigation
Cleaning windscreen and headlights*
Normal wiper speed Pull the lever, arrow 4.
Press once. Fluid from the washer fluid reservoir is sprayed
The wipers switch to intermittent wipe when on to the windscreen and the wipers are oper-
the car is stationary. ated briefly.
Entertainment
When the car's lights are switched on, the head-
Fast wiper speed lights are simultaneously cleaned at practical
Press twice or press beyond the pressure point. intervals.
The wipers switch to normal speed when the The driver should only operate washer
car is stationary. systems if certain that the fluid will not
freeze to the windscreen and interfere with the
Rain sensor* view ahead. Screenwash should therefore be
The speed of the wipers is regulated automati- added to the fluid, see Washer fluid. Do not run
cally according to how hard it is raining. The rain the washer systems if the washer fluid reservoir
sensor is located on the windscreen, directly in is empty, or the washer pump will sustain dam-
Mobility
front of the inside mirror. age.<
Windscreen washer jets

The windscreen washer jets are heated auto-
matically while the engine is running or the igni-
tion switched on.
Reference
61
Rear window wiper When filling with water, to which screenwash
Driving
has been added if required, always follow the

manufacturer's instructions.
Mix the water and screenwash additive
before filling the washer fluid reservoir, to
make sure the correct concentration is main-
tained.<
Capacity
Approx. 6 litres, approx. 10.6 pints.
1 Intermittent operation. It operates continu-
ously when reverse gear is engaged
2 Rear window washer
Cruise control*
Do not run the washer systems if the Principle
washer fluid reservoir is empty, or the
You can activate the cruise control system with
washer pump will sustain damage.<
braking function once you reach a speed of
approx. 30 km/h or 20 mph. The car then mem-
orises and maintains the speed that you specify
Washer fluid using the lever on the steering column. To
Screenwash for the washer fluid is highly maintain the specified speed, the system also
flammable. Keep it away from possible applies the brakes if engine braking alone is
ignition sources and store it only in the carefully insufficient to prevent the car from going too
sealed original containers, out of reach of chil- fast on downhill stretches.
dren. Comply with the instructions on the con- Do not use cruise control if adverse con-
tainers.< ditions prevent driving at constant speed,
e.g. winding roads, heavy traffic or poor surface
Filler neck for washer fluid conditions such as snow, rain, ice or loose
Only top up washer fluid when the engine material. Otherwise you could lose control of
is cool, to avoid contact with hot engine the car and cause an accident as a result.<
components. There is otherwise a risk of fires if
the fluid is spilled, and a risk of sustaining burns One lever for all functions
from touching hot components.<
1 Memorising and maintaining or increasing

All washer jets are supplied via a single reser- the speed
voir. 2 Memorising and maintaining or reducing
the speed
3 Deactivating cruise control
62
4 Calling up memorised speed Deactivating cruise control
Briefly press the lever upwards or downwards,
Overview
Maintaining current speed arrow 3.
Tap the lever, arrow 1, or pull briefly, arrow 2. The displays in the speedometer go out.
The car's current speed is memorised and In addition, the system is automatically deacti-
maintained. It is displayed on the speedometer vated:
and appears briefly in the instrument cluster. > If you brake
It may also prove impossible to maintain the set > If you engage transmission position N
speed with the available engine power on uphill
> If you activate DTC or DSC
Controls
gradients. If engine braking alone is insufficient
to prevent the car from speeding on a downhill > If you activate HDC
stretch, the system will apply the brakes lightly. > If you apply the parking brake
> If driving stability control systems are acti-
Increasing speed vated
Press the lever to the pressure point or beyond, Cruise control is not deactivated by use of the
Driving hints
arrow 1, as often as needed until the desired accelerator. The memorised speed is re-estab-
speed is set. lished and maintained when you move off the
> Each time the lever is pressed as far as the accelerator.
pressure point, the speed increases by
approx. 1 km/h or 1 mph. Warning light
> Each time the lever is pressed beyond the The warning light comes on if cruise
pressure point, the speed is increased to control has been deactivated auto-
the next multiple of 10 km/h or 5 mph on the matically, e.g. because DSC has cut
Navigation
speedometer display. in. A message appears on the control display.
The system memorises and maintains the
speed. Calling up memorised speed
Briefly press the button, arrow 4. The memo-
Accelerating with the lever rised speed is recalled and maintained.
To accelerate gently: The memorised speed value is erased when the
Entertainment
Press the lever as far as the pressure point, ignition is switched off, and can no longer be
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached. called up.
To accelerate more sharply:
Displays in the instrument cluster
Press the lever beyond the pressure point,
arrow 1, until the desired speed is reached.
The car accelerates without the accelerator
pedal being pressed. The system memorises
and maintains the speed.
Mobility
Reducing speed
Pull the lever as often as necessary, arrow 2,
until the desired speed is displayed.
Functions as for increasing speed, except that 1 Memorised speed
the car's speed is reduced instead.
2 Selected speed is displayed briefly
Reference
63
If the display --- km/h or --- mph appears
Driving
briefly in the instrument cluster, the

conditions for the system to operate may not
currently be met.<
Malfunction
The warning light comes on if the
system has failed. A message
appears on the control display. For
further information, see from page 72.
64
Everything under control
Overview
Distance recorder, outside Calling up date
temperature display, clock
Controls
Press the button on the flashing turn indicator
lever up; the date is displayed.
Driving hints
1 Knob in the instrument cluster Adjusting date, see page 76.
2 Outside temperature display and clock The display changes between clock and out-
3 Odometer and trip distance recorder side temperature display, date and Check Con-
trol messages by pressing the button up or
Knob in the instrument cluster down repeatedly, see page 73.
> With the ignition switched on
Press the button:
Outside temperature warning
Navigation
Resetting trip distance recorder Once the display shows a temperature of below
+36/377, a signal sounds and a warning light
Press button for approx. 5 seconds:
lights up. A message appears on the control
Displaying service requirements, see
display. There is an increased risk of ice.
page 69
Ice can still form even at temperatures
> With the ignition switched off
above +36/377. You should therefore
Press the button:
Entertainment
drive carefully over bridges and shaded roads;
Displaying time, outside temperature and otherwise there is an increased risk of acci-
distance recorder briefly dent.<
Units of measurement Odometer and trip distance recorder

To set the appropriate units of measurement Resetting trip distance recorder:
km or mls for the distance recorder and 6 or7 With the ignition switched on, press button 1 in
for the outside temperature, see page 76. the instrument cluster.
rently in use. When car is parked
Mobility
To display the time, outside temperature and

Time, date, outside temperature distance reading briefly after the remote control
display has been removed from the ignition lock:
The outside temperature and time of day are Press button 1 in the instrument cluster.
displayed from radio readiness.
Adjusting time, see page 75.
Reference
65
Revolution counter Energy control
Shows the momentary fuel consumption. This

enables you to check how economical and envi-
ronmentally friendly your current driving style
is.
Fuel gauge
Avoid engine speeds in the red warning field,

see arrow. In this zone the fuel supply is inter-
rupted to protect the engine.
Coolant temperature
Should the coolant and therefore the engine
become too hot, a warning light will light up. In Fuel tank capacity: approx. 85 litres, approx.
addition, a message will appear on the control 18.7 gal. Notes on refuelling, see page 214.
display. If the car is at an angle for some time, for exam-
Checking coolant level, see page 222. ple on a long mountain road, the value in the dis-
play may fluctuate to some extent.
Reserve
Once the fuel level has fallen to the reserve
zone, a message appears on the control display
for a short time and the remaining operating
range is displayed on the computer. If the
remaining range is less than approx. 50 km,
approx. 30 miles, the message is displayed per-
manently on the control display.
If the range is below 50 km, approx.
30 miles, refuel the car, otherwise the
engine's functions are not assured and damage
may occur.<
66
Computer For a variety of distances
You can show the average speed and average
Overview
Displays in the instrument cluster consumption for two different distances on the
control display, see below and the Journey
computer* section.
Displays on the control display

You can also call up the computer via iDrive,
principle see page 14.
Controls
2. Move the controller to the right to call up
To access the information, press the BC button "Navigation".
on the flashing turn indicator lever. Without navigation system*:
The following items of information are dis- Call up "OBC".
Driving hints
played in the order listed: 3. Select "On-board Info" and press the con-
> Range troller.
> Average speed

> Average fuel consumption
Range
This display indicates how far the car can prob-
Navigation
ably be driven on the fuel remaining in the tank.
The distance is calculated on the basis of the
way the car has been driven over the past
30 km, approx. 20 miles.
If the range is below 50 km, approx. 4. Select "Computer" and press the control-
30 miles, refuel the car, otherwise the ler.
Entertainment
may occur.<
Average speed
The calculation of average speed ignores any
stationary periods where the engine was
switched off.
To reset the average speed: press the BC but-
ton on the flashing turn indicator lever for
approx. 2 seconds. > Estimated time of arrival at destination and
Mobility
distance from destination:

Average fuel consumption > Enter a distance manually in the compu-
The average fuel consumption is calculated for ter, see further below.
the period since the engine was last started.
> Enter a destination in the navigation sys-
To reset the average consumption: tem*, see page 138.
Press the BC button on the flashing turn indica-
Reference
> Range
tor lever for approx. 2 seconds.
67
> Average speed 4. Select "Journey computer" and press the
> Average fuel consumption controller.
Resetting values
You can reset the values for average speed and
average consumption:
1. Select the respective menu item and press
the controller.
2. Press the controller again to confirm your
selection.
Entering distance manually > Departure time

1. Select "Distance to dest." and press the > Journey time
controller. > Distance covered
> Average speed
> Average fuel consumption
To start, stop or reset all values in the journey
computer:
1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired menu item.
2. Turn the controller to set the distance to the Display options

destination. You can have the computer or the journey com-
3. Press the controller to adopt the setting. puter displayed in the assistance window.
The distance is automatically preset during 1. Move the controller to the right to switch to
route guidance by the navigation system*. the assistance window and press the con-
troller.
Journey computer*
The journey computer is suitable e.g. for a holi-
day trip.
2. Call up "Navigation".
Without navigation system*:
Call up "OBC".
3. Select "On-board Info" and press the con-
troller.
2. Select "Computer" or "Journey computer".
68
Overview
Controls
Service requirements
Driving hints
The distance remaining to the next service and
Navigation
its date are displayed briefly when the ignition is
switched on.
For certain items of maintenance work, you can
also call up the distance or time remaining indi-
vidually in the instrument cluster.
Entertainment
1. Press the knob in the instrument cluster for

Mobility
approx. 5 seconds until the service require-

ments are displayed.
2. Press the knob repeatedly to display the
service requirements for individual aspects.
Reference
69
Displaying service requirements
1 Button for selecting the display 6 Rear brake pads

2 Service requirements 7 Brake fluid
3 Engine oil The order in which the maintenance items are
4 Statutory inspections* displayed may vary. The data for the next main-
tenance due is shown first.
5 Front brake pads
Supplementary information
You can have further information about the until "Service requirements" is selected and
scope of maintenance displayed on the control press the controller.
display, see page 14.
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
4. Select "Service" and press the controller.
70
6. Select "Status" and press the controller. 3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
ler.
Overview
until "Service requirements" is selected and
6. Select "Status" and press the controller.
7. Select "Stat. vehicle insp." and press the
Controls
controller.
A list of selected maintenance routines and
inspections required by law is displayed.
You can call up more information about each
entry:
Select the entry and press the controller.
Driving hints
8. Select "Schedule date for service" and
press the controller. The month is selected.
9. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
Navigation
To exit the menu:
Select the arrow and press the controller.
Symbols
Entertainment
No servicing is currently needed.
Servicing or an inspection required by law

is due soon. Please arrange a service 10. Press the controller to adopt the setting.
appointment. The year is selected.
Servicing is overdue. 11. Turn the controller to make the adjustment.
12. Press the controller to adopt the setting.
The date input is memorised.
Entering deadlines for legally required
inspections* To exit the menu:
Mobility

Make sure that the date on the control display is
always set correctly, see page 76, otherwise
the Condition Based Service CBS cannot func-
tion correctly.
Reference
71
Check Control Explanatory text messages
Principle
The Check Control monitors car functions and
alerts you to any faults in the systems moni-
tored. The system alerts you by means of indi-
cator or warning lights in the instrument cluster,
possibly accompanied by an audible signal, and
text messages at the bottom of the control dis-
play.
Text messages appearing at the lower edge of
Indicator and warning lights the control display explain the meaning of the
indicator and warning lights that have lit up.
Indicator and warning lights can light up in a

variety of combinations and colours.
You can subsequently call up additional infor-
mation for most Check Control messages, e.g.
the cause of a malfunction and what action is
required on your part, see below.
In urgent cases, this information will be shown
immediately when the corresponding light
lights up.
To exit the displayed information:
means that a Check Control message has Hiding Check Control messages
been issued. The symbol remains visible even if
the Check Control message disappears again
after a short time. The warning lights and text
messages are memorised and can be called up
again subsequently, see also page 73.
Press the button in the flashing turn indicator

lever.
72
Some Check Control messages are displayed
until the faults have been rectified. These mes-
Overview
sages cannot be hidden. If several faults occur
at the same time, they are displayed in succes-
sion.
Other messages are automatically hidden after
approx. 20 seconds, but are not deleted.
Displaying memorised Check Control

messages
Controls
6. Select a text message and press the con-
troller.
Driving hints
1. Press the button in the flashing turn indica-
tor lever down. "CHECK OK" or the memo-
rised Check Control messages appear in To exit the display:
the display. Select the arrow and press the controller.
"CHECK OK" is displayed if there are no
Navigation
messages. Displaying the urgency of malfunctions
Check Control messages are accompanied
by text messages on the control display.
2. Press the button to call up further mes-
sages or the time and outside temperature.
Entertainment
Displaying further information
subsequently
The start menu is called up. Depending on the equipment specification, the
following symbols are displayed alongside the
Check Control messages in the memory:
3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
There are no malfunctions in the systems
ler.
monitored.
Mobility

There are malfunctions in the systems
5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker monitored. Supplementary information is
to the uppermost field. Turn the controller given on the control display for certain
until "Check Control messages" is selected malfunctions.
and press the controller.
The symbols also show the service require-
ments status, see page 71.
Reference
73
Speed limit* Stopwatch*
You can enter a speed at which you are to be iDrive, principle, see page 14.
alerted by means of a Check Control message. 1. Call up the start menu.
You can use this feature e.g. to ensure that you
do not exceed the speed limit in a built-up area.
A renewed reminder of this speed limit will not
Call up "OBC".
be given unless you have undercut it by at least
5 km/h, approx. 3 mph, in the meantime. 3. Select "On-board Info" and press the con-
troller.
Displaying, setting or altering limit 4. Select "Stopwatch" and press the control-
iDrive, principle, see page 14. ler.
Call up "OBC".
3. Select "On-board Info" and press the con-
troller.
4. Select "Limit" and press the controller.
Starting, stopping or resetting

> Select "Start" and press the controller. The
stopwatch starts at the time displayed.
> Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The stopwatch is reset and starts again if it
was running previously.
> Select "Stop" and press the controller.
5. Select the speed and press the controller. Timekeeping is stopped.
6. Turn the controller to adjust the limit.
Taking an intermediate time reading
Select "Interm. time" and press the controller.
The limit is automatically switched on.
The intermediate reading is displayed below
the current time display.
Memorising actual speed as limit value
You can also call up other functions at any
Select "Accept current speed" and press the
time while the stopwatch is running. The
controller. The actual speed is memorised as
stopwatch continues to run in the back-
the limit value.
ground.<
Activating limit
Select "On" and press the controller.
The limit is automatically switched on.
74
Settings on the control 2. You may need to move the controller for-
ward once to switch to the first field from
display
Overview
the top.
1. Press the button once or twice until
the start menu is displayed.
Controls
3. Turn the controller until "Clock" is selected
Driving hints
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
selected and press the controller.
Navigation
4. Turn the controller until "Set time" is
Setting time
Entertainment
1. Turn the controller until "Clock / Date" is
Adjusting settings
1. Turn the controller to set the hour and press
the controller.
Mobility
2. Turn the controller to set the minutes and

The system accepts the new time.
Reference
75
Switching on hour signal* Brightness of the control display
Shortly before the hour, signal tones will be The brightness is automatically adjusted to
emitted. ambient light conditions. However, you can
Select "Hour memo" and press the controller. adjust the basic setting.
The hour signal is switched on. iDrive, principle, see page 14.
The setting is saved for the remote control cur- 1. Press the button.
rently in use. The start menu is called up.
Setting the time format
1. Select "Time format" and press the control-
4. Select "Display settings" and press the
ler.
controller.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
The setting is saved for the remote control cur- until "Brightness" is selected and press the
rently in use. controller.
Setting date
1. Select "Date" and press the controller.
6. Move the controller to the right if necessary,

to call up "Display".
7. Turn the controller until the desired setting
2. Select "Set date" and press the controller. is obtained.
The first part of the date setting is selected,
in this example the day.
rently in use.
4. Press the controller to adopt the setting. Units of measurement
The next part of the time setting is selected. You can alter the units of measurement for fuel
5. Complete the setting. Once the setting has consumption, distance, temperature and pres-
been completed, the date is memorised. sure.
Altering the date format
1. Select "Date format" and press the control- The start menu is called up.
ler.
2. Select the desired format and press the
controller.
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
rently in use.
76
5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker 7. Select the desired language and press the
to the uppermost field. Turn the controller controller.
Overview
until "Units" is selected and press the con- The setting is saved for the remote control cur-
troller. rently in use.
Controls
6. Select the desired menu item and press the
controller.
Driving hints
7. Select the desired unit of measurement and
The settings are saved for the remote control
currently in use.
Language of the control display

Navigation
4. Select "Language / Units" and press the
controller.
Entertainment
until "Languages" is selected and press the
controller.
Mobility
6. Select "Text language" and press the con-

troller. You can alter the language of the dis-
Reference
play texts.
77
Technical features for driving comfort and
Technical features for driving comfort and safety
safety
Park Distance Control PDC* Switching on manually
Principle
PDC assists you when manoeuvring into
a parking space. Audible signals and a visual
display* indicate that you are approaching an
object in front of or behind your car. Four ultra-
sonic sensors in each bumper measure the dis-
tance from it. The range of these sensors is
approx. 2 m, approx. 7 ft. However, the sensors
at the front and at the two rear corners do not Press the button, the LED lights up.
produce an acoustic warning until an object is
approx. 60 cm or 2 ft away, and approx. 1.50 m
Switching off manually
or 5 ft away in the case of the rear centre sen-
sors. Press the button again; the LED goes out.
PDC is a parking aid which is capable of

Switching off automatically
registering objects approached at low
speed, as is usually the case when the car is Once you have driven approx. 50 m, approx.
being parked. Avoid approaching an object rap- 165 ft, or travelled at a speed of more than
idly, otherwise the system may be unable to approx. 30 km/h, approx. 20 mph, the system is
alert you in sufficient time in view of the physical deactivated and the LED goes out. Switch the
principles involved.< system on again manually as necessary.
If the car is towing a trailer, the rear sensors will

Audible warning signals
be unable to supply meaningful signals. They
therefore do not light up. The fact that you are approaching an object is
indicated by an intermittent warning signal for
the part of the car in question. For instance, if an
Automatic activation
object is identified to the rear left of the car, the
With the engine running or the ignition switched
warning signal sounds at the rear left loud-
on, the system is activated after approx.
speaker. The closer the car approaches the
1 second when you engage transmission
obstruction, the more rapid the sequence of
position R.
signals. When the distance from a detected
Wait briefly before driving off, to allow the sys- object is less than approx. 30 cm, approx. 1 ft,
tem to become active. the signal becomes continuous.
An intermittent tone is interrupted after approx.
3 seconds:
> If you remain in front of an object that was
detected by only one of the corner sensors
> If you are driving parallel to a wall
78
Malfunction until "Manoeuvring aids" is selected and
The LED in the button flashes and a message press the controller.
Overview
appears on the control display. PDC has failed.
Have the system checked.
As a precautionary measure, keep the sensors
clean and free from ice, so that they always
operate reliably. Do not spray for any length of
time with high-pressure cleaning equipment,
and keep cleaning jets at least 10 cm, approx.
4 in, away from the sensors.
Controls
PDC with optical warning*
6. Turn the controller until "Picture combina-
You can have the fact that you are approaching tions" is selected and press the controller.
an object indicated on the control display.
Objects that are further away from the car will
Driving hints
appear on the control display before an audible
warning signal is given.
rently in use.
If rear view camera is fitted, see Displays,
page 82.
7. Select "PDC in main screen" and press the
Navigation
controller.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu. The PDC image is switched on.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller. The display is shown on the control display as
soon as PDC is activated.
System limits
Entertainment
PDC is no substitute for your personal
assessment of objects. The sensors have
certain dead areas in which objects cannot
always be detected. In addition, the identifica-
tion of objects may not be possible if the physi-
cal limits of the ultrasonic measuring principle
are exceeded, for instance with trailer noses
and hitches, and thin or wedge-shaped objects.
troller.
Low objects already indicated, such as the kerb,
5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker may enter the sensors' dead areas before or
Mobility
to the uppermost field. Turn the controller after a continuous audible signal is given.
Higher, protruding objects such as ledges may
not be detectable.
Loud sound sources outside or inside the car
can drown out the PDC signal.<
Reference
79
Rear view camera* Switching off
Principle Automatically
The rear view camera in the tailgate produces a When travelling forwards at more than approx.
picture of the area behind your car on the con- 20 km/h, approx. 12 mph, or after travelling
trol display. approx. 50 m, approx.165 ft.
When parking and manoeuvring, in addi-
Manually
tion look around the car to check the traf-
fic situation, otherwise other road users or Press the button again; the LED will go out.
objects outside the rear view camera's picture
range could create an accident risk.< Driver assistance functions
Depending on the situation, the following func-
Switching on tions may improve the effectiveness of the rear
view camera.
Automatically They can only be activated if the tailgates are
Engage transmission position R while the entirely shut.
engine is running.
If the Park Distance Control PDC picture Line markings
is shown on the control display, you can The line markings are superimposed on the pic-
change over to the rear view camera picture, ture from the rear view camera. They help you
see Displays, page 82.< to estimate how much space you need for park-
ing and manoeuvring on a flat surface.
Manually To assess how much space is required, turn the
steering wheel until the line markings lead into
the parking space you have chosen or the
manoeuvring space you wish to use.
Press the button.

PDC is activated at the same time, see page 78.
If the Park Distance Control PDC picture
is shown on the control display, you can The line markings are determined by the cur-
change over to the rear view camera picture, rent steering angle and change as the steering
see Displays, page 82.< is turned.
Turning circle lines

The static turning circle lines are displayed in
the rear view camera picture, showing you the
line of the tightest possible turning circle on a
flat surface.
80
How to use line markings and turning The zoom function can be activated with the
circle lines rear view camera activated. It will be deacti-
Overview
1. Position the car such that the turning circle vated from a speed of approx. 7 km/h, approx.
lines lead into the limits of the parking 4 mph.
space.
Obstacle marking
3D shaped markings are displayed in the rear
view camera picture. The colour gradations cor-
respond to the Park Distance Control markings
and help you to estimate how far away the
Controls
object in the picture is.
When reversing at more than approx. 20 km/h,
approx. 12 mph, the obstacle marking is deacti-
vated.
2. Turn the steering wheel until the line mark- Activating driver assistance functions
Driving hints
ings are aligned with the turning circle lines.
The driver assistance functions can be active
This will set the steering wheel to a position that simultaneously. The zoom function for trailer
uses the car's smallest possible turning circle towing can only be activated on its own, with
when you park the car. the rear view camera switched on.
Virtual camera panning With rear view camera switched on

The picture area displayed depends on the iDrive, principle, see page 14.
car's current speed:
Navigation
At low speeds, the camera is panned towards
the road surface; at higher speeds, it is panned 2. Select the desired function and press the
towards the horizon. controller.
The picture area that is currently most relevant
is thus shown enlarged on the control display. With rear view camera switched off
To activate virtual camera panning, select the 1. Press the button.
Entertainment
camera picture "Camera picture on full screen", The start menu is called up.
see Displays on page 82. 2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
Trailer tow hitch zoom*
To facilitate connecting up a trailer, the picture troller.
area around the trailer tow hitch can be zoomed.
You can estimate the distance between the to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
trailer and the trailer tow hitch with the aid of until "Manoeuvring aids" is selected and
two static lines. The lines indicate a distance of press the controller.
approx. 20 cm, approx. 8 in, or approx. 10 cm,
Mobility
approx. 4 in.
A docking-on line determined by the steering
angle helps you to align your trailer tow hitch
with the trailer.
Reference
81
Selecting displays
1. Select "Manoeuvring aids" and press the

controller, see Activating driver assistance
functions.
2. Turn the controller until "Picture combina-
tions" is selected and press the controller.
3. Select the desired display and press the

controller. The setting is saved for the
remote control currently in use.
7. Select the desired functions and press the Adjusting brightness

controller. You can adjust the brightness of the camera
You can in addition adjust the brightness of picture with the rear view camera switched on.
the camera picture. iDrive, principle, see page 14.
The settings are saved for the remote con- 1. Press the controller.
trol currently in use.
2. Turn the controller until "Brightness" is
Displays
3. Select the desired brightness setting.
You can display the rear view camera picture in
various ways.
You in addition have the option of displaying Cleaning rear view camera
Park Distance Control PDC, see page 79.
> "Camera picture on full screen"
The rear view camera image appears on the
entire control display.
> "Camera picture in main screen"
The rear view camera image is displayed in
the main window of the control display.
> "PDC in main screen"
PDC is displayed in the main window of the
control display. The rear view camera's lens is on the upper tail-
gate.
Dirt can impair the quality of the picture pro-
duced by the rear view camera. Clean the lens
with a damp, non-scratching cloth.
82
The lens is heated automatically in frosty condi- helps to keep the car on a stable course, subject
tions. to the limits imposed by the basic laws of
Overview
dynamics, by reducing the engine output and
applying the brakes to individual wheels.
Driving stability control Not even DSC can overcome the laws of
systems physics. It is therefore the driver's
responsibility to adopt a suitable driving style.
Your BMW has a number of systems that help The added safety this provides should not be
to maintain the car's stability even in adverse undermined by taking risks while driving, other-
driving conditions. wise there is a risk of accidents.<
Controls
Anti-lock Brake System ABS Deactivating DSC
ABS prevents the wheels locking when the
brakes are applied. The car can consequently
still be steered even when the brakes are
applied hard. This increases active driving
Driving hints
safety.
ABS is ready to operate each time the engine is
started. Safe braking, see page 127.
Cornering Brake Control CBC

When the brakes are applied while cornering
Press and hold down the button until the DSC
when changing lanes, the car's stability and
indicator light in the instrument cluster remains
steering characteristics are further enhanced.
on permanently, but for no longer than approx.
Navigation
10 seconds. Both Dynamic Traction Control
Electronic Brake Force Distribution DTC and DSC are deactivated. No stabilising
The system regulates the braking pressure on intervention will now take place.
the rear wheels in order to stabilise the braking
A message appears on the control display.
behaviour.
Please also observe the supplementary infor-
mation given there.
Entertainment
Brake assist
In the interests of dynamic stability, activate
If the brake is pressed down rapidly, this system
DSC again as soon as possible.
automatically boosts the braking force to a
maximum and thus helps to keep the braking
Activating DSC
distance as short as possible when a full brake
application is made. It also makes full use of the Press the button; the indicator light in the
advantages offered by ABS. instrument cluster goes out.
Maintain pressure on the brake during the

Indicator lights
entire brake application.
If the indicator light is flashing:
Mobility
Dynamic Stability Control DSC DSC is regulating the propulsive and

braking forces.
DSC prevents the driving wheels losing traction
when you pull away from rest or accelerate. The If the indicator lights are lit:
system also recognises unstable driving condi- DSC is deactivated.
tions, for example if the rear of the car is about
to swerve or if momentum is acting at an angle
Reference
past the front wheels. In such instances, DSC
83
Dynamic Traction Control DTC xDrive
DTC is a version of DSC that has been traction- xDrive is the four-wheel-drive system on your
optimised for particular operating conditions, X5. The combined effect of xDrive and DSC fur-
e.g. driving on roads where the snow has not ther optimises traction and driving dynamics.
been cleared. The system assures maximum The xDrive four-wheel drive system distributes
traction, but with reduced dynamic stability. the torque flow variably to the front and rear
You should therefore drive with caution. wheels in accordance with the driving situation
In the following exceptional situations it may be and the condition of the road surface.
best to activate DTC for a short time:
Hill Descent Control HDC
> When driving in sand, uphill on snow-cov-
ered roads, in slush or on unploughed,
Principle
snow-covered roads
HDC reduces the car's speed when driving
> For rocking the car out of a hollow or start-
down steep inclines and thus makes your BMW
ing in deep snow or sand, or on a loose sur-
even easier to control in such conditions. The
face
car will then move at about walking pace, with-
> When driving with snow chains* out your having to regulate its speed.
HDC can be activated at speeds of less than
Activating DTC approx. 35 km/h, approx. 22 mph. When the car
starts to travel downhill, its speed of below
approx. 35 km/h, approx. 22 mph, is automati-
cally reduced to about walking pace, approx.
8 km/h, approx. 5 mph, and this speed is then
maintained.
Only use HDC in transmission positions D or R.
Increasing or reducing speed

You can alter this speed within the range of
Press the button; the DTC indicator light in the about 6 km/h and 25 km/h, approx. 4 mph and
instrument cluster lights up. 16 mph, by accelerating or braking.
You can specify a target speed within the same
Indicator lights range by using the cruise control lever.
If the indicator light is flashing: On gradients steeper than 10Ξ, you can
DTC is regulating the propulsive and reduce the speed to approx. 4 km/h, approx.
braking forces. 2.5 mph. Pull the cruise control lever beyond
If the indicator lights are lit: the pressure point, arrow 3.
DTC is activated.
Deactivating DTC
Press the button again; the DTC indicator light
in the instrument cluster goes out.
84
Displays* in the instrument cluster
Overview
Controls
1 Increasing speed
2 Pull as far as the pressure point: 1 Display of target speed
To reduce the speed to approx. 6 km/h, 2 HDC display
approx. 4 mph
3 Pull beyond the pressure point: Malfunction
On gradients steeper than 10 Ξ, to reduce HDC is temporarily unavailable in the following
Driving hints
the speed to approx. 4 km/h, approx. situations due to the high temperature of the
2.5 mph brakes:
> If the LED in the button and the HDC display
Activating HDC go out when in the HDC mode.
> If the LED in the button and the HDC display
do not light up when the button is pressed.
Malfunction in driving stability control
Navigation
systems
Avoid rough terrain, do not use the accel-
erator's full-throttle and kick-down posi-
tions and do not apply the brakes hard, to avoid
the risk of damage to the driveline or acci-
Press the button, the LED lights up. dents.<
Entertainment
The display HDC appears in the instrument
cluster*.
When the car is being braked automatically, the Adaptive Drive*
LED flashes.
Principle
Deactivating HDC Adaptive Drive reduces the body's lateral
Press the button again. The LED and the HDC incline, which occurs when a corner is taken at
display go out. speed or as a result of high-speed evasive
manoeuvres. Adaptive Drive in addition reduces
HDC is also deactivated at speeds of more than
the degree by which the steering needs to be
Mobility
approx. 60 km/h, approx. 35 mph.

turned, improves ride comfort and increases
the dynamism of your X5.
Suspension settings
You can choose between two suspension set-
tings.
Reference
85
> Standard: hold the car after about 2 seconds and it will
The comfortable basic setting for optimum start to roll back.<

comfort when travelling.
> Sport:
The sporty basic setting provides greater Self-levelling suspension*
agility when driving.
Malfunction
Selecting suspension settings If the warning light for self-levelling
suspension lights up yellow and a
message appears on the control dis-
play: the self-levelling suspension is faulty.
Stop the car and check it. If the body is distinctly
lower at the back than at the front, and possibly
standing at an angle, for instance lower at the
left than at the right, take the car to the nearest
BMW Service or to a workshop that operates to
BMW specifications and has suitably trained
personnel. Drive cautiously while the car is in
Press the button. this condition. The car's ground clearance is
This switches between the two suspension set- reduced and its ride comfort below the usual
tings. standard. Even if the car's suspension level is
> Sport: normal, take it to the nearest BMW Service or to
The LED in the button lights up and SPORT a workshop that operates to BMW specifica-
appears in the instrument cluster. tions and has suitably trained personnel if a fault
> Standard: is indicated.
The LED in the button goes out.
The suspension setting chosen is saved for the
remote control currently in use.
Run Flat Indicator RPA
Principle
Starting assistance The Run Flat Indicator monitors the pressures
in the four tyres fitted to the wheels while the
The starting assistance enables you to drive off car is being driven. The system reports any sig-
smoothly on uphill gradients. It is not necessary nificant loss of pressure in one tyre in relation to
to use the parking brake for this. another.
1. Hold the car in place by pressing the foot- If a tyre loses pressure its rolling radius
brake. changes, and this in turn alters the speed of
2. Release the footbrake and immediately rotation. This change is detected and reported
drive off at a reasonably high speed. as tyre failure.
The starting assistance holds the car for
about 2 seconds after the footbrake has Operating requirements
been released. Depending on the car's load or if To ensure that tyre failure can be reported reli-
a trailer is being towed, it could roll back slightly ably, the system must have been initialised
during this period. After releasing the footbrake, while the tyre pressures are correct.
immediately move off at a reasonably high The system must be reinitialised every
speed, as the starting assistance will no longer time the tyre pressure is adjusted, every
86
time a tyre or wheel is changed and whenever a 4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
trailer is attached or removed.< troller.
Overview
System limits to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
The Run Flat Indicator is unable to warn until "Flat Tyre Monitor" is selected and
the driver of sudden, severe tyre damage press the controller.
caused by external factors, nor can it identify
the gradual loss of pressure that will inevitably
occur in all four tyres over a lengthy period of
time.<
Controls
In the following situations, the system could be
slow to respond or operate incorrectly:
> If the system has not been initialised
> When driving on snow-covered or slippery
surfaces
Driving hints
> When driving with an enthusiastic style, 6. Start the engine but do not drive off yet.
causing the driven wheels to spin, high lat- 7. Select "Confirm tyre pressure" and press
eral acceleration the controller.
> When driving with snow chains* 8. Select "Yes" and press the controller. The
The Run Flat Indicator is unable to function if message "activation phase..." is displayed.
the compact wheel* is fitted.
Initialising the system
Navigation
Initialising is completed by driving the car;
this process can be interrupted at any
time. Initialising resumes automatically when
you continue your journey. Do not initialise the
system while driving with snow chains* or a
compact wheel* fitted.<
Entertainment
9. Drive off.
Initialising is completed during the journey.
2. Press the controller to call up the menu. Indication of a flat tyre
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller. The warning light shows red. A mes-
sage appears on the control display.
An audible signal also sounds. There
is a flat tyre or substantial loss of tyre pressure.
Mobility
If you have deactivated DSC, it is activated

automatically.
1. Carefully reduce your speed to no more
than 80 km/h, approx. 50 mph. Avoid violent
or sudden braking and steering manoeu-
vres. Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h,
approx. 50 mph, after this.
Reference
If towing a trailer, reduce your speed to
87
60 km/h, approx. 35 mph, and do not Active steering*
exceed it after this.

If the pressure of the faulty tyre continues to Principle
fall, its position is indicated on the control
Active steering actively varies the steering lock
display.
of the front wheels in relation to steering wheel
If the car is not in the envisaged fac- movements. It in addition varies the steering
tory-fitted state with run-flat tyres fit- force required to steer the car, in line with its
ted, see page 217, do not continue your speed.
journey, as driving on a flat tyre could result
At low speeds, e.g. in built-up areas or when
in a serious accident.<
parking, the steering lock is accentuated, i.e.
2. Check the pressure in all four tyres at the the steering response becomes very direct. At
next opportunity. higher speeds, on the other hand, the steering
If all four tyres are inflated to the cor- lock is gradually reduced. This improves the
rect pressures, the Run Flat Indicator handling of your BMW across the entire speed
might not have been initialised. Initialise the range.
system.< In critical situations, the system can specifically
3. If a tyre is completely deflated, you can esti- correct the angle through which the driver has
mate how far you will be able to drive using turned the wheels, and thus stabilise the car
the following guidelines: before the driver starts to take corrective action.
> With low loads:
1 to 2 persons, without luggage: Malfunction
approx. 250 km, approx. 150 miles The warning light lights up and a
> With moderate loads: message appears on the control dis-
2 persons, luggage compartment full, or play: the active steering is faulty and
4 persons without luggage: deactivated. At low speeds, more
approx. 150 km, approx. 90 miles pronounced movement of the steering wheel is
required, whereas the car will respond more
> With full load:
sensitively to steering wheel movements at
4 or more persons, load area full:
higher speeds. The stabilising intervention may
approx. 50 km, approx. 30 miles
also be deactivated. Drive cautiously and think
Drive with caution and do not exceed well ahead. Have the system checked.
80 km/h, approx. 50 mph. If towing a
trailer, do not exceed 60 km/h, approx. 35 mph.
If there is a loss of tyre pressure, the car's han- Two-stage brake lights*
dling properties will change. These include
reduced track stability during braking, longer
braking distances and altered self-steering
properties.
If unusual vibration or loud noises occur during
the journey, this may be an indication that the
damaged tyre has finally failed. Reduce your
speed and pull over to a suitable location as
soon as possible. Otherwise, parts of the tyre
could come loose, which could result in an acci-
dent. Do not drive the car any further; contact
On the left: normal braking.
BMW Service instead.<
On the right: hard braking.
88
Airbags
Overview
Controls
The following airbags are stowed beneath the If the airbag occupant restraint system devel-
covers indicated: ops a fault, is shut down out of use or has been
1 Front airbags activated, have it checked, repaired or disman-
tled and the airbag generators scrapped only by
2 Head-level airbag
BMW Service or by a workshop that operates to
Driving hints
3 Side airbags* in the seat backs BMW specifications and has suitably trained
personnel and the necessary permits for han-
Protective effect dling explosive devices. Any careless or
Failure to comply with the notes on unskilled interference with the system could
page 38 may put your personal safety at otherwise lead to its failure or to accidental trig-
risk.< gering with the risk of injury.<
The front airbags protect the driver and front
passenger in the event of a head-on collision, if Operational status of airbag system
Navigation
the protective action of the seat belts alone
would be insufficient. The head-level and side
airbags provide protection in the event of a
side-on collision. The side airbag has the effect
of supporting the upper body from the side. The
head-level airbag supports the head of the
Entertainment
seat's occupant.
The airbags have been designed specifically
not to be activated by every collision, e.g. they
will not trigger in the event of minor accidents or From radio readiness, see page 54, the warning
rear-end collisions. light lights up for a short time to indicate that the
Never attach any material to the airbag entire airbag system and the belt tensioners are
covers with adhesive, place material over operational.
them or modify them in any way. Do not dis-
mantle the airbag occupant restraint system. Airbag system faulty
Do not modify the individual components of the > Warning light does not light up from radio
Mobility
system or its wiring in any way. This includes readiness.

the upholstered covers on the steering wheel,
> Warning light remains permanently on.
instrument panel, doors and roof posts as well
as the sides of the roof lining. Do not remove the In the event of a fault in the airbag system,
steering wheel. Avoid touching the system's have it checked without delay, as there is
components immediately after it has been trig- otherwise the risk that the system will not func-
tion as intended even if a sufficiently severe
Reference
gered, as there is a risk of sustaining burns.

accident occurs.<
89
Head-Up Display* 1. Press the button.

Principle 2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
The Head-Up Display projects important infor- 3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
mation into the driver's field of view, e.g. naviga- 4. Select "Display settings" and press the
tion instructions. This enables you to register controller.
this information without having to divert your
eyes from the road.
until "Head-Up Display" is selected and
6. Move the highlighted marker to the second
field from the top. Turn the controller until
"Head-Up Display settings" is selected and
7. Select the desired information for the Head-
Up Display.

Switching on/off The information is shown on the Head-
Up Display.
Press the button.
The settings are saved for the remote control
currently in use.
Adjusting brightness and level of

display
The brightness of the display is automatically
adjusted according to ambient light conditions.
However, you can adjust the basic setting.
When the low-beam headlights are switched
on, the brightness can also be adjusted using
1 Navigation instructions or Check Control the knurled wheel for the instrument lighting.
messages iDrive, principle, see page 14.
2 Cruise control 1. Press the button.
3 Speed The start menu is called up.
Selecting displays
90
4. Select "Display settings" and press the Always have a windscreen replaced only either
controller. by BMW Service or by a workshop that oper-
Overview
5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker ates to BMW specifications and has suitably
to the uppermost field. Turn the controller trained personnel.
until "Head-Up Display" is selected and
press the controller. Care notes
6. Move the highlighted marker to the second For useful information about this subject, see
field from the top. Turn the controller until the booklet Looking after your car.
"Brightness / Position" is selected and To avoid damage when cleaning the
press the controller. Head-Up Display's cover, use only a soft,
Controls
non-scratching cloth or a cleaning cloth for dis-
play screens.<
Driving hints
7. Move the controller to the left or right as
necessary to select "Head-Up Display off-
set" or "Image position".
Navigation
is obtained.
rently in use.
Notes
The visibility of information in the Head-Up Dis-
Entertainment
play is influenced by:
> Sunglasses with certain polarisation filters
> Certain seated positions
> Objects resting on the Head-Up Display's
cover
> Wet roads and poor light conditions
If the image is shown distorted, have the basic
settings checked.
Mobility
Special windscreen
The windscreen constitutes part of the system.
The windscreen is shaped in a way that satisfies
the requirements of the Head-Up Display and
permits the projection of precise images. A film
in the windscreen prevents double images
Reference
occurring.
91
Lights
Lights
Side lights/low-beam Automatic driving lights control*

headlights When the switch is in position 3, the low-beam
headlights are switched on and off automati-
cally depending on ambient light conditions,
e.g. in a tunnel, twilight, and when it is raining.
Adaptive Head Light* is active. The LED next to
the symbol lights up when the low-beam head-
lights are on. You can also activate the daytime
running lights, see page 93. The system then
switches automatically to low-beam headlights
in the above situations.
The headlights may also switch on when the
0 Lights off, sun is sitting low on a blue sky.
Daytime running lights* with xenon head- The low-beam headlights remain
lights* switched on irrespective of the ambient
1 Side lights light conditions if you switch on the fog
lights*.<
2 Low-beam headlights and welcome lights
The driving lights control function is no
3 Automatic driving lights control*, daytime
substitute for your individual judgement
running lights*, welcome lights, Adaptive
of when it is necessary to switch on the lights.
Head Light* and high-beam headlights
The sensors are unable, for instance, to recog-
assistant*
nise fog or hazy weather. To avoid any safety
If you open the driver's door with the ignition risk in such situations, switch on the low-beam
switched off, the exterior lights are switched off headlights manually.<
automatically if the light switch is in position 0,
2 or 3. Welcome lights
Switch on the side lights if required, switch If you leave the switch in position 2 or 3 when
position 1. the car is parked, the side lights and interior
lights come on briefly when the car is unlocked.
Side lights
When the switch is in position 1 the lights are on Activating/deactivating welcome lights
all round the car. You can use the side lights for iDrive, principle, see page 14.
parking.
The side lights will discharge the battery. The start menu is called up.
Do not leave them switched on for too
long, otherwise the engine may fail to start. It is
preferable to switch on the right or left parking 3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
lights, see page 95.< 4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
troller.
Low-beam headlights 5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker
The low-beam headlights light up when the to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
light switch is in position 2 and the ignition is
switched on.
92
until "Light" is selected and press the con- 6. Select "Home lights" and press the control-
troller. ler.
Overview
7. Turn the controller to set the required dura-
tion.
rently in use.
Daytime running lights*
Controls
The daytime running lights come on in
position 3, and with xenon headlights* also in
6. Select "Welcome light" and press the con- position 0. With xenon headlights, the light out-
troller. put is lower than that of the low-beam head-
Daytime running lights are switched on. lights.
Driving hints
Activating/deactivating daytime
rently in use.
running lights
Headlight courtesy delay feature iDrive, principle, see page 14.
If you activate the headlight flasher after parking 1. Press the button.
the car, with the lights switched off, the low- The start menu is called up.
beam headlights light up and remain lit for a cer- 2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
tain time. You can adjust the operating period or 3. Select "Settings" and press the controller.
deactivate the function using iDrive.
Navigation
iDrive, principle, see page 14. troller.
1. Press the button. 5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker
The start menu is called up. to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
2. Press the controller to call up the menu. until "Light" is selected and press the con-
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller. troller.
Entertainment
troller.
until "Light" is selected and press the con-
troller.
Mobility
6. Select "Daytime running lights" and press

the controller.
Daytime running lights are switched on.
rently in use.
Reference
93
Adaptive Head Light* Headlight beam throw
Lights
adjustment
Principle
Adaptive Head Light is a variable headlight con- Halogen lights
trol system that makes it possible to illuminate
the road surface more effectively. The light
cones from the headlights are directed to suit
the road ahead on the basis of steering angle
and other parameters.
On tight bends, e.g. hairpin bends, or when
turning at a junction, one of the front fog lights is
switched on up to a speed of approx. 40 km/h,
approx. 25 mph. This illuminates the inside of
the bend more effectively.
The beam throw of the low-beam headlights
must be adjusted manually to suit the load car-
Activating Adaptive Head Light
ried in the car, otherwise the drivers of oncom-
With the ignition switched on, turn the light ing vehicles could be dazzled.
switch to the position for automatic driving
The second value in each case applies when
lights control, see page 92.
towing a trailer.
A cornering light is activated automatically by
movement of the steering or use of the turn Without self-levelling suspension
indicators.
0 / 1 = 1 to 2 persons without luggage
To avoid dazzling drivers of oncoming vehicles,
1 / 1 = 5 persons without luggage
Adaptive Head Light points towards the front
passenger's side when the car is stationary. 1 / 2 = 5 persons with luggage
When reversing, only the cornering light is 2 / 2 = 1 person, load area full
active and illuminates the zone on the outside of
the bend. With self-levelling suspension
0 / 1 = 1 to 2 persons without luggage
Malfunction
0 / 0 = 5 persons without luggage
The LED next to the symbol for automatic driv-
ing lights control flashes. Adaptive Head Light 0 / 1 = 5 persons with luggage
is faulty or has failed. Have the system checked 1 / 2 = 7 persons with luggage
as soon as possible. With two seat rows:
1 / 2 = 1 person, load area full
With three seat rows:
2 / 2 = 1 person, load area full
Comply with rear axle load limit, see page 241
onwards.
Xenon headlights*
The headlight beam throw is regulated auto-
matically, e.g. when accelerating and braking
and to adapt to the different loads being carried.
94
High-beam headlights/ the high-beam headlights on and off in the
usual way.
parking lights
Overview
Activating the system
1. Turn the light switch to position 3, see
page 92.
2. With the low-beam headlights switched on,
briefly press the flashing turn indicator lever
towards high-beam headlights.
Controls
1 High-beam headlights
2 Headlight flasher
3 Parking lights
Driving hints
Right or left parking lights*
There is an additional option of switching on the
lights on the side of the car facing the road The indicator light in the instrument
when parked. cluster lights up when the high-beam
headlights assistant is active. The
Switching on lights are turned up and down automatically as
After parking the car, push the lever up or down the system responds to traffic travelling in front
Navigation
beyond the pressure point, arrow 3. and in the oncoming direction, and also when
ambient lighting is sufficient, e.g. in built-up
The parking lights will drain the battery.
areas.
Do not leave them switched on for too
long, otherwise the engine may fail to start.<
Turning up and down manually
Switching off You can intervene at any time as required or if
Entertainment
required by the situation:
Press the lever briefly in the opposite direction
as far as the pressure point, arrow 3. > If the high-beam headlights assistant has
switched on the high-beam headlights but
you would prefer the low-beam headlights
to be switched on, simply use the flashing
turn indicator lever to turn the lights down.
assistant* This will deactivate the high-beam head-
lights assistant.
Principle To reactivate the system, press the flashing
This system switches the high-beam head- turn indicator again briefly towards high-
Mobility
lights on and off automatically. The process is beam headlights.

controlled by a sensor on the front of the inside > If the high-beam headlights assistant has
mirror. The assistant ensures that the high- switched on the low-beam headlights but
beam headlights are switched on whenever you would prefer the high-beam headlights
permitted by the situation in which the car is to be switched on, turn the lights up in the
being driven. This relieves the load on you the usual way. This deactivates the system and
driver and optimises your view of the road. You
Reference
you will have to turn the lights down by

can of course intervene at any time and switch hand.
95
To reactivate the system, press the flashing 4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the con-
Lights
turn indicator again briefly towards high- troller.

beam headlights. 5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker
> You can use the headlight flasher in the to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
usual way when the headlights are dimmed. until "Light" is selected and press the con-
troller.
System limits
You should always give priority to your
own judgement over that of the high-
beam headlights assistant in respect of the use
of high-beam headlights. In such situations you
should turn the headlights down manually in
order not to create a safety hazard.<
In the following example situations, the system
will not operate or its operation will be subject to
restrictions and your intervention may be
6. Select "High-beam assistant" and press
required:
the controller.
> In extremely unfavourable weather condi-
High-beam headlights assistant is
tions such as fog or heavy rain
switched off.
> In order to be able to perceive poorly-lit road
users such as pedestrians, cyclists, horses
rently in use.
and riders, carts, in situations where trains
or ships are travelling in the vicinity of the
road, deer passing
Fog lights
> On narrow bends, steep uphill or downhill
gradients, at traffic junctions or if your view
of oncoming traffic on a motorway is
obstructed
> In poorly lit towns and where there are very
reflective signs
> At low road speeds
> If the windscreen in the area in front of the
inside mirror has fogged over, is dirty or is
covered with stickers, labels, etc.
> If the sensor is dirty. Use a cloth soaked in To switch on or off, press the button.
glass cleaner to clean the sensor on the 1 Front fog lights
front of the inside mirror 2 Rear fog lights*
Switching off via iDrive Front fog lights

iDrive, principle, see page 14. The side lights or low-beam headlights must be
1. Press the button. switched on. The green indicator light in the
The start menu is called up. instrument cluster lights up when the front fog
2. Press the controller to call up the menu. lights are in use.
96
If automatic driving lights control has Switching the interior light on/off
been activated, the low-beam headlights manually
Overview
light up automatically when the front fog lights
are switched on.<
Rear fog lights*

The low-beam headlights or front fog lights
must be switched on. The yellow indicator light
in the instrument cluster lights up when the rear
fog lights are in use.
Controls
Press the button.
Instrument lighting
To switch off the light permanently, press and
hold down the button for about 3 seconds.
If you switch on the independent ventila-
Driving hints
tion system* or auxiliary heater* with the
remote control, the interior light will light up for
a short time by way of confirmation.<
Reading lights
You can adjust the lighting intensity with the
Navigation
knurled wheel.
Interior light
The interior light, the footwell lights*, the door
entry lighting*, the load area lights and the
Entertainment
ground lights* are controlled automatically. There are reading lights at the front and rear*
The ground lights feature LEDs in the door han- next to the interior lights. To switch on and off,
press the respective button.
dles to illuminate the outside area in front of the
doors.
To save the battery, all the lights in the car
will be switched off approx. 15 minutes
after radio readiness has been switched off, see
Start/stop button on page 54.<
Mobility
Reference
97
Climate
Climate
Equipment versions Air outlets

There are two versions of automatic air condi- 3 Air to windscreen and side windows
tioning, depending on the equipment fitted to 4 Air to the upper body area, see Ventilation
your car. at front on page 101 and 106
1 Automatic air conditioning 5 Air to footwells
2 Automatic air conditioning with extended
range of features, see page 103
98
Automatic air conditioning
Overview
Controls
1 Seat heating, driver's side 45 7 Recirculated-air mode
2 Adjusting air volume manually 8 Rear window heating
3 AUTO program 9 Defrosting windows and removing mist
4 Temperature 10 Air inlet grille for inside temperature sensor,
Driving hints
5 Seat heating, front passenger's side 45 keep unobstructed
6 Switching cooling function on/off manually The current setting for the air distribution is dis-
played on the control display.
Preferred interior climate

The AUTO program 3 can optimise air distribu- Temperature
tion and air volume in virtually any situation, see Set the desired temperature for
AUTO program below. All you need to do is the interior.
Navigation
select an inside temperature 4 that you find
The automatic air conditioning
comfortable.
attains this temperature as quickly
The following sections inform you in detail as possible regardless of the season by using
about how to adjust the settings. maximum cooling or heating power if neces-
sary. The temperature is then maintained.
AUTO program
Entertainment
The highest setting produces the maximum
The AUTO program takes charge heating output, irrespective of the outside tem-
of setting the air volume and air perature. The lowest setting produces maxi-
distribution to the windscreen and mum cooling output.
side windows, to the upper body
The automatic air conditioning does not
and to the footwell.
have sufficient time to establish the set
The cooling function is switched on automati- temperature when temperature settings are
cally in the AUTO program. changed quickly in succession.<
Mobility
Reference
99
Adjusting temperature for the upper Adjusting air volume manually
Climate
body area Turn to vary the air volume. You

iDrive, principle, see page 14. can switch the automatic function
1. Press the button. for the air volume back on by
The start menu is called up. pressing the AUTO button.
2. Move the controller to the left to call up The higher the air volume, the more effective
"Climate". the air conditioning will be.
3. Select "Air distribution" and press the con-

Adjusting air distribution manually
troller.
You can direct the air volume to the windows,
4. Move the controller to select the field.
towards the upper body and into the footwell.
5. Turn the controller to adapt the tempera- Any intermediate setting is possible. You can
ture. switch the automatic function for air distribution
back on with the AUTO button.
"Climate".
3. Select "Air distribution" and press the con-
troller.
4. Move the controller to select the required
field.
Defrosting windows and removing mist 5. Turn the controller to adapt the air distribu-
Remove ice and condensation tion.
quickly from the windscreen and
from the front side windows.
To do this, switch on the cooling function as
well.
Rear window heating

The rear window heater switches
off automatically after a certain
time. Depending on the equipment
specification, the top wires serve
as the aerial and are not part of the rear window 1 Air to windscreen and side windows
heating. 2 Air to the upper body area
3 Air to footwells
Pressing the AUTO button cancels the
manual air distribution settings.<
The air volume continues to be regulated auto-
matically when the air distribution is adjusted
manually.
100
Switching cooling function on and off Ventilation at front
Air is cooled and dried when the
Overview
cooling function is switched on,
then reheated to suit the tempera-
ture setting. Depending on weather conditions,
the windscreen may fog over momentarily
when the engine is started.
The cooling function is switched on automati-
cally in the AUTO program. The interior can
only be cooled when the engine is running.
Controls
1 Knurled wheels for continuous opening and
Recirculated-air mode closing of the vents
If the air outside the car has an 2 Lever for adjusting the direction of the air-
unpleasant odour or contains pol- flow
lutants, the supply to the interior of
Do not drop any foreign objects into the
Driving hints
the car can be shut off temporarily.
outlets, otherwise they could be blown
The air inside the car is then recirculated.
out with some force and cause injury.<
If the windows mist over in the recircu-
lated-air mode, press the AUTO button or
Ventilation for cooling
switch off the recirculated-air mode and
Adjust the outlets so that cool air is directed
increase the air volume if necessary.
towards you, e.g. if the car's interior has
The recirculated-air mode should not be used
become hot.
continuously for lengthy periods, as the quality
of the air inside the car will otherwise gradually
Navigation
deteriorate.< Draught-free ventilation
Turn outlets so that the airflow passes the
Switching the automatic air occupants without striking their bodies directly.
conditioning off and on
Turn anti-clockwise to select the Ventilation at rear
lowest blower speed. After about
Entertainment
1 second, turn anti-clockwise
again; the automatic air condition-
ing is switched off.
The automatic air conditioning is switched on
again by pressing any button.

Mobility
closing of the vents

2 Lever for adjusting the direction of the air-
flow
Reference
101
Heating and ventilation, third seat row
Climate
The air around the third seat row can be heated

or circulated. The outlets are located next to the
compartment between the seats and in the
footwell of the third seat row.
1 Knurled wheel:
> To activate heating and air distribution in
the footwell:
Turn forwards
> To distribute the air to the storage area
between the seats:
Turn to rear
2 Button for switching on the blower:
LED on
The heating is not operational until the
blower is switched on. After the heating
has been switched off, the blower can be used
to circulate the air inside the car, e.g. at high
temperatures. To do this, turn knurled wheel 1
to the rear and switch on the blower, button 2.<
Microfilter
The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. This filter is changed by BMW
Service during routine maintenance work.
102
Automatic air conditioning with extended range of features*
Overview
Controls
1 Seat heating and ventilation, driver's 8 Switching cooling function on/off manually
side 45, 46 9 Automatic Air Recirculation Control AUC/
2 Temperature, left-hand side of interior recirculated-air mode
compartment 10 Manual air volume adjustment, switching
Driving hints
3 AUTO program off automatic air conditioning, residual heat
4 Temperature, right-hand side of interior 11 Rear window heating
compartment 12 Defrosting windows and removing mist
5 Maximum cooling effect 13 Air inlet grille for inside temperature sensor,
6 Seat heating and ventilation, front passen- keep unobstructed
ger's side 45, 46 14 Manual air distribution, driver's side
7 Manual air distribution, front passenger's The current setting for manual air distribution is
side
Navigation
displayed on the control display.
Preferred interior climate

The AUTO program can optimise air distribu- The cooling function is switched on automati-
tion and air volume in virtually any situation, see cally in the AUTO program. A condensation
AUTO program below. All you need to do is sensor simultaneously regulates the program in
Entertainment
select an inside temperature you find comforta- such a way as to avoid or minimise condensa-
ble. tion on the window surfaces.
The following sections inform you in detail
about how to adjust the settings. Intensity of the AUTO program
Most settings are saved for the remote control You can adjust the intensity of the AUTO pro-
currently in use, see also Personal Profile set- gram by pressing the AUTO button repeatedly.
tings on page 27. The current setting is displayed on the auto-
matic air conditioning display whenever you
AUTO program press the button.
The AUTO program takes charge You can also adjust the intensity of the AUTO
Mobility
of setting the air volume and air program via iDrive.

distribution to the windscreen and iDrive, principle, see page 14.
side windows, to the upper body 1. Press the button.
and to the footwell. It in addition The start menu is called up.
adapts your temperature requirements in the
light of ambient seasonal influences.
"Climate".
Reference
103
3. Select "Automatic programmes" and press to the right or left to select the driver's or
Climate
the controller. front passenger's side.

5. Move the controller to select the field.
6. Turn the controller to adapt the tempera-
ture.
4. Select the desired intensity and press the

controller.
The selected intensity level of the auto-
matic program is switched on.
Defrosting windows and removing mist
Temperature Remove ice and condensation
quickly from the windscreen and
Set the desired temperatures indi-
from the front side windows.
vidually for the driver's and front
To do this, switch on the cooling function as
passenger's sides.
well.
The automatic air conditioning
attains this temperature as quickly as possible Rear window heating
regardless of the season by using maximum
The rear window heater switches
cooling or heating power if necessary. The tem-
off automatically after a certain
perature is then maintained.
time. Depending on the equipment
The highest setting produces the maximum specification, the top wires serve
heating output, irrespective of the outside tem- as the aerial and are not part of the rear window
perature. The lowest setting produces maxi- heating.
mum cooling output.
The automatic air conditioning does not Adjusting air volume manually
have sufficient time to establish the set You can vary the air volume by
temperature when temperature settings are pressing the corresponding side.
changed quickly in succession.< You can switch the automatic
function for the air volume back on by pressing
Adjusting temperature for the upper the AUTO button.
body area
1. Press the button. Adjusting air distribution manually
The start menu is called up. You can direct the air emerging into the car's
2. Move the controller to the left to call up interior via various programs, separately for the
"Climate". driver's and front passenger's side.
3. Select "Air distribution" and press the con- > Upper body area
troller. > Upper body area and footwell
4. Select driver's or front passenger's side as > Footwell
appropriate. Move the controller repeatedly
> Driver's side: windows and footwell
> Individual program
104
Selecting program Pressing the AUTO button cancels the
Press the button as often as nec- manual air distribution settings.<
Overview
essary until the desired program is The air volume continues to be regulated auto-
shown on the control display. matically when the air distribution is adjusted
manually.
Adjusting air distribution individually –
individual program Switching cooling function on and off
The settings are memorised in this program. Air is cooled and dried when the
iDrive, principle, see page 14. cooling function is switched on,
then reheated to suit the tempera-
Controls
ture setting. Depending on weather conditions,
the windscreen may fog over momentarily
2. Move the controller to the left to call up "Cli- when the engine is started.
mate".
The cooling function is switched on automati-
3. Select "Air distribution" and press the con- cally in the AUTO program. The interior can
troller.
Driving hints
only be cooled when the engine is running.
Settings for the driver's and front passen-
ger's side can be made separately via the Maximum cooling effect
field on the right-hand or left-hand side.
At outside temperatures above
4. Select driver's or front passenger's side as approx. 0 6/32 7 and when the
appropriate. engine is running, you will obtain a
Move the controller repeatedly to the right maximum cooling effect as soon as
or left to select the driver's or front passen- possible.
ger's side.
Navigation
The automatic air conditioning enters the recir-
5. Move the controller to select the required culated-air mode at the lowest temperature
field. possible. Air flows at maximum rate from the
6. Turn the controller to adapt the air distribu- outlets for the upper body area. You should
tion. therefore open these outlets for maximum cool-
ing.
Entertainment
Automatic Air Recirculation Control
AUC/recirculated-air mode
If the air outside the car has an
unpleasant odour or contains pol-
lutants, the supply to the interior of
the car can be shut off. The air
inside the car is then recirculated. In AUC mode,
a sensor detects pollutants in the outside air
Driver's side: and shuts it out automatically.
Mobility
1 Air to windscreen and side windows Three operating modes can be obtained in suc-
2 Air to the upper body area cession by pressing this button repeatedly:
3 Air to footwells > LED off: ambient air is constantly entering
the car.
Front passenger's side:
> Left-hand LED on, AUC mode: the system
4 Air to the upper body area
will identify pollutants in the ambient air and
5 Air to footwells
Reference
shut off the ambient air supply if necessary.
105
> Right-hand LED on, recirculated-air mode: Switching the automatic air
Climate
the ambient air supply is permanently shut conditioning off and on

off. Press the left-hand side for longer
If the windows mist over in the recircu- to select the lowest blower speed.
lated-air mode, press the AUTO button or Press it again to switch off the
switch off the recirculated-air mode and automatic air conditioning.
increase the air volume if necessary. The automatic air conditioning is switched on
The recirculated-air mode should not be used again by pressing any button.
uninterrupted for lengthy periods, as the quality
of the air inside the car will otherwise gradually Ventilation at front
deteriorate.<
Residual heat
Heat from the engine is stored and used to heat
the car's interior, for instance when waiting out-
side a school to collect a child.
Switching on
Residual heat utilisation can be
switched on by pressing the right-
hand side, provided the following
conditions are met:
> Up to 15 minutes after the engine has been
flow
switched off
Do not drop any foreign objects into the
> The engine is at operating temperature
outlets, otherwise they could be blown
> Battery voltage is sufficient out with some force and cause injury.<
> The outside temperature is below 256/
777 Ventilation for cooling
REST appears in the automatic air conditioning Adjust the outlets so that cool air is directed
display when residual heat utilisation is towards you, e.g. if the car's interior has
switched on. become hot.
From radio readiness, you can adjust the inside
temperature, air volume and air distribution. Draught-free ventilation
Turn outlets so that the airflow passes the
Switching off occupants without striking their bodies directly.
Press the left-hand side for longer to select the
lowest blower speed. Residual heat utilisation
can be switched off by pressing it a further time.
REST in the automatic air conditioning display
goes out.
106
Ventilation at rear The heating is not operational until the
blower is switched on. After the heating
Overview
has been switched off, the blower can be used
to circulate the air inside the car, e.g. at high
temperatures. To do this, turn knurled wheel 1
to the rear and switch on the blower, button 2.<
Microfilter and activated charcoal filter

The microfilter traps dust and pollen in the
incoming air. The activated charcoal filter in
Controls
addition removes gaseous pollutants from the
air entering the car. This combined filter is
changed by BMW Service during routine main-
2 Knurled wheel for adjusting the tempera- tenance work.
ture to the upper body area: You can call up further information on the con-
> Turned towards blue: cooler trol display, see page 69.
Driving hints
> Turned towards red: warmer
flow
Rear automatic air
conditioning*
Heating and ventilation, third seat row The control panel for the rear automatic air con-
The air around the third seat row can be heated ditioning is located on the centre console at the
or circulated. The outlets are located next to the rear.
Navigation
compartment between the seats and in the
footwell of the third seat row.
Entertainment
1 Temperature, left-hand side of rear com-
partment
1 Knurled wheel: 2 AUTO program
> To activate heating and air distribution in 3 Display
the footwell:
4 Temperature, right-hand side of rear com-
Turn forwards
partment
Mobility
> To distribute the air to the storage area

5 Seat heating, right-hand rear seat
between the seats:
Turn to rear 6 Adjusting air volume manually
2 Button for switching on the blower: 7 Seat heating, left-hand rear seat
LED on The current setting for temperature and air dis-
tribution is shown on the display 3.
Reference
107
Activating rear automatic air Temperature
Climate
conditioning Set the desired temperatures indi-

iDrive, principle, see page 14. vidually for the left and right sides.
1. Press the button. The rear automatic air conditioning
The start menu is called up. attains this temperature as quickly
2. Move the controller to the left to call up as possible regardless of the season by using
"Climate". maximum cooling or heating power if neces-
sary. The temperature is then maintained.
3. Select "Rear climate control" and press the
controller. The rear automatic air conditioning does
not have sufficient time to establish the
set temperature when temperature settings are
changed quickly in succession.<
Adjusting air volume manually

You can vary the air volume by
pressing the corresponding side.
You can switch the automatic
function for the air volume back on by pressing
the AUTO button.
4. Select the desired settings and press the
controller. Switching off rear automatic air
The rear automatic air conditioning is conditioning
activated and the settings for the automatic Press the left-hand side for longer
air conditioning on the driver's side can be to select the lowest blower speed.
adopted if desired. Press it again to switch off the rear
The rear automatic air conditioning is not automatic air conditioning.
operational if the automatic air condition- The rear automatic air conditioning can
ing is switched off. If the automatic air condi- also be switched off via iDrive. To switch
tioning function for defrosting windows and the rear automatic air conditioning on again, the
removing mist is selected, the rear automatic air system must first be activated, see Activating
conditioning is likewise not operational.< rear automatic air conditioning.<
The rear automatic air conditioning is switched
AUTO program on again by pressing any button.
The AUTO program takes charge
of adjusting the air distribution to
the upper body and footwell, as
well as the air volume. It in addition
adapts your temperature require-
ments in the light of ambient seasonal influ-
ences.
108
Ventilation at rear Independent ventilation
system*/auxiliary heater*
Overview
Principle
The independent ventilation system ventilates
the interior of the car and lowers its temperature
as necessary.
The auxiliary heater heats the interior, and it
facilitates removing snow and ice from the exte-
Controls
rior.
1 Knurled wheels for continuous opening and Two different switch-on times can be preset.
closing of the vents The systems can also be switched on/off using
2 Knurled wheels for adjusting the tempera- the remote control. They remain switched on
ture at upper body level, adjustable sepa- for 30 minutes.
rately for left and right sides: Since current consumption is high, you should
Driving hints
> Turned towards blue: cooler not run the system twice in succession unless
there has in the meantime been an opportunity
> Turned towards red: warmer
to recharge the car's battery by driving the car.
Both systems are controlled via iDrive or using
flow
the remote control, see page 111.
Independent ventilation system

The remote control and preselection of a
Navigation
switch-on time can switch on the independent
ventilation system above outside temperatures
of approx. 15 6/597. In direct mode it is oper-
ational at any outside temperature, but not in
driving mode. If auxiliary heating is not fitted,
the independent ventilation system is opera-
Entertainment
1 Lever for adjusting the direction of the air- tional at any temperature with a preselected
flow switch-on time.
2 Knurled wheel for continuous opening and Air emerges from the outlets for the upper body
closing of the outlets zone in the instrument panel. Please therefore
leave the outlets open.
Ventilation of the third seat row, see page 107.
Auxiliary heater
The remote control and preselection of a
switch-on time can switch on the auxiliary
heater above outside temperatures of approx.
Mobility
156/597. In direct mode it is operational at

any outside temperature, but not in driving
mode.
With the ignition switched off, the heated air is
automatically directed to the windscreen, side
windows and footwell.
Reference
109
From radio readiness, you can adjust the inside The symbol on the automatic air conditioning
Climate
temperature, air volume and air distribution. display flashes.

The auxiliary heater continues to run for a short
time after it has been switched off. Preselecting switch-on times
The symbol on the automatic air conditioning iDrive, principle, see page 14.
display goes out. 1. Call up the start menu.
Never run the auxiliary heater in enclosed 2. Move the controller to the left to call up
spaces, as inhaling the harmful exhaust "Climate".
gas from the engine can lead to loss of con- 3. Select "Independent mode" and press the
sciousness with fatal consequences. The controller.
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide, which
4. Select "Switch-on times" and press the
is colourless and odourless, but highly toxic.
controller.
Switch off the auxiliary heater before refuelling
the car. Drive through water only to a max. 5. Move the controller to the left or right to
depth of 25 cm, approx. 10 in, and no faster select "Timer 1" or "Timer 2".
than walking pace at that depth, otherwise the
auxiliary heater may be damaged.<
The auxiliary heater will not come on or
will switch itself off if the range on the fuel
remaining in the tank is less than approx. 50 km,
approx. 30 miles.<
Switching on and off directly

1. Call up the start menu. 6. Select the time and press the controller.
"Climate".
3. Select "Independent mode" and press the
controller.
4. Select "Direct operation" and press the
controller.
5. Select "Independent heater" or "Independ-
ent ventilation" and press the controller.
The first part of the setting is selected.

The next part of the time setting is selected.
9. Complete the setting. Once the setting has
been completed, the time is memorised.
The independent ventilation system/auxil-

iary heater is on.
110
Activating the switch-on time Switching on
Move the controller to the left or right to select 1. Press button 2 until the LED 3 lights up
Overview
"Timer 1" or "Timer 2", then press the control- green.
ler. 2. Within about 3 seconds, press button 2
again. The LED 3 flashes green.
The symbol on the automatic air conditioning
display flashes.
Switching off
Controls
1. Press button 1 until the LED 3 lights up red.
2. Within about 3 seconds, press button 1
again. The LED 3 flashes red.
The switch-on time is activated. display goes out.
Driving hints
display lights up. Interference
The symbol on the automatic air condition- The remote control handset may fail to function
ing display flashes to indicate that the system is properly if there is interference from other
on. equipment or devices which use the same radio
The system in question will only be frequency.
switched on within the next 24 hours. It
must then be reactivated.< Changing the batteries
Change the batteries if the LED no longer lights
Navigation
Remote control* up or flashes when the independent ventilation
system or auxiliary heater is switched on or off.
Entertainment
1 Switching off
2 Switching on 1. Remove the cover for the battery compart-
3 LED ment, see arrow.
4 Aerial 2. Insert new batteries of the same type. The

installed position of the batteries is marked
Mobility
The average reception range is approx. 150 m,

on the base of the battery compartment.
approx. 500 ft.
3. Fit the cover again.
You can optimise the reception range by
holding the remote control as high in the Dispose of old batteries only at an author-
air as possible with the aerial pointing upwards. ised collecting point or hand them in to
Do not touch the aerial while switching on and BMW Service.<
Reference
off.<
111
New remote control
Climate
If you would like to start using a new remote

control as a second remote control or if you
have lost your remote control, BMW Service will
gladly initialise it for you.
You can use two remote controls for your car.
112
Practical interior equipment
Overview
Integrated universal remote line at +49 (0)6838 907 277, or
0800 0466 35465 from within Germany.
control*
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Johnson
Principle Controls, Inc.
The integrated universal remote control
replaces up to three different hand-held trans-
Programming
Controls
mitters for various systems or devices that are
operated by radio remote control, for example a
garage door, a driveway gate or domestic alarm
systems. The integrated universal remote con-
trol identifies and learns the signals transmitted
by the original hand-held transmitters.
Driving hints
The signal from an original hand-held transmit-
ter can be programmed to one of the three
memory buttons 1. The memory button 1 that
has been programmed in this way can then be 1 Memory buttons
used to operate the relevant device when the
2 LED
ignition is switched on. Transmission of the sig-
nal is shown by the LED 2.
Fixed-code hand-held transmitter
If and when you decide to sell your car, in the
Navigation
1. Switch on the ignition, see page 54.
interests of security clear the programmed
functions first, see page 114. 2. When using for the first time: press the left
and right memory buttons 1 for approx.
During the programming operation and
20 seconds until LED 2 flashes rapidly. All
before a programmed system is operated
memorised programs are deleted.
with the integrated universal remote control,
make sure that no persons, animals or objects 3. Point the original hand-held transmitter at
Entertainment
are within the pivoting or movement range of memory buttons 1 at a distance of approx.
the system in question, otherwise there is a risk 10 to 30 cm, approx. 4 to 12 in.
of injury or damage. Comply also with the safety The required distance between the
instructions supplied with the original hand- hand-held transmitter and memory
held transmitter.< buttons 1 depends on the system accord-
ing to which the original hand-held trans-
Checking compatibility mitter operates.<
If this symbol appears on the pack or in 4. Press the command button on the original
the instructions supplied with the origi- hand-held transmitter and the desired
nal hand-held transmitter, you can memory button 1 on the integrated univer-
Mobility
assume that the radio remote control device will sal remote control at the same time. The
be compatible with the integrated universal LED 2 initially flashes slowly. When the
remote control. LED 2 starts to flash rapidly, release both
A list of compatible hand-held transmitters can buttons. If LED 2 does not start to flash rap-
be found on the website www.homelink.com. idly after approx. 15 seconds, change the
You can also call the freephone HomeLink hot- distance and repeat the process.
Reference
113
5. To program additional original hand-held been performed, step 5 must be completed
transmitters, repeat steps 3 and 4. within about 30 seconds.

The corresponding memory button 1 is now 5. Press programmed memory button 1 on
programmed with the same signal as the origi- the integrated universal remote control
nal hand-held transmitter. three times.
You can operate the equipment when the The corresponding memory button 1 is now
engine is running or when the ignition is programmed with the same signal as the origi-
switched on. nal hand-held transmitter.
If the device fails to function even after Please contact BMW Service should you
repeated programming, check whether have any questions.<
the original hand-held transmitter uses an alter-
nating-code system. To establish this, either Deleting memorised programs
consult the operating instructions for the origi- Press the left and right memory buttons 1 for
nal hand-held transmitter or press and hold approx. 20 seconds until LED 2 flashes rapidly:
down the programmed memory button 1 on the All memorised programs are deleted.
universal remote control. If the LED 2 on the
integrated universal remote control flashes rap- Memorising individual programs
idly for a short while and then remains lit for
1. Point the original hand-held transmitter at
about two seconds, the original hand-held
memory buttons 1 at a distance of approx.
transmitter uses an alternating-code system.
10 to 30 cm, approx. 4 to 12 in.
If it uses an alternating-code system, program
the memory buttons 1 as described under The required distance between the
Alternating-code hand-held transmitter.< hand-held transmitter and memory
buttons 1 depends on the system accord-
Alternating-code hand-held ing to which the original hand-held trans-
transmitter mitter operates.<
To program the integrated universal remote 2. Press the desired memory button 1 on the
control, consult the operating instructions for integrated universal remote control.
the device to be operated. The instructions 3. When the LED 2 starts to flash slowly after
should indicate what scope there is for synchro- about 20 seconds, press the command but-
nisation. ton on the original hand-held transmitter.
When programming an alternating-code hand- Release both buttons as soon as the LED 2
held transmitter, the following points should in starts to flash rapidly. If LED 2 does not start
addition be noted: to flash rapidly after approx. 15 seconds,
Programming will be easier if another per- change the distance and repeat the proc-
son is available to assist you.< ess.
1. Park your car within the range of the radio
remote control device.
2. Program the integrated universal remote
control as described above in Fixed-code
hand-held transmitter.
3. Establish the location of the button on the
receiver of the device to be operated, e.g.
on the drive system.
4. Press the button on the receiver of the
device to be operated. Once step 4 has
114
Digital compass* Operating principle
You can call up various functions by pressing
Overview
the adjustment knob with a pointed object,
such as a ballpoint pen. The following adjust-
ment options are displayed in succession,
depending on how long you press the adjust-
ment knob:
> Press briefly: to switch display on/off
> 3 to 6 seconds: to adjust compass zone
Controls
> 6 to 9 seconds: to calibrate compass
1 Adjustment knob > 9 to 12 seconds: to adjust for left-hand/
right-hand drive
2 Display
> 12 to 15 seconds: setting language
The primary or secondary points of the com-
pass appear on the display to indicate the direc-
Driving hints
tion in which you are currently travelling.
Setting compass zones
Navigation
Entertainment
Set your car to the applicable compass zone so To change the zone setting, briefly press the
that the compass will function correctly, see the adjustment button until the number of the com-
Mobility
world map showing compass zones. pass zone corresponding to your position
To adjust the compass zones, press the adjust- appears.
ment knob for approx. 3–4 seconds. The dis- The compass then becomes operational again
play shows the number of the compass zone after approx. 10 seconds.
set.
Reference
115
Calibrating the digital compass Roller sun blinds for rear side
The digital compass must be calibrated in the windows*

following situations:
Pull the blind out at its loop and secure it to the
> The incorrect compass direction is dis-
retainer.
played.
Do not open the window with the roller
> The compass direction displayed does not
sun blind pulled up, otherwise there is a
change when the direction of travel
risk of it being damaged when driving at higher
changes.
speeds and consequently of injury.<
> Not all compass directions are displayed.
Procedure Glove box

1. Make sure there are no large metal objects
or overhead power cables in the vicinity of Opening
your car and that you have enough space to
drive round in circles.
2. Set the correct compass zone for your cur-
rent position.
3. Press the adjustment knob for approx.
6–7 seconds to call up C. Then drive for at
least one full circle at a speed of no more
than 7 km/h, approx. 4 mph.
If calibration is successful, the display C is
replaced by the points of the compass.
Press the button. The lids open upwards and
downwards, and the light in the glove box
Adjusting for right-hand/left-hand comes on.
drive
After using the glove box while the car is
Your digital compass is already set by the man-
moving, close its lid without delay, so that
ufacturer according to whether your car has
it cannot cause injury in the event of an acci-
right-hand or left-hand drive.
dent.<
Setting language Closing

You can adjust the language of the display:
Press one of the two covers shut.
Press the adjustment knob for approx.
12–13 seconds. Press the adjustment knob Opening manually
again briefly to toggle between English "E"
In the event of power failure or an electrical fault,
and German "O".
you can open the glove box manually.
The setting is memorised automatically after
approx. 10 seconds.
116
1. Apply the screwdriver from the toolkit, see Connection for external audio
page 225, to one side of the instrument equipment
Overview
panel and open the cover, arrow. You can connect an item of external audio
equipment, e.g. a CD or MP3 player, and play
back music via the car's loudspeakers:
> AUX-In connection, see page 192.
> USB audio interface*, see page 193.
Hand lamp*
Controls
The hand lamp is located in the storage com-
partment between the front seats. Pull the lamp
out of its holder whenever it is needed.
2. Pull the loop upwards, arrow. The glove box
is opened manually. Battery changing
To remove and insert the batteries, unscrew the
Driving hints
top of the hand lamp.
Dispose of old batteries only at an author-
ised collecting point or hand them in to
BMW Service.<
Storage compartments
Navigation
There are storage compartments on the doors
and in the centre console at both the front and
Centre armrest rear*.
There are elasticated pockets* on the back of
Beneath the armrest between the front seats, the front seats.
there is a storage compartment and, depending
Do not place hard or sharp-edged objects
on specification, a cover for the mobile phone
Entertainment
in the elasticated pockets or net, other-
preparation or snap-in adapter. See also Oper-
wise there will be an increased risk of injury in
ating Instructions for Communication Systems.
the event of an accident.<
Opening the lid

Coat hooks
There are coat hooks on the grab handles in the
rear seating area.
Items of clothing hung from the hooks
must not obstruct the driver's view. Do
not hang heavy objects from the hooks, as they
Mobility
could endanger the car's occupants, e.g. in

case of heavy braking or sudden swerving.<
Press the button; the corresponding lid folds

up.
Reference
117
Drinks holders With third seat row
Do not place glassware in the drinks hold-

ers, otherwise there is an increased risk of
injury in the event of an accident. Do not force
containers that are too large into the drinks
holders; otherwise damage could result.<
Front
Fold down the centre armrest.

Press the button; the drinks holders are
opened.
Third seat row*

The drinks holders are located in the centre
console between the seats.
Push back the cover.
Rear Ashtrays
Front*
Press the button in the lower section of the

aperture to release the centre armrest, then fold
it down. To open, push the cover to the front.
Press the button; the lid folds out. Press the button. The ashtray insert pops up
slightly and can then be removed.
118
Rear* attempting to insert plugs of the wrong pattern.
This applies to all power sockets in the car.
Overview
In the load area
Controls
Press the entire lid down. The ashtray pops up
and can be removed.
To gain access to the power socket:

Lighter Fold open the cap.
Driving hints
Front* In the rear centre console
Navigation
With the engine running or the ignition switched Pull off the cap or cigarette lighter.
on, press in the cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter can be removed when it In the storage compartment beneath
Entertainment
pops back out. the centre armrest
Hold the hot cigarette lighter only by its
knob, otherwise you may suffer burns.
When leaving the car, remove the remote con-
trol, otherwise children could operate the ciga-
rette lighter and possibly burn themselves.<
Connecting electrical
appliances
Mobility
Access to the power socket*:

Power sockets Pull off the cover.
With the engine running or the ignition switched
on, the cigarette lighter socket can also be used
as a power socket for a 12 V torch or car vac-
uum cleaner, etc. rated at up to about 200 W.
Reference
Make sure that the socket is not damaged by
119
Load area
Roller cover
1. Position the casing on the left-hand side

and push it forward, arrow 1.
2. Swing the casing in, see arrow 2.
Pull out the roller cover and locate it in the hold- 3. Slide the ends of the casing forwards until it
ers. engages in the holders on both sides.
Do not place any heavy, hard objects on 4. Tug the casing to check that it is properly
the roller cover, as even heavy braking or locked in position.
sudden swerving could be sufficient to endan-
ger the car's occupants. Partition net*
Do not allow the roller cover to be retracted in
an uncontrolled manner, as this could damage
it.<
Removing
1. Release the casing with the button, arrow 1.
Engaging partition net

Pull the partition net out of the casing by the
loop. Hold the rail at both ends and insert into
the holders, see arrow 1. This is best done
working from the rear seat.
2. Swing the casing slightly to the left, arrow 2, Lowering partition net
and take it out.
If you no longer require the partition net, take
hold of the rail at both ends and remove it from
Installing
the holders, arrow 2. Allow the partition net to
To install it, proceed in the reverse order of slide slowly into the cassette.
removing.
Do not allow the partition net to be
retracted in an uncontrolled manner, as
this could result in injuries and cause damage to
the net.<
120
Expanding the load area They can be removed at the recesses in the
The rear seat back is split into two sections. You rails. To slide the lashing eyes, press the
Overview
can fold down either section individually as a button.
means of expanding the load area. Please note the information supplied
with load securing equipment.<
Floor panel flap
Controls
Reach into the recess and pull forwards.
When folding back, make sure that the
Driving hints
catches engage properly. The red warn-
For access to the toolkit, etc.
ing zone in the recess then disappears. If this is
not done, even braking or swerving could be To open, swing up the flap by the handle, see
sufficient to displace items of luggage into the arrow.
occupant compartment, endangering the occu- The floor panel flap can be locked.
pants.<
Comply with the notes on seat belts on Adaptive fixing system*
page 38, or there may be a risk to your The adaptive fixing system is for subdividing
Navigation
personal safety.< the load area. It comprises two brackets with a
telescopic rail and tensioning strap. These are
guided in the two rails on the load area floor.
Storage compartments in Before using the adaptive fixing system,
load area fold up the seat backs of the second or
third seat row and engage them, then engage
Entertainment
Depending on specification, there are the fol-
the partition net, otherwise the load could be
lowing storage options in the load area.
thrown into the car in the event of an accident.<
> Storage compartments behind the detach-
able side trims on the right and left in the
load area, and beneath the floor panel flap.
> Storage tray* beneath the floor panel flap,
capacity approx. 80 litres, approx. 2.8 cu ft.
> Tensioning straps* on the left and right side
trim for securing small items.
> Hooks* e.g. for shopping bags or carrier
Mobility
bags on the left and right in the load area.

> Net* on the left side trim of the load area, for 1 Bracket
small items.
2 Telescopic rail
> Lashing rail with lashing eyes*. You can
3 Recess in the load area rail
attach load securing equipment to the lash-
Reference
ing eyes.
121
Inserting brackets Removing brackets
The two brackets are connected by a telescopic Press down the brackets as far as the recesses
rail. in the rails and remove them.
1. Insert the brackets at the recesses in the rail
on the luggage compartment floor.
2. Press down the brackets to slide them into
Ski bag*
the desired position. This enables up to four pairs of standard skis or
3. Check that the brackets are located firmly. up to two snowboards to be carried safely and
They must be clearly heard to engage. kept clean.
Do not place any items of the load on the You can stow skis up to a length of 2.10 m,
brackets, otherwise they could be approx. 7 ft, with the aid of the ski bag. If skis of
released.< this length are carried, however, the capacity of
the ski bag is lower in view of its tapered design.
Subdividing the load area Before loading the ski bag, fold in the
screen of the rear-compartment DVD
system*, otherwise the screen could be dam-
aged.<
Loading
1. Fold down the centre armrest, press the
button and open the cover.
You have the following options for positioning

the load:
> Between the rear seat back and telescopic
rail
> Between the telescopic rail and tensioning
strap
Positioning the load between the telescopic rail
and tensioning strap: 2. Press the button again; the cover in the load
area opens. This cover will also open if you
1. Place the load up against the telescopic rail.
press this button hard enough the first time.
Press the button, arrow 1, and guide the
tensioning strap around the load, arrow 2. 3. Lay out the ski bag between the front seats
and fill it. The zip fastener provides better
2. Engage the tensioning strap in the
access to the objects stowed in the bag and
mounting 3 on the telescopic rail.
facilitates drying the ski bag.
3. Press the button on the bracket, arrow 1.
The tensioning strap is tightened.
You can also hook together both tension-
ing straps.
When you no longer require the adaptive fixing
system, retract the tensioning strap and push
the fixing system forward to allow maximum use
of the load area.<
122
4. Insert the tongue of the ski bag retaining Removing ski bag
strap into the centre belt buckle marked The ski bag can be removed completely, e.g. for
Overview
CENTER. ease of drying or so that you can use other fit-
tings in its place.
Controls
Only stow clean skis in the ski bag. Wrap pro-
tective material around any sharp edges to 1. Pull the handle forward, arrow 1.
avoid causing damage.
2. Lift out the ski bag, arrow 2.
Driving hints
Securing the load 3. Close the lid in the load area.
For more information about the various
fittings available, contact BMW Service.<
Navigation
After loading the ski bag, secure the bag and its
contents by tightening the retaining strap at its
turnbuckle.
Entertainment
Secure the ski bag in the manner
described, otherwise even heavy braking
or sudden swerving could be sufficient to
endanger the car's occupants.<
To stow away the ski bag, follow the opposite of
the procedure for loading.
Mobility
Reference
123
Driving hints
Here is a variety of information that you may
require in particular driving situations or
operating modes.

Driving precautions
Driving precautions
Running in above have to be renewed in the course of the

car's operating life.
Moving parts need a certain time to achieve
maximum operating efficiency as a unit. Please
comply with the following instructions, which General driving hints
are intended to ensure that your car achieves its
optimum operating life and economy.
Closing the tailgate
Drive only with the tailgate fully closed,
Engine and final drive
otherwise exhaust gases could enter the
Observe the national speed limits in the country passenger compartment.<
in which you are travelling.
If it is nevertheless necessary to travel with the
tailgate open, observe the following precau-
Up to 2000 km, approx. 1200 miles
tions:
Drive at varying road and engine speeds, but do
not exceed the following values: 1. Close all windows and the panorama glass
roof.
> Petrol engine
4500 rpm, or 160 km/h, approx. 100 mph 2. Increase the air volume from the automatic
air conditioning considerably, see
> Diesel engine pages 100 or 104.
3500 rpm, or 150 km/h, approx. 90 mph
Avoid full throttle and do not use the automatic Hot exhaust system
transmission kick-down. High temperatures occur in the exhaust
system of all vehicles. Never remove the
From 2000 km, approx. 1200 miles, head shields protecting this area, nor apply
onwards underseal to them. Make sure that when the car
Engine and road speeds can be gradually is driven or parked and when the engine is
increased. idling, no easily flammable material such as hay,
leaves, grass, etc. comes into contact with the
Tyres hot exhaust pipe. It could ignite and cause a fire,
New tyres do not achieve their full road with the risk of severe injuries or damage. Do
grip immediately, for production reasons. You not touch hot exhaust tail pipes; otherwise
should therefore drive in a restrained manner there is a risk of burns.<
for the first 300 km, approx. 200 miles.
Diesel particle filter*
Brake system The diesel particle filter collects soot particles
Brake pads and discs do not achieve a favoura- and burns them periodically at high tempera-
ble wear and contact pattern until the car has tures. This cleaning procedure takes several
covered about 500 km, approx. 300 miles. Drive minutes. Under some circumstances, you may
with caution during this running in period. notice it by the fact that the engine temporarily
runs more roughly and requires a higher engine
After fitting new parts speed for normal power development. In addi-
tion, the exhaust may cause some noise and
The same running in procedures should be
emit a small amount of smoke, even after the
observed if any of the components mentioned
engine has been switched off.
126
Mobile communication equipment 10 in, and no faster than walking pace at that
BMW advises against the use of mobile depth, otherwise the auxiliary heater may be
Overview
communication equipment such as damaged.<
mobile phones inside the car, unless they are
directly connected to an outside aerial. Mutual Safe braking
interference between the car's electronics and Your BMW is equipped with ABS as standard.
such equipment cannot be entirely ruled out. Where a situation requires you to apply the
There is moreover no guarantee that the radia- brakes hard, you are advised to do so. Since the
tion generated when such devices are transmit- car remains steerable, you can avoid obstacles
ting will be dissipated out of the car's interior.< by turning the steering wheel as smoothly as
Controls
possible.
Climatic comfort windscreen* The pulsating sensation at the brake pedal,
combined with the sound of the hydraulic sys-
tem operating, indicates that ABS is interven-
ing.
Driving hints
Wet roads
In wet conditions or heavy rain, apply the brakes
briefly with slight pedal pressure every few kilo-
metres or miles. When doing so, make sure that
no other road user is endangered. The resulting
Use the area marked in the illustration for heat dries the brake discs and pads. The brak-
garage-door openers, electronic devices for toll ing force will then be available immediately if
logging, or similar. This area does not have an needed.
Navigation
infrared-reflecting coating and is clearly distin-
guishable from inside the car. Downhill gradients
To avoid impairing the efficiency of the
Aquaplaning brake system as a result of overheating,
When driving on wet or slushy surfaces, drive down long or steep descents in the gear
reduce speed to prevent a wedge of water that allows you to keep brake applications to a
Entertainment
forming between the tyre and the road. This sit- minimum. Otherwise even slight continuous
uation, known as aquaplaning, means that the pressure on the brake could cause overheating,
tyre can actually lose contact completely with brake pad wear or even brake system failure.<
the road surface, so that neither can the car be The engine's braking effect can be further
steered nor the brakes be properly applied.< boosted by shifting down in the automatic
The risk of aquaplaning increases along with transmission's manual mode, if necessary right
declining tread depth on the tyres, see also down to first gear, see page 58. This avoids
Minimum tread depth on page 216. placing an excessive burden on the brakes.
Never drive with the transmission in neu-
Wading tral or with the engine switched off;
Mobility
Drive through water only to a max. depth engine braking action will not be present, or
of 50 cm, approx. 20 in, and no faster than there will be no power assistance to the brakes
walking pace, otherwise the engine, electrical or steering.
system and transmission may be damaged. Make sure that pedal functions are not impaired
On cars with an auxiliary heater, drive through by floor mats, carpets or other objects.<
water only to a max. depth of 25 cm, approx.
Reference
127
Corrosion of brake discs Rule of the road
Driving precautions
If the car is used only for short distances, is not

When entering countries where the traffic
used for lengthy periods or is subjected to only
drives on the opposite side of the road to the
minor loads, the brake discs will be particularly
country in which your car is registered, certain
susceptible to corrosion and the brake pads will
measures are necessary to avoid dazzling the
collect dirt; this is because the necessary brake
drivers of oncoming vehicles.
pressure for a self-cleaning effect has not been
generated. BMW recommends that any routines that you
are not familiar with be entrusted to BMW
When the brakes are applied, corroded discs
Service.
tend to judder, and even lengthy brake applica-
The adjusted headlights will not cause the driv-
tions usually fail to eliminate this effect entirely.
ers of oncoming vehicles to be dazzled in the
regular country of use; it is therefore possible to
When car is parked
have the headlights adjusted, e.g. by BMW
Moisture condensate forms in the automatic air Service, before you actually cross into a country
conditioning and is discharged underneath the where the traffic drives on the opposite side of
car. Traces of water on the ground are therefore the road.
normal.
Do not make adjustments while the head-
lights are still hot, otherwise there is a risk
Before entering the car wash
of burns.<
Fold in the outside mirrors, see page 47, as they
could otherwise be damaged due to the car's Adjusting headlights
width.
Useful hints on care of your BMW are provided Access to the bulbs
in the booklet Looking after your car. 1. Switch off the lights and remove the remote
control from the ignition lock.
Mixed tyres*
2. In the engine compartment, see page 219,
Before driving into a car wash, make sure remove the cover for the low-beam head-
that the vehicle is not too wide for the car light on each side. To do this, press the
wash, otherwise the vehicle and the car wash catch down and take off the cover.
could be damaged.<
Rear window wiper

Rear window wipers can sustain damage in car
washes. If necessary, please ask the operator of
the car wash about appropriate protection
measures.
With comfort access*

Insert the remote control into the ignition lock.
The engine can be switched off in transmission Halogen headlights
position N, see also page 35. 1. For driving on the left:
Push the lever on the left-hand headlight
towards the outside of the car, and the lever
128
on the right-hand headlight towards the sustain internal damage. This could lead to sud-
centre of the car. den pressure loss.<
Overview
For driving on the right:
Push the lever on the left-hand headlight Loading
towards the centre of the car, and the lever
on the right-hand headlight towards the
outside of the car.
Controls
Driving hints
2. Replace the cover and make sure that it
engages audibly.
Xenon headlights*
1. For driving on the left:
Pull the lever on the left-hand headlight up,
arrow 1, and push the lever on the right- > Position heavy objects low down and as far
Navigation
hand headlight down, arrow 2. forward as possible, ideally directly behind
For driving on the right: the rear seat back.
Pull the lever on the right-hand headlight > Wrap protective material round sharp cor-
up, arrow 1, and push the lever on the left- ners and edges.
hand headlight down, arrow 2.
> When carrying very heavy loads with no
passengers on the back seat, insert each of
Entertainment
the outer seat belts into their opposite
buckles.
> Do not stack items higher than the top edge
of the seat backs.
> Use the partition net to protect passengers,
see page 120. Make sure that objects can-
not poke through the partition net.
Place protective material around sharp-
2. Replace the cover and make sure that it edged or pointed objects which could strike
Mobility
engages audibly. the rear window while the car is on the

move.
Load Securing the load

Avoid overloading the car, as this could > Small and relatively light items can be
cause the tyres' load capacity limit to be retained with the tensioning straps*, with a
load-area net* or other suitable straps.
Reference
exceeded. The tyres could then overheat and
129
limit, the car's gross weight limit and the axle
Driving precautions
loads are not exceeded.

The relevant figures are shown under Weights
from page 241 onwards.
The roof load must be distributed uniformly and
should not be too bulky. Place heavy items of
luggage low down. Make sure that there is suf-
ficient clearance for raising the panorama glass
roof and that no objects extend back far enough
> BMW Service can supply suitable lashings* to be struck by the tailgate when it is opened.
for securing larger or heavier loads. To Correct, secure loading of the roof rack will pre-
secure these lashings, there are four eyes in vent items shifting or falling off during the jour-
the load area, see picture. ney.
> Please note the information supplied with Drive smoothly and avoid violent acceleration,
load securing equipment. braking or cornering.
Stow and secure the load as described
above, so that it cannot endanger the
car's occupants, for example if sudden braking Towing a trailer
or evasive action is necessary.
Information about permissible trailer loads is
Secure lashings only to the lashing eyes, see
given from page 242 onwards. BMW Service
illustration, otherwise the lashings could work
will provide information about ways to increase
loose or the car could sustain damage.
these load ratings.
Do not exceed the car's permitted gross weight
or the axle load limits, see page 241 onwards,
Cover flap
otherwise the car's operating safety may be
endangered and the construction and use reg-
ulations infringed.
Heavy or hard objects should not be carried
loose inside the car, since they could be dis-
lodged, for example by heavy braking, sudden
evasive action or similar, and endanger the
occupants.<
Roof rack* Removing

A special roof rack system is available as an Take hold of the cover flap for the trailer tow
accessory for your BMW. If it is used, please hitch* by the cutout from beneath, and pull off
comply with the installation instructions sup- to the rear.
plied.
Fitting
Loading the roof rack Hold the cover flap against the trim from
A loaded roof rack alters the car's road behav- beneath, push it into the guide and press on
iour and steering response quite considerably, fully.
by moving its centre of gravity. When loading
the roof rack, ensure that the specified roof load
130
Trailer tow hitch* load for the car. The smaller value is the limit
Cars fitted with a trailer tow hitch prior to deliv- which should be adhered to.
Overview
ery are equipped with uprated suspension at
the rear axle and a more powerful engine cool- Tyre pressures
ing system, as appropriate for the model. Take great care to check the car's and the
Look after a detachable ball end in accordance trailer's tyre pressures. For the car, the tyre
with the manufacturer's operating instructions, inflation pressures for heavy loads apply, see
to ensure that it can be fitted and removed with- page 216. After each correction of the tyre
out difficulty. pressures, reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator,
see page 87. For the trailer, comply with the
Controls
Due to the body reinforcements at the rear end
manufacturer's specifications.
of the car, the effect of the regenerable bumper
system is limited.
Run Flat Indicator
Stowing away Reinitialise the Run Flat Indicator after a trailer
has been attached or detached, see page 87.
The detachable ball hitch is stowed away in the
Driving hints
load area, beneath the floor panel flap.
Outside mirrors
Fitting and removing Two outside mirrors which bring both rear cor-
ners of the trailer into your field of view are
The procedure for fitting and removing the ball
required by law. Mirrors of this kind can be
hitch is described in the enclosed manufac-
obtained from BMW Service as optional acces-
turer's operating instructions.
sories.
Before a journey
Electrical consumers
Navigation
Nose weight When towing a caravan, try to avoid operating
electrical equipment for too long at a time, in
It is important to ensure that the nose weight is
order to limit the drain on the car's battery.
never less than a minimum of 25 kg, approx.
55 lb. Information about nose weight limits is The power output of the trailer's rear lights
given from page 242 onwards. The nose weight must not exceed the following values:
Flashing turn indicators: 21 W each side
Entertainment
should be kept close to this limit.
Stop lights: 30 W each side
The trailer's nose weight affects the towing
Brake lights: 42 W total
vehicle and thus increases its weight. The
Rear fog lights: 42 W total
weight of the trailer tow hitch and the nose
Reversing lights: 42 W total.
weight reduce the maximum payload of your
BMW. Please ensure that these do not cause Before starting a journey, check that the
the gross weight limit of the towing vehicle to be trailer's rear lights are operating correctly.
exceeded if a trailer is being towed. Driving without functioning rear lights could put
other road users at risk.<
Loads
Towing a trailer
Mobility
When loading the trailer, make sure that

the weight is kept as low as possible and Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h,
stowed if possible close to the axle. approx. 50 mph, otherwise the trailer may
start to snake depending on design and load.<
A low centre of trailer gravity makes the outfit
much more stable and safe to drive.
Counteracting snaking
Do not exceed either the trailer's permitted
If the trailer nevertheless begins to snake, the
Reference
gross weight or the specified permitted towing

outfit can only be stabilised by braking hard
131
immediately. Only attempt to steer out of the Driving on rough tracks
Driving precautions
situation if this is absolutely essential, and make

any steering movements as cautiously as pos- Your X5 will feel at home on all kinds of roads
sible and without endangering other road users. and tracks. It combines four-wheel drive with
the benefits of a conventional passenger car.
Trailer Stability Control* Do not drive over rough terrain, otherwise
The system helps you to neutralise a trailer's the vehicle could incur damage.<
tendency to swing from side to side. It detects For your own safety and that of your passen-
snaking and automatically brakes the car gers, and to protect your car against damage,
promptly so that the car is no longer in a critical observe the following points carefully when
road-speed range and the trailer is stabilised. driving on rough tracks:
The system functions whenever the car is tow- > Familiarise yourself with the vehicle before
ing a trailer and the power socket for the trailer setting out in it, and never consciously take
is connected, starting at a speed of approx. risks.
65 km/h, approx. 40 mph. > Adapt your speed to the road conditions.
If the power socket for the trailer is in use but no The steeper and more uneven the road, the
trailer is attached, due to the use of a bicycle slower you should drive.
carrier with lights, for example, the system may > The car can handle ascents and descents at
still be operational in extreme driving situations. gradients of up to 50%. If you wish to drive
The system is unable to intervene if the trailer on such steep gradients, first check that the
jack-knifes, e.g. on roads that are slippery or on engine oil and coolant levels are close to the
loose ground. Trailers with a high centre of MAX mark, see page 220.
gravity can tip over before a swinging motion is > Use Hill Descent Control HDC for steep
detected. descents, see page 84. It is possible to drive
The system is not operational if DSC is deacti- off on uphill gradients of up to 33%.
vated or malfunctioning, see page 83. The maximum lateral incline is 50%.
> Watch out for obstructions such as stones
Uphill gradients and potholes, and try to drive round them if
In the interest of safety and to avoid holding up possible.
other traffic, do not attempt to climb gradients > When driving over crests and on bumpy
steeper than 12Ξ when towing a trailer. If a roads, avoid causing the car's underbody to
supplementary permit for heavier trailer loads make contact with the surface. The car's
has been obtained, the limit is 8Ξ, see maximum ground clearance is approx.
page 242. 20 cm, approx. 8 in. Please note that the
ground clearance may vary according to the
Downhill gradients car's load and operating conditions.
Special care must be taken when descending > Do not drive through water on roads deeper
gradients, where a trailer is more susceptible to than 50 cm, approx. 20 in; proceed at walk-
snaking. ing pace, but do not stop.
Before starting to descend in the automatic On cars with an auxiliary heater*, do not
transmission's manual mode, always change drive through water deeper than 25 cm,
down to the next-lower gear, if necessary as far approx. 10 in.
as 1st gear, and drive down the hill slowly.
> After driving through water, press the foot-
brake several times at low speed; this will
generate enough heat to dry the brakes off
132
and ensure that the braking effect is not
impaired by moisture.
Overview
> Depending on the properties of the road or
track, it may be helpful to activate DTC
briefly, see Dynamic Traction Control DTC
on page 84.
> If the wheels under one side of the car spin,
press the accelerator down far enough to
prompt the driving stability control systems
to distribute the propulsive power appropri-
Controls
ately between the individual wheels.
After driving on rough tracks, please observe
the following points, to uphold the safety of your
BMW:
> Clean coarse dirt off the body.
Driving hints
> Remove mud, snow, ice, etc. from the
wheels and tyres, and check the tyres for
damage.
Navigation
Entertainment
Mobility
Reference
133
Navigation
This chapter describes how you can enter
destinations and choose your route, so that
your navigation system guides you reliably
to your destination.

Starting the navigation system*
Starting the navigation system
Your navigation system can determine the pre- 1. Move the controller to the right to change to
cise position of your car by means of satellites the assistance window.
and guide you reliably to any specified destina-
tion.
Navigation DVD
Inserting navigation DVD

Further menu items are displayed.
3. Select the desired view of the route or
"Vehicle position".
1. Insert the navigation DVD with the label side

uppermost.
The navigation DVD is pulled in automati-
cally.
2. Wait for several seconds to allow the con-
tents of the DVD to be read in.
Removing navigation DVD 4. Press the controller.

1. Press button 1.
The DVD is ejected part way out of the Displaying arrow view in the map view
drive. If the navigation system proposes a change of
2. Remove the DVD. direction, the arrow view is displayed briefly.
If the DVD is not ejected from the drive, the 1. Press the button.
drive may be blocked. If this happens, a mes- The start menu is called up.
sage appears on the control display. 2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
Display in the assistance 4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
window is selected and press the controller.
You can have the route or your car's position 5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker
displayed in the assistance window. This infor- to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
mation remains displayed even if you change to until "Languages" is selected and press the
another application. controller.
136
6. Select "Navigation arrow pop-up display"
Overview
Controls
The arrow view is flashed up.
Driving hints
Navigation
Entertainment
Mobility
Reference
137
Destination input
Destination input
You can choose from the following options for Calling up navigation
entering a destination:
iDrive, for principle see page 14.
> Entering a destination manually, see below
> Entering a destination via voice com-
mands*, see page 142
> Selecting the destination via Information,
"Navigation".
see page 144
> Selecting a destination from a list, see Des-
tinations list, page 146
> Selecting a destination from the address
book, see page 146
> Selecting home address, see page 148
Once you have selected a destination, you are
ready to start route guidance, see page 151.
You can also store a destination for navigation
under the favourites/programmable memory 3. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
buttons, see page 19. ler.
Only enter data when the car is standing
still, and always obey the traffic regula-
tions and road signs in the event of any contra-
diction between the traffic situation and the
instructions given by the navigation system.
Otherwise, you risk endangering the safety of
the passengers in your car and other road
users.<
Entering a destination
manually
The wordmatch principle makes the input of the
names of towns/cities and streets easier, see
page 150. This makes it possible to enter differ-
ent spellings, and names are completed auto-
matically so that stored names of towns/cities
and streets can be called up quickly.
138
1. If necessary, move the highlighted marker Selecting country
to the uppermost field. Turn the controller 1. Select "Country" or the country displayed
Overview
until "Navigation" is selected and press the and press the controller.
controller.
"New destination" is selected.
Controls
The list of available countries is displayed.
2. Select your destination country and press
the controller.
Driving hints
3. Select "Address input" and press the con- Europe can also be selected.
troller.
At least the town/city or its postcode must be
entered in order to start route guidance.
Entering a destination by town or city

name
1. Select "City" or the town/city displayed and
Navigation
2. Select the initial letter and press the con-
troller.
A list of all towns/cities starting with that let-
The system in addition supports you with the ter is shown on the control display.
following special features: 3. To delete any letters, if necessary:
Entertainment
> If you do not enter a street name, you will be
guided to the centre of the town or city.
> You can skip input of the country, town or
city if you wish to retain previous inputs.
> To delete individual numbers or letters:

Mobility
Move the controller to the right to select

> To delete all numbers or letters:
, and press the controller for longer.
Reference
139
4. Enter more letters if necessary. 2. Entering postcode:
Destination input
The list is gradually narrowed down with Select the individual characters and press
every subsequent letter that you enter. the controller each time.
> To enter spaces, if necessary:
Select the symbol and press the con-
troller.
> To enter blank spaces:

troller.
5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker > To delete individual numbers or letters:
to the third field from the top. Turn the con- Move the controller to the right to select
troller until the town or city name is selected and press the controller.
in the list and press the controller. > To delete all numbers or letters:
, and press the controller for longer.
3. Select postcode and press the controller.
The name of the appropriate destination is
displayed.
4. Move the highlighted marker to the third
the destination is selected and press the
controller.
Entering a destination by postcode

1. Select "City" or "City / Postcode" and press
the controller.
140
Entering street, house number and 2. Turn the controller to the right until a
junction request appears to enter a street within the
Overview
After entering the street, you can add the junc- country, and press the controller.
tion or house number.
Entering a street and junction

1. Select "Street" or the street displayed and
2. Enter the street.
Controls
The street is entered in the same way as the
town/city.

field from the top and enter the street.
Driving hints
Entering a house number
All house numbers that are stored on the navi-
gation DVD for the street in question can be
entered.
1. Select "Building number" and press the
Enter the junction in the same way as the street. controller.
2. To enter the house number:
Entering a street without indicating a Select the individual characters and press
Navigation
town/city the controller each time.
You can also enter a street without indicating a 3. Move the highlighted marker to the third
town or city. In this case, all streets are offered field from the top. Turn the controller until
within the country indicated. The respective the house number is selected and press the
town or city is shown after the street name. controller.
If a town or city has been entered already, this
Entertainment
entry can be cancelled. This may be useful in Starting route guidance from a manual
instances where the desired street cannot be destination input
found in the indicated town or city because it
belongs to a different suburb, for example.
1. Move the highlighted marker to the upper-
most field.
The arrow is selected.
Mobility
> Select "Start guidance" and press the con-

troller.
Route guidance is started immediately.
Reference
141
> If route guidance does not start straight Spelling the destination
Destination input
away: To enter a destination, spell it in the manner in

Select "Add to destination list" and press which it is spelled in the destination country.
the controller. Say the letters fluently and at normal volume,
The destination is stored in the destinations and avoid unnatural emphases and pauses.
list, see page 146.
1. Spell the name of the town or city:
Say at least the first three letters of the
town or city. The more letters you say,
Entering a destination via the more precisely the system will rec-
voice commands* ognise the town or city.
You can enter a desired destination via the The system can propose up to
voice input system. To enter a destination, it is 20 destinations that match your entries. Up
possible at any time to make entries via voice to 6 entries are displayed at a time on the
commands or via iDrive. To do so, simply reac- control display.
tivate the voice input system, if necessary.
You can have the possible commands
read aloud to you via {Options}.<
2. {Address input}
The system suggests a town or city.

2. Select town or city:
> Select chosen town/city: {Yes}
> Select other town/city: {No}
> Select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3}
Selecting country > To show other entries on the list:
{Next page}
1. Wait for the system to ask for the country of
destination. > Spell the town/city again: {Repeat}
2. Say the name of the destination coun- The town or city can also be selected from the
try. list via iDrive:
Say the name of the destination country in the Turn the controller until the destination is
language of the voice input system. selected and press the controller.
Entering a destination Entering the destination as an entire

word*
The destination can be spelled or entered as a
whole word. Towns/cities and streets in the same language
of the voice input system can be spoken as
whole words.
Example: to enter a town/city within Germany as
an entire word, the language of the system
must be German.
142
A prerequisite is the use of a suitable navigation Entering a street and a house number
DVD. The street is entered in the same manner as the
Overview
Speak fluently and at normal volume, and avoid town or city.
unnatural emphases and pauses. To enter the house number:
1. Wait for the system to ask for the destina- 1. {Building number}
tion town/city.
2. Say the house number.
2. Say the name of the destination town/
city. Starting route guidance
The system can propose up to {Start guidance}
Controls
6 destinations that match your entries.
Route guidance is started immediately.
Saving a destination
The destination is added to the destination list
or can be stored in the address book.
Driving hints
{Add to destination list} or
{Add to address book}
The system suggests a town or city.

Selecting a destination from a
map
3. Select town or city:
> Select chosen town/city: {Yes} If you know only the position of a town/city or
street, you can enter the destination with the aid
Navigation
> Select other town/city: {No}
of a map. You can select the destination on the
> Select an entry, e.g. {Entry 3} map by means of cross-hairs and then transfer
> Enter the town/city again: {Repeat} it for route guidance.
> Enter the town/city by spelling: 1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
{Spell} ler.
"New destination" is selected.
Entertainment
The town or city can also be selected from the
list via iDrive:
Turn the controller until the destination is
Identical-sounding towns/cities that can-
not be distinguished by the system are
summarised in a separate list and shown as a
town/city followed by three dots.
If necessary, select this entry using {Yes}. Then
select the desired town/city in the list.<
Mobility
Reference
143
3. Select "Destination input map" and press 6. Select the desired menu item:
Destination input
the controller. > "Start route guidance" starts route guid-

ance.
> "Show vehicle position" places your
car's position at the centre of the map.
> "Show destination position" places the
current destination at the centre of the
map.
> "Proceed" changes back to the "Desti-
nation input map".
> to exit the menu.
A map section is displayed on the control
display:
> Around the current destination during
route guidance
> Around the last destination entered if
route guidance is switched off

The map for destination input can also be called
up in the map view:
Select the symbol and press the controller.
4. Select the destination with the cross-hairs. Selecting the destination via
> Change the scale: turn the controller. Information
> Move the map: move the controller in the
You can call up selected destinations, e.g.
corresponding direction.
hotels, tourist attractions or hospitals, and
The controller can be moved left, right,
transfer them for route guidance if you choose.
forward and back.
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
5. To transfer the destination for route guid-
ler.
ance or save it, press the controller.
The selected destination and further menu 2. Select "Information" and press the control-
items are displayed. ler.
144
3. Select town/city: > To establish a telephone connection:
> "On destination" Select the symbol and press the con-
Overview
troller.
> "On location"
> To display further destinations:
> "Other place"
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
> To start a new search:
troller.
Controls
To exit the menu:
Symbols in the map view

If you have selected e.g. the category hotels
4. Press the controller. and started the search, the hotels are repre-
Driving hints
5. Make your selection, e.g. "Hotels / restau- sented on the map by symbols.
rants", and press the controller. To hide the symbols in the map view:
6. Enter search criteria as required, e.g. the 1. Select the symbol and press the control-
maximum distance from the car's position. ler.
7. Select "<Start search>" and press the con-
troller.
Destinations are displayed on the control
display.
Navigation
Entertainment
2. Select "Hide icons" and press the control-
ler.
The symbols are hidden.
To display the symbols:
8. Select a destination and press the control-
Select "Show icons" and press the controller.
ler.
To exit the menu:
The range of information and symbols
depends on the individual navigation
DVD being used.<
9. Select the desired menu item:
Mobility
> To transfer the address to the destina-

tions list and start route guidance:
Select the symbol and press the
controller.
Reference
145
Destinations list Editing the destination list
Destination input
1. Select the desired destination in the desti-

The last 20 destinations entered into the sys-
nations list and press the controller.
tem are shown in the destinations list. You can
call up these destinations and incorporate them 2. The selected destination can be edited:
into route guidance. > Save entry:
If you are planning a longer journey, for exam- Select "Add to address book".
ple, you can save all the destinations you wish > Display information about the destina-
to drive to in the destinations list in advance, tion:
see Entering a destination manually on Select "Info on destination".
page 138.
> Delete entry:
Select "Navigation" and press the controller. Select "Delete entry".
> Delete all entries:
Select "Delete list". Route guidance is
switched off.
> Change entry:
Select "Change destination". Operating
principle, see Entering a destination by
town or city name, page 139.
The destination last entered is listed first in the

destinations list. Address book
This symbol identifies the current destina-
tion during route guidance. Calling up address book
To show other destinations in the destinations iDrive, for principle see page 14.
list:
Turn the controller.
Transferring the destination to route

guidance
1. Select the desired destination from the des-
tinations list and press the controller.
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Select "Address book" and press the controller.
Storing destinations in the address

book
You can save approx. 100 destinations in the
address book.
146
1. Select "Address book" and press the con- 3. Select "Use current location as address"
troller. and press the controller.
Overview
2. Select "New address" and press the con- The name given can be modified. Operating
troller. principle, see Entering a destination manu-
ally, page 138.
4. Select "Save address" and press the con-
troller.
You can transfer your current position to the
address book even if you have left the area dig-
itised on the navigation DVD. To do this, you
Controls
have to enter a name.
Selecting destinations from the

address book
3. Select "Enter address yourself" and press
1. Select "Address book" and press the con-
the controller.
Driving hints
troller.
4. Enter a name and address, see also Enter- The stored entries are displayed on the
ing a destination manually, page 138. control display.
troller.
The entry is saved in the address book.
You can also save a destination from the desti-
nations list in the address book, see page 146.
Navigation
Saving the car's position*
The car's position can be transferred to the
address book.
1. Select "Address book" and press the con- 2. Select an entry and press the controller.
troller.
To start route guidance:
Entertainment
2. Move the highlighted marker to the third Select "Start guidance" and press the control-
field from the top. Turn the controller until ler.
"New address" is selected and press the
controller.
Mobility
Reference
147
Changing destinations from address 5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker
Destination input
book to the uppermost field. Turn the controller

1. Select "Address book" and press the con- until "Delete data" is selected and press the
troller. controller.
2. Select entry and press the controller.

3. Select "Edit" and press the controller.
6. Select "Delete address book" and press the

controller.
7. Select "Yes" and press the controller.
4. Change entry.
Operating principle, see Entering a destina-
Home address
tion manually, page 138.
You can save the car's position or the current
destination as your home address in the
troller.
address book. This entry appears in second
place in the address book.
Deleting destinations from address
book individually
Saving home address
troller.
troller.
2. Select entry and press the controller.
2. Move the highlighted marker to the third
3. Select "Delete" and press the controller. field from the top. Turn the controller until
"Home address" is selected and press the
controller.
Deleting all destinations from address

book
1. Call up the start menu. 3. Select "Use current location as address" or
"Save current destination" during route
2. Press the controller to call up the menu. guidance and press the controller.
3. Select "Settings" and press the controller. 4. Select "Save address" and press the con-
4. Select "Vehicle / Tyres" and press the controller.
troller.
148
Accepting your home address as a The various criteria are listed on the control
destination display.
Overview
1. Select "Home address" and press the con- 3. Select a route criterion for the route:
troller. > "Use motorways"
2. Select "Start guidance" and press the con- Motorways and arterial roads are given
troller. priority.
> "Exclude motorways"
Changing your home address Motorways are avoided as far as possi-
1. Select "Home address" and press the con- ble.
Controls
troller. > "Fast route"
2. Select "Edit" and press the controller. The fast route, being a combination of
Operating principle, see Entering a destina- the shortest possible route and the fast-
tion manually, page 138. est roads.
> "Short route"
Short route, irrespective of how fast or
Driving hints
Selecting a route slow progress will be.
You can influence the route calculated by 4. Press the controller.
selecting various route criteria. You can change
the route criteria as often as you like during des-
tination input or during route guidance.
The route is planned according to fixed rules.
The type of road is taken into account, e.g.
motorways or winding roads. Details of the road
Navigation
types are stored on the navigation DVD. For this
reason, the route proposed by the system will
not necessarily be the one the driver expects
from experience.
The route criterion is selected.
Altering route criteria 5. Select additional criteria for the route as
Entertainment
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- appropriate, then press the controller:
ler. > "Dynamic route"*
2. Move the highlighted marker to the third Automatic alteration of route in the event
field from the top. Turn the controller until of traffic obstructions. Depending on the
"Route criteria" is selected and press the type of road and the nature and length of
controller. the traffic congestion, the route can also
be calculated such that it cuts across the
traffic congestion.
> "Exclude toll roads"
Toll roads are avoided as far as possible.
Mobility
> "Exclude ferries"

Ferries are avoided as far as possible.
To exit the menu:
The route criteria can also be changed in the
Reference
arrow or map view.
149
1. Select the symbol for the route criterion and
Destination input

2. Select a route criterion and press the con-
troller.
Wordmatch principle
The wordmatch principle makes the input of the
names of towns/cities and streets easier. It
compares your destination inputs continuously
with the data stored on the navigation DVD, and
reacts even if slight discrepancies are found.
This has the following advantages for you:
> You can also input the names of towns/cit-
ies in a form which differs from the official
version, provided that you use a form that is
familiar in another country or language.
Example:
If you are using the German navigation DVD,
instead of the German name "München"
you can enter the English equivalent
"Munich" or the Italian equivalent
"Monaco".
> When entering the names of towns/cities or
streets, the system completes the name
automatically as soon as it has been identi-
fied beyond doubt.
> The system only accepts name entries
beginning with letters that are stored on the
navigation DVD. This makes it impossible
for an incorrect name or unknown
addresses to be accepted.
150
Route guidance
Overview
Starting route guidance During route guidance, you can operate other
equipment items at any time via iDrive. Voice
Via iDrive messages and the displayed direction arrows
notify you in good time of any necessary
changes in direction.
to the uppermost field. Turn the controller Via favourites/programmable memory
Controls
until "Navigation" is selected and press the buttons
controller.
Press the button ... on which the
2. Select the destination from the destination desired destination is stored, see also page 20.
list and press the controller or enter a new
destination, see page 138.
Driving hints
Route guidance, ending/
resuming
In the arrow or map view
Navigation
3. Select "Start guidance" and press the con-
troller.
Entertainment
In the destination list
This symbol identifies the current destina-
tion.
1. Select the current destination and press the
controller.
Once the route has been calculated, you are
guided by means of arrows or a map view on the
control display.
Mobility
If the route criteria "Exclude motorways",

"Exclude toll roads" or "Exclude ferries"
are selected, calculating the route may take
much longer.<
Route guidance can also be started from the
arrow or map view:
Reference
151
2. Select "Stop guidance" and press the con- The arrow view is displayed.
Route guidance
troller.
1 Switching spoken instructions on/off

If you did not reach your destination before the 2 Calling up traffic information* manually
end of your last journey, the following query will
3 Selecting route criteria
appear at the start of the next journey:
"Continue guidance?". 4 Starting/ending route guidance
Route guidance starts automatically after a 5 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
short while. 6 Distance to the next change of direction
To start route guidance immediately: 7 Car's position
Select "Yes" and press the controller. 8 Direction of travel
> Outline of an arrow:
Route guidance on the calculated route
Displaying the route
> Solid arrow:
Various modes are available for displaying the Arrow points to the calculated route as
course of the route during route guidance. the crow flies if the car is in an area not
From another menu, you can switch recorded on the navigation DVD, e.g. in a
directly to the screen last shown, see multi-storey car park.
Comfort menu item selection, page 16.< Depending on your car's equipment version,
the expected time of arrival and the distance to
Displaying arrow view the destination will be displayed in the top or
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- bottom line of the control display.
ler. The arrows will change in appearance prior to a
2. Move the highlighted marker to the fourth change of direction.
"Arrow view" is selected and press the con-
troller.
1 Street name for change of direction

2 Distance to change of direction
3 Change of direction
152
To exit the menu: 5 Changing map view
Select the arrow and press the controller. > "Map north-oriented"
Overview
> "Map, indicating dir. of travel"
Displaying map view
> "Perspective"
You can have the car's position shown on a
map. After starting route guidance, the planned 6 Altering route criteria
route is shown on the map. 7 Calling up traffic information* manually
1. Select "Navigation" and press the control- 8 Arrow to destination as the crow flies
ler. The expected time of arrival and the distance to
Controls
2. Move the highlighted marker to the fourth the destination will be displayed in the bottom
field from the top. Turn the controller until line of the control display.
the desired map view is selected: To exit the menu:
> "Map north-oriented" Select the arrow and press the controller.
> "Map, indicating dir. of travel" If the scale is smaller than 500 km or 250 miles,
> "Perspective" you can choose whether to align the map point-
Driving hints
ing towards north, in the direction of travel, or in
perspective. At scales from 500 km or
250 miles upward, the map is always displayed
pointing towards north.
Changing map view
Select the corresponding symbol and press the
Navigation
controller.
The next map view is displayed.
Changing the scale
Turn the controller to alter the scale.
Entertainment
Displaying streets and towns/cities
along the route
You can have the streets and towns/cities along
the route displayed during route guidance.
The distances to be covered along each section
of the route are likewise displayed.
1 Switching spoken instructions on/off 1. Select "Navigation" and press the control-
2 Starting/ending guidance ler.
3 Selecting the destination via map 2. Move the highlighted marker to the third
Mobility

4 Displaying the menu in which the informa-
tion last selected can be displayed/hidden,
see Selecting the destination via Informa-
tion, page 144
Reference
153
"Route list" is selected and press the con- 3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
Route guidance
troller. selected and press the controller.
Congestion messages and direction arrows are 4. Turn the controller until "Language / Units"
also displayed. is selected and press the controller.
To exit the menu: 5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker
Select the arrow and press the controller. to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Languages" is selected and press the
controller.
Route guidance by spoken
instructions
Switching spoken instructions on/off
6. Select "Voice output of nav. system" and

During route guidance, spoken instructions can

be switched on or off in the arrow view or the
map view:
To switch off the spoken instructions at any
time:
The start menu is called up. Spoken instructions are switched on.
Repeating and cancelling spoken
instructions
You can also make the following adjustments
with the programmable buttons on the steering
wheel, see page 49:
154
> To have a voice message repeated: "New route for" is selected and press the
Press the button. controller.
Overview
> Switching spoken instructions on/off:
Press and hold down the button.
Adjusting the volume of the spoken

instructions
The volume can be adjusted only while a spo-
ken instruction is being issued.
Controls
1. Have the last spoken instruction repeated if
desired.
2. Turn the knob during the spoken instruction 3. Turn the controller to enter the desired
until the desired volume is obtained. value, then press the controller.
The route is recalculated.
To exit the menu without altering the route:
Driving hints
Traffic information*
At any time you can have traffic information dis-
played from radio stations that broadcast traffic
situation information: Traffic Message Channel,
This volume is independent of the volume of the
Navigation
TMC. This traffic information is constantly
audio and video sources. updated with the aid of measurements from
The setting is saved for the remote control cur- traffic control centres and information from
rently in use. congestion detectors.
The traffic information relevant to the route you
are following is displayed automatically during
Changing the route route guidance. It can also be called up manu-
Entertainment
ally via iDrive.
You can also instruct the navigation system to
The traffic information is displayed in the map
deviate from sections of the route during route
view.
guidance. You do this by specifying after how
If BMW Assist is enabled, you can also call up
many kilometres or miles of the original route
traffic information from Traffic Info Plus. See
you wish to return to it.
separate Operating Instructions.
ler. Switching traffic information reception
2. Move the highlighted marker to the third on/off
Mobility

Reference
155
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is 3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
Route guidance
selected and press the controller. selected and press the controller.
4. Turn the controller until "Traffic information 4. Turn the controller until "Traffic information
settings" is selected and press the control- settings" is selected and press the control-
ler. ler.
5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker 5. If necessary, move the highlighted marker
to the uppermost field. Turn the controller to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
until "Traffic information" is selected and until "Traffic information" is selected and
press the controller. press the controller.
6. Select a TMC station and press the control-
ler.
"AUTO": automatic selection of the TMC
station with the strongest received signal.
6. Select "TMC" and press the controller.

Traffic information can be received and dis-
played.
Selecting TMC stations

156
Calling up traffic information manually Displaying detailed traffic information
Select a traffic information item from the list and
Overview
During route guidance press the controller.
During route guidance, traffic information can
be switched on or off in the arrow view or the
map view:
If the symbol appears outlined in red, traffic
information is available for the planned route.
Controls
To exit the menu:
Driving hints
Traffic information symbols
Traffic event at map scale larger than
10 km or 5 miles, arrow points in
During route guidance, traffic information along affected direction of travel
the planned route will be marked by means of a
A number of traffic situations are
triangle with a red border.
pending. Enlarge the scale to view
The control display will show the traffic informa- each of these individually
tion on the planned route first, sorted by dis-
Navigation
tance from the vehicle's current position. Traffic light failure
While route guidance is switched off Roadworks

Unspecified traffic obstruction
Entertainment
"Navigation".
Transport of hazardous load
3. Select "Traffic information" and press the
controller. Oncoming vehicle
Height restriction
No parking
Fog
Mobility
Intense rainfall
Slippery road
The control display will show the traffic informa-
tion on the planned route first, sorted by dis-
tance from the vehicle's current position. Cross winds
Reference
157
Outside of the planned route
Route guidance
Smog
> Map scale up to 10 km or 5 miles:
Symbol with grey border, together with the
Road closed
traffic obstruction symbol
Risk of hold-ups > Map scale from 20 km or 10 miles:
Symbols with a grey edge
Stop-and-go traffic
Traffic information during route
Congestion guidance
The system may respond differently depending
Icy roads on whether "Dynamic route", see page 149, is
selected.
Uneven surface
Displaying traffic obstructions
Accident If the navigation system receives information on
a traffic obstruction and "Dynamic route" is not
Narrow road selected, within approx. 100 km, approx.
50 miles, of the obstruction you are provided
Delay with specific information such as the length of
the obstruction.
Traffic check The last possible turning to leave the route is
displayed to you shortly before you reach it.
Representation of traffic information in

the map view
The traffic information symbols are shown in
the map view up to a scale of 200 km or
100 miles.
At scales of up to 10 km or 5 miles, additional
information is displayed. The length, direction
and severity of traffic congestion are shown by
arrows along the route, e.g.:
Select "Plan detour" and press the controller.
Slow-moving traffic The navigation system calculates a new route
to avoid the traffic jam.
Stop-and-go traffic This information is still displayed if you have
called up another application on the control dis-
Congestion play.
Traffic event in both directions Not displaying traffic obstructions

If "Dynamic route" is selected, the route is auto-
matically modified if there are traffic obstruc-
Along the planned route
tions. The system does not alert you to traffic
Symbol with red border enclosing the traffic obstructions on the original route.
obstruction symbol. Depending on the type of road and the nature
and length of the traffic congestion, the route
158
can also be calculated such that it cuts across
the traffic congestion.
Overview
Displaying the car's position*
You can have the car's position displayed even
with route guidance switched off.
ler.
Controls
2. Move the highlighted marker to the fourth
"Vehicle position" is selected and press the
controller.
Driving hints
Navigation
The current position of your BMW is displayed.
Entertainment
If the navigation system is unable to identify a

name for your present position, the degrees
longitude and latitude are displayed.
To exit the menu:
Mobility
You can also have the car's position shown on a

map, see page 153.
Reference
159
What to do if ...
What to do if ...
What to do if ... > directions cease to be given immediately

> a navigation DVD has been inserted but a before junctions during route guidance?
request to insert the DVD is displayed on You are driving in an area for which full dig-
the control display? ital information is not yet available on the
The navigation DVD may not be the correct navigation DVD. Instead of an arrow indicat-
DVD for the navigation system. Check the ing a turn, you will see an arrow which indi-
DVD's label. cates the general direction of your planned
route. Or you have deviated from the pro-
> you call up your car's current position, but
posed route and the system requires a few
the display is not accurate?
seconds to calculate a new route.
You are in a poor-reception area or in an
area not covered by the navigation DVD, or > the navigation system does not respond to
the system is currently calculating your your inputs?
position. Reception will normally be possi- If the battery has been disconnected, up to
ble outdoors. 10 minutes may elapse before the system is
fully functional again.
> a destination is not transferred to the route
guidance system?
The data for the destination is not available
on the navigation DVD currently in use.
Choose a destination as close as possible
to the original one.
> a destination without a street is not trans-
ferred to the route guidance system?
No city centre can be determined on the
navigation DVD for the town/city specified.
Enter any street, or a specific destination
such as the station, for the town or city in
question, then start route guidance.
> you wish to input a destination, but the cor-
rect letter of the alphabet cannot be
selected?
The data for the destination is not available
on the navigation DVD currently in use. In
this case the system will not let you choose
the letters of an address it cannot recog-
nise. Choose a destination as close as pos-
sible to the original one.
160
161
Reference Mobility Entertainment Navigation Driving hints Controls Overview
Entertainment
This chapter tells you how to operate the radio,
CD and TV and adjust the tone settings for
these systems.

On/off and settings
On/off and settings
The following audio and video sources share 4 Station/track search

the same controls and adjustment features: > Changing radio stations.
> Radio > Selecting tracks for CD player and CD
> CD player changer.
> CD changer*
Specification with two disc drives
> Television, TV*
Controls
The audio and video sources can be operated
via:
> Buttons next to CD player
> iDrive
> Buttons on the steering wheel, see page 9
1 Sound output for entertainment systems
> Favourites/programmable memory but-
on/off, volume
tons, see page 19
> Press: to switch on/off.
Buttons on CD player When switched on, the radio station last
tuned or the CD track last played is
Specification with one disc drive called up.
> Turn: to adjust the volume.
2 Drive for audio CD
3 CD eject
4 Station/track search
> Changing radio stations.
> Selecting tracks for CD player and CD
changer.
> Changing TV channels.
1 Audio output for entertainment systems on/ 5 Drive for navigation DVD
off, volume
> Press: to switch on/off.
When switched on, the radio station last
tuned or the CD track last played is
called up.
> Turn: to adjust the volume.
2 CD eject
3 Drive for audio CD
164
Operation via iDrive 20 minutes after the ignition has been switched
iDrive, for principle see page 14. off.
Overview
All you have to do is switch sound output back
on.
2. Move the controller to the rear to call up
"Entertainment". Adjusting the volume
Turn knob 1 on the CD player until the desired
volume is obtained.
Controls
You can also adjust the volume with buttons on
the steering wheel, see page 9.
With the ignition key in radio readiness position
or higher, the setting is saved for the remote
control currently in use.
Driving hints
Adjusting the volume of traffic reports*
There is a choice of:
Turn knob 1 during a traffic report until the
> "FM" and "AM": radio reception desired volume is obtained.
> "CD": CD player or changer This volume is retained for subsequent traffic
> "Audio AUX": AUX-In connection, USB reports. If other audio or video sources are set
audio interface louder than the traffic reports, the volume of a
> "TV": TV reception report is increased correspondingly.
Navigation
> "Set": depending on the audio source in
question, further settings can be made, e.g.
for the radio: switch traffic reports* on/off, Tone settings
update stations with the strongest received You can alter various tone settings, e.g. treble
signal, store stations, tone control, sample and bass or the speed-dependent volume
stations. increase.
The tone settings are applied to all audio
Entertainment
From another menu, you can switch
directly to the screen last shown, see sources.
Comfort menu item selection, page 16.< With the ignition key in radio readiness position
With the ignition key in radio readiness position or higher, the settings are saved for the remote
or higher, the selected audio source is saved for control currently in use.
the remote control currently in use.
Altering tone settings
Switching on/off The start menu is called up.
To switch the sound output for entertainment 2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
Mobility
systems on/off: 3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is

Press button 1 on the CD player. selected and press the controller.
This symbol on the control display indi-
cates that the sound output has been switched
off.
In vehicles equipped with one CD drive, audio
Reference
output remains available for approximately
165
4. Select "Tone" or "Tone / volumes" and Balance and fader
On/off and settings
press the controller. You can adjust volume distribution in the same
way as "Treble / Bass".
> "Balance": left/right volume distribution
> "Fader": front/rear volume distribution
Speed-dependent volume control

The speed-dependent volume control auto-
matically boosts the volume as the car's speed
increases. You can select various stages for the
increase in volume.
The tone settings can also be selected if you Specification with two disc drives:
have called up "Entertainment" in the start
1. Select "Speed dependent volume" and
menu:
Select "Set" and then "Tone", and press the
controller.
Treble and bass

1. Select "Treble / Bass" and press the con-
troller.
2. Turn the controller:

The setting is adopted; you can now switch
to another field.
2. Move the controller to the left or right to

select "Treble" or "Bass".

is obtained.
166
Professional hifi system* 2. Move the controller to the left or right to
You can choose between stereo and multichan- select the desired frequency range.
Overview
nel playback, surround sound.
1. Select "Surround Settings" and press the
controller.
Controls
is obtained.
Resetting the tone settings

2. Select "Stereo" or "Surround".
Driving hints
You can reset all tone settings to the default
setting.
4. Select "Tone" and press the controller.
Navigation
3. Press the controller. until "Reset" is selected and press the con-
The surround sound effect is switched on. troller.
Equaliser*
Entertainment
You can adjust individual audio frequency
ranges.
1. Select "Equaliser" and press the controller.
6. Specification with two disc drives:

Select "Yes" and press the controller.
Mobility
Reference
167
Radio
Radio
Your radio is designed to receive the following Stations are shown on the control display
stations: according to a variety of selection criteria, e.g.
> FM: stations on the VHF waveband "All stations".
> AM: stations on the LW*, MW and SW* If "Autostore" does not show a station in the AM
wavebands waveband or if the displayed stations are no
longer receivable, update the stations with the
> DAB: digitally transmitted stations*, see
strongest received signal, see page 169.
page 174
Changing stations
Listening to the radio
Turn the controller.
Press the knob if sound output is switched off. Buttons on CD player

iDrive, for principle see page 14. Press the button for the corresponding
direction.
The next station displayed will be called up.
You can also change the stations with the but-
2. Move the controller to the rear to call up tons on the steering wheel, see page 9.
"Entertainment".
3. If necessary, move the highlighted marker Changing selection criteria
to the uppermost field. Select "FM" or In addition to the stations currently displayed,
"AM". you can have stations for a different selection
criterion displayed.
You can choose between the following selec-
tion criteria:
> "All stations":
Stations that can currently be received on
the "FM" waveband.
> "Autostore":
The stations with the strongest received
signals in the "AM" waveband.
4. Press the controller. > "Memorised stations":
Stations that you have previously stored,
see page 170.
168
> "Manual frequency selection": Buttons on CD player
To select the stations that can be received To sample stations, press and hold down
Overview
in addition to those displayed the button for the corresponding
To change the selection criterion: direction.
1. Move the highlighted marker to the second To stop Scan, press the button again.
field from the top.
2. Choose the selection criterion and press Selecting frequency manually
the controller. In "Manual frequency selection" you can select
stations that can be received in addition to
Controls
those displayed.
1. Select "FM" or "AM" and press the control-
ler.
field from the top.
3. Select "Manual frequency selection" and
Driving hints
Sampling stations, Scan

The stations on the current waveband are auto-
matically sampled in succession.
ler.
Navigation
"Set" is selected.
4. Turn the controller to select a particular fre-
3. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
quency.
Entertainment
Updating station with best reception
signal
If on a longer journey you move out of the
reception range of the stations originally
received, you can update the list of stations
received with the strongest signals in the AM
waveband.
1. Select "AM" and press the controller.
The stations are sampled. 2. Move the highlighted marker to the second
To stop sampling: field from the top.
Mobility

Station sampling is interrupted and the
selected station is retained.
Reference
169
3. Select "Autostore" and press the controller. 3. Select the desired frequency or station.
Radio
"Set" is selected. "Set" is selected.
4. Press the controller. 4. Press the controller.

Further menu items are displayed. Further menu items are displayed.
5. Select "Autostore" and press the controller. 5. Select "Save" and press the controller.
The display of stations with the best reception "Memorised stations" is displayed.
is updated. The frequencies of the stations are 6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
displayed. ory location is selected.
The station is now memorised.
Memorising stations
Via iDrive
ler.
the desired selection criterion is selected
The stations for the last selection criterion are

displayed again after a short time.
With the ignition key in radio readiness position
or higher, the stations are saved for the remote
control currently in use.
170
Via favourites/programmable memory > Where reception conditions are good, the
buttons names of stations are displayed on the con-
Overview
You can also store a station under the favour- trol display. Where reception is poor or in
ites/programmable memory buttons, see also the event of interference, it may take some
page 19. time before the station names will appear in
the display.
1. Select the station.
2. Press the desired button ... for Switching RDS on/off*
longer.
1. Select "FM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
Controls
Changing memory location
1. Select "Memorised stations" and press the
controller.
3. Select "RDS" and press the controller.
2. Select the desired station.
"Set" is selected.
Driving hints
4. Select "Save" and press the controller.
RDS is switched on.
Navigation
rently in use.
5. Turn the controller until the desired mem- Sorting stations

ory location is selected.
automatically*
Entertainment
The number of the memory location is dis-
played next to the name or frequency of the For the selection criterion "All stations", you
station. can program whether the most frequently used
6. Press the controller. stations are displayed first.
Radio Data System RDS

Additional information is broadcast via RDS on
Mobility
the VHF/FM waveband. RDS stations therefore

offer the following features:
> Where a radio station is broadcast on sev-
eral frequencies, the set automatically
switches to whichever frequency offers the
best reception.
Reference
171
1. Select "All stations" and press the control- Switching traffic reports on/off
Radio
ler. iDrive, for principle see page 14.

"Set" is selected.
2. Select "Favourites" and press the control- to the uppermost field. Select "FM" or
ler. "AM" and press the controller.
"Set" is selected.
3. Select "TP" and press the controller.
The most frequently used stations are dis-

played first.
Traffic reports*
Traffic reports are on.
You can also receive traffic reports while you
Adjusting volume of traffic reports, see
are listening to a CD or watching a TV pro-
page 165.
gramme. For this, the TP function, Traffic Pro-
gramme, must be switched on.
Selecting stations for traffic reports
The radio receives traffic reports even if you are
listening to a station that does not broadcast 1. Press the button.
traffic reports. A second station that broadcasts The start menu is called up.
traffic reports can be received in the back- 2. Press the controller to call up the menu.
ground. 3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is
The following is displayed on the control dis- selected and press the controller.
play, see page 18: 4. Turn the controller until "Traffic information
> "TP": settings" is selected and press the control-
Traffic information is switched on. ler.
> "T":
Traffic information is off but traffic reports
can be received.
> No display:
No traffic reports can be received.
The navigation system's spoken instructions
are not interrupted by traffic reports.
172
Overview
until "TP" is selected and press the control-
ler.
Controls
6. Select a station broadcasting traffic reports
Driving hints
"TP AUTO": automatic selection of the traf-
fic report station with the strongest
received signal.
Navigation
Traffic reports are on.
If you choose a traffic report station, broadcast-
Entertainment
ing of traffic reports is automatically switched
on.
Mobility
Reference
173
Digital radio DAB*
Digital radio DAB
The digital radio provides you with additional

stations that are transmitted with a higher
sound-quality.
Several stations are combined to form an
ensemble. Up to 15 stations are transmitted
within an ensemble.
Each station can transmit additional information
such as weather reports, for example, or the
name of the artist performing the current music
track. 1 Ensembles
Some stations feature additional programmes; 2 Stations of the selected ensemble
sports stations can transmit different sports
events simultaneously, for instance. You then Changing stations
have the option of choosing a particular sports
1. If necessary, move the controller to the left
event.
to select an ensemble. Select an ensemble
A digital radio network must be available in and press the controller.
order to receive digital stations.
Listening to digital radio

2. Move the controller backwards to call up
"Entertainment".
3. Select "DAB" and press the controller. 2. Turn the controller.
You will hear the station last selected. To change a station via buttons on the CD
player:
The station as well as different ensembles, if
applicable, appear on the control display. Press the button next to the CD player
or the button on the steering wheel in the corre-
sponding direction.
The next station displayed will be called up.
174
Changing selection criteria 4. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
In addition to the stations currently displayed,
Overview
you can display stations for a different selection
criterion.
> "Memorised stations"
Up to 12 stations that have been previously
saved.
Memorising stations, see page 176.
> "Autostore"
Controls
Up to 12 automatically saved ensembles,
see Updating receivable stations. Up to 15 The display of receivable stations is updated.
stations are displayed for each ensemble. Up to 12 ensembles can be shown.
> "Manual frequency selection" If "No Signal" appears on the left-hand side of
An ensemble and its stations are displayed. the control display, no station can currently be
1. Move the highlighted marker to the second received.
Driving hints
field from the top. To update the stations when reception is possi-
2. Turn the controller until the desired selec- ble again:
tion criterion is selected and press the con-
troller.
Navigation
Press the controller.
Entertainment
Updating receivable stations Displaying additional information
Once you leave the transmission range of the Depending on a station's offer, additional infor-
stations originally received, you can update the mation can be displayed, such as weather
display of receivable stations. reports or the name of the artist for the current
music track.
1. Select "DAB" and press the controller.
1. Select a station and press the controller.
2. Select "Autostore" and press the controller.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
Mobility
Reference
175
The information is shown. Manual station selection
Digital radio DAB
1. Select "DAB" and press the controller.

2. Select "Manual frequency selection" and

rently in use.
Sampling stations, Scan

3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
All of the stations of the current ensemble are to select an ensemble:
sampled in succession. Select "Next" or "Previous" and press the
Select "Manual frequency selection" to sample controller.
the stations of all ensembles.
4. Select the station.
The stations are sampled. Memorising stations
To stop sampling: You can save 12 stations.
1. Press the controller again. 1. Select "DAB" and press the controller.
2. Select "Scan" and press the controller. 2. Select "Autostore" or "Manual frequency
Sampling is interrupted and the selected sta- selection" and press the controller.
tion is retained. 3. If necessary, move the controller to the left
Buttons on CD player: to select an ensemble.
To start, hold the button on the CD 4. Select the desired station and press the
player or the button on the steering wheel controller.
pressed in the corresponding direction. 5. Select "Save" and press the controller.
To stop sampling, press the button again.
"Memorised stations" is displayed.

6. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
176
The station is now memorised. 4. Select "Tone" and press the controller.
The stations are saved for the remote control
Overview
currently in use.
Changing memory location

1. Select "Memorised stations" and press the
controller.
2. Select the desired station and press the
controller.
Controls
3. Select "Save" and press the controller.
until "DAB" is selected and press the con-
troller.
Driving hints
4. Turn the controller until the desired mem-
Navigation
6. Select "Frequency selection" and press the
controller.
7. To select a frequency band:
Selecting a frequency band*
> "Band III + L" for regional and national
Some digital stations are transmitted regionally stations
while others are transmitted nationally.
Entertainment
> "Band L" for regional stations
For more information on frequency bands, con-
tact BMW Service. > "Band III" for national stations
1. Press the button. 8. Press the controller.
The start menu is called up. The setting is saved for the remote control cur-
2. Press the controller to call up the menu. rently in use.
Automatic switchover
You can select whether the set switches over
Mobility
automatically to the station's analogue fre-

quency if digital reception is not possible.
Reference
177
3. Turn the controller until "Settings" is Listening to additional
Digital radio DAB

programmes
4. Select "Tone" and press the controller.
* This symbol is shown if a selected station
offers additional programmes. Sports stations,
for example, may broadcast different sports
events at the same time. You then have the
option of choosing a particular sports event.
2. Select the "xyz" additional program and

until "DAB" is selected and press the con-
troller.
You will hear the selected programme.

The name of the programme appears in the sta-
tus line.
Once the programme is over, the radio switches
back to the selected station.
6. Select "Automatic FM changeover" and

Reception changes over automatically to
the analogue frequency.
Once the digital frequency is received again,
the radio switches back to digital reception.
rently in use.
If no analogue frequency is available for a digital
station, the reception is switched off.
178
CD player and CD changer*
Overview
Listening to CDs 3. If necessary, move the highlighted marker
to the uppermost field. Select "CD" and
Controls
Specification with two disc drives:
Driving hints
The upper disc drive is intended for audio CDs.
4. If necessary, move the highlight marker to
the second field from the top. On cars with a
Compressed audio files
CD changer, select "CD" and press the
CDs with compressed audio files known as controller to start the CD player.
MP3s can be played by the CD player or CD
changer.
Starting CD player
Navigation
Inserting a CD
Insert the CD into the drive with the label side
uppermost.
The CD is pulled in automatically. The CD starts
to play automatically if sound output is switched
Entertainment
on. When playing CDs with compressed audio The CD starts to play if sound output is
files, it can take the CD player approx. 1 minute switched on.
to read in the data, depending on the directory
structure. Via favourites/programmable memory
buttons
Via iDrive You can also memorise the CD player function
To start to play a CD if it is already in the drive: on the favourites/programmable memory but-
iDrive, for principle see page 14. tons in order to start the CD player, see
page 19.
Mobility
Starting CD changer
Loading CD changer, see page 183.
"Entertainment".
Reference
179
Via iDrive Via iDrive
CD player and CD changer

"Entertainment".
to the uppermost field. Select "CD" and
to the second field from the top. Select the
desired CD and press the controller. Turn the controller to select a track.

1. Select a directory, if appropriate, and press
the controller.
At the end of the last track, the next CD is

selected and played.
Via favourites/programmable memory

buttons 2. Select a track and press the controller.
You can also memorise a CD compartment in
the CD changer on the favourites/programma-
ble memory buttons in order to start the CD
changer, see page 19.
Selecting a track
Buttons on CD player
Press the button for the appropriate
To change the directory:
direction repeatedly until the desired track is
Select a directory and press the controller.
reached.
The track is displayed on the control display.
You can also change the tracks with the buttons
on the steering wheel, see page 9.
180
To exit the menu: 2. Select "Scan" and press the controller.
Overview
In vehicles equipped with two CD drives, you
can store a particular track on the favourites/
programmable memory buttons, see page 19.
Displaying information on the track

With compressed audio files, you can have any
saved information about the current track dis-
played, e.g. the name of the artist.
Controls
1. Press the controller. To stop sampling:
2. Select "Details" and press the controller. 1. Press the controller.
Track sampling is interrupted and the selected
Driving hints
track is retained.

1. Select current track and press the control-
ler.
2. Select the desired menu item:
> To sample all the tracks in the current
The information is shown for the current track.
directory, select "Scan directory" and
Navigation
The setting is saved for the remote control cur- press the controller.
rently in use.
> To sample all the tracks on the CD,
select "Scan all" and press the control-
ler.
Sampling tracks, Scan
All tracks on the current CD are automatically
Entertainment
sampled once in succession.
To stop sampling:
Mobility
2. Select "Scan directory" or "Scan all" and

Sampling is interrupted and the selected track
is retained.
Reference
181
Repeating tracks > To repeat all the tracks in the current
directory, select "Repeat directory" and

1. Select "Set" and press the controller. press the controller.
To stop the repeat function:

2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller.
2. Select "Repeat track" or "Repeat directory"
Random play
The tracks on the current CD are played once
each in random order.
The current track on the CD is repeated. Further menu items are displayed.
To stop the repeat function: 2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
1. Press the controller again. To stop random play:
2. Select "Repeat" and press the controller. 1. Press the controller.

2. Select "Random" and press the controller.
1. Select current track and press the control- Compressed audio files
ler. 1. Select current track and press the control-
2. Select the desired menu item: ler.
> To repeat the chosen track, select 2. Select the desired menu item:
"Repeat track" and press the controller. > To play the tracks in the current direc-
tory in random order, select "Random
directory" and press the controller.
> To play all the tracks on the CD in ran-
dom order, select "Random all" and
To stop random play:
1. Press controller.
2. Select "Random directory" or "Random all"
182
Fast forward/reverse 3. When the LEDs on the CD slot 1 are flash-
ing, insert the CD.
Overview
Buttons on CD player:
Do not insert the CD until the LEDs on the
Press and hold the button for the appro- CD slot 1 are flashing, otherwise the CD
priate direction. or the CD changer could be damaged.<
The tracks can be heard, but reproduction is
distorted. Loading vacant CD compartments
1. Press and hold down the button.
CD changer The LEDs on the vacant CD compartments
Controls
flash.
2. Insert the CDs individually.
Do not insert the CD until the LEDs on the
CD slot 1 are flashing, otherwise the CD
or the CD changer could be damaged.<
The CDs are automatically loaded in the individ-
Driving hints
ual compartments.
Removing CDs from the CD changer

The BMW CD changer for six CDs is installed in
the glove box. 2. Press the button ... to select the
CD compartment.
The CD is ejected a short way from the
Controls and displays
CD changer.
Navigation
3. Take out the CD.
Removing all CDs from the CD changer

The CDs are ejected in succession from the
Entertainment
CD changer.
2. Take out the CDs.
1 LEDs on the CD slot

These flash if a CD can be inserted. Notes
2 Buttons for CD compartments BMW CD/DVD players and changers are
LED lights up if a CD compartment is occu- officially designated Class 1 laser prod-
pied. ucts. Never use them if the cover is damaged,
otherwise there is a risk of serious eye injuries.
Loading the CD changer Do not use CDs/DVDs with adhesive labels that
Mobility
1. Press the button. have been affixed subsequently, as these may

The LED on the first vacant compartment peel off while in the drive as a result of the tem-
flashes. peratures to which these media are exposed
during playing, and could damage the system
2. Select a different CD compartment if nec-
irreparably.
essary:
Use only round CDs/DVDs with a standard
Reference
Press the button ... .

diameter of 12 cm, approx. 5 in, and do not use
183
CDs/DVDs in conjunction with adapters, e.g. General care
CD singles, otherwise the CDs or the adapter Whenever necessary, use a commercially avail-
could jam and be impossible to eject. able cleaning cloth to wipe the reflective signal
Do not use combined CD/DVDs, e.g. DVDPlus, side of CDs/DVDs in straight motions from the
otherwise the CD/DVD could jam and be impos- centre outwards. For more information on how
sible to eject.< to take care of CDs/DVDs, see booklet Looking
after your car.
General malfunctions
BMW CD/DVD players and changers have been
optimised for operation in cars. In some
instances, they may be more sensitive to faulty
CDs/DVDs than stationary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been properly inserted.
Humidity
A high level of humidity may cause the laser
beam focusing lens to fog over and temporarily
prevent the CD/DVD being played.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs

Should malfunctions occur only with individual
CDs/DVDs, one of the following factors may be
the cause.
Self-recorded CDs/DVDs
With self-recorded CDs/DVDs, possible causes
for output malfunctions are, e.g., an inconsist-
ent data-creation or burning process, or low
quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
Only write on the upper side of CDs/DVDs using
a special marker pen.
Avoiding damage
Avoid leaving fingerprints and protect against
dust, scratches and moisture.
Store CDs/DVDs in a case.
Do not expose CDs/DVDs to temperatures
above 506/122 7, high levels of humidity or
direct sunlight.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection

CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
manufacturer. This could result in CDs/DVDs
being impossible to play, or only playable with
restrictions.
184
DVD changer*
Overview
Installed position Loading vacant DVD compartments
The LEDs on the vacant DVD compart-
ments flash.
2. Insert the DVDs individually.
Do not insert the DVD until the LEDs on
Controls
the DVD slot 1 are flashing, otherwise the
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.<
The DVDs are automatically loaded in the indi-
vidual compartments.
The BMW DVD changer for six DVDs is installed
Driving hints
in the glove box.
Removing DVDs from the DVD changer
1. Press the button .
Controls and displays 2. Press the button ... to select the
DVD compartment.
The DVD is ejected a short way out of the
DVD changer.
3. Remove the DVD.
If the DVD is not removed, it is retracted
Navigation
again after about 10 seconds<
Removing all DVDs from the DVD

changer
1 LEDs on the DVD slot 1. Press and hold down the button.
These flash if a DVD can be inserted. The DVDs are ejected in succession from
Entertainment
2 Buttons for DVD compartments the DVD changer.
LED lights up if a DVD compartment is 2. Remove the DVDs individually.
occupied.
Loading the DVD changer DVD country codes

Your DVD changer will only play DVDs with the
The LED on the first vacant compartment
coding of your home region, e.g. Europe = 2.
flashes.
Details of which country code your DVD sup-
2. Select a different vacant DVD compartment ports are supplied with every DVD. This code
Mobility
if necessary: cannot be changed. Summary of the six coding

Press the button ... . zones:
3. When the LEDs on the DVD slot 1 are flash-
ing, insert the DVD. Code Region
Do not insert the DVD until the LEDs on 1 USA, Canada

the DVD slot 1 are flashing, otherwise the 2 Japan, Europe, Middle East,
Reference
DVD or the DVD changer could be damaged.< South Africa
185
4. If necessary, move to the second field from
DVD changer
Code Region
the top, select the desired DVD and press
3 South-East Asia
the controller.
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5 North-West Asia, North Africa
6 China
DVDs with the code 0 can be played on all

players.<
Playing a DVD Reading in the contents of the DVD may take

Depending on your car's equipment, you can some time. The DVD is then played, possibly
play both the audio and video tracks of DVDs, or with the DVD-specific menu displayed.
only the audio track.
> Vehicles with two drives: for playing audio DVD control options
and video tracks Via the DVD control options, you can select
> Vehicles with a single drive: for playing titles and chapter, call up the DVD-specific
audio tracks, see page 189 menu and operate functions, e.g. language, fast
forward and reverse, and freeze images.
A DVD may deactivate certain DVD control
options temporarily, or possibly even for the
Playing audio and video entire duration of the DVD. It will then not be
tracks possible to select those DVD control options. If
For your safety, the TV picture on the control this happens, try to make selections via the
display is only shown at a speed of up to approx. DVD-specific menu.
3 km/h, approx. 2 mph. During playback:
1. Press the button. 1. Press the controller.
The start menu is called up. 2. Select "DVD player toolbar" if necessary
2. Move the controller backwards to call up and press the controller
"Entertainment". The DVD control options are displayed.
to the uppermost field. Select "DVD" and
186
The DVD control options disappear again after 1. Press the controller during playback to call
a short while if you have not selected a function. up the DVD control options.
Overview
2. Select the symbol and press as
Function
often as necessary until the desired chapter
Closing DVD control options is reached.
"SET" Settings for DVD replay Or:
Press the button on the left or right as
Starting replay often as necessary until the desired chapter is
reached.
Stopping replay
Controls
Switching stills on Making settings for DVD
Chapter skip On some DVDs, it is only possible to
Fast forward/reverse select the language, subtitles, camera
angle or title via the DVD-specific menu.
"Menu" Calling up DVD-specific menu
Note the available options in the information on
Driving hints
your DVD.<
Fast forward/reverse
Tone settings
Fast forward/reverse via DVD control
On DVDs with multichannel sound - Surround -
options
for optimum sound reproduction select a sound
1. Press the controller during playback to call track with multichannel sound and set the tone
up the DVD control options. settings to Surround, see Selecting language,
2. Select the symbol and press the page 188 and Professional hifi system*,
Navigation
controller. page 167.
3. To increase the speed of fast forward/
reverse, press the controller several times. Adjusting the brightness and contrast
A distorted DVD picture is visible. 1. Press the controller during reception.
Stopping fast forward/reverse: 2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
Select the symbol and press the controller. 3. Select "Graphics settings" and press the
Entertainment
The DVD begins to play from the selected point. controller.
Fast forward/reverse via controller

1. Turn the controller during playback.
Fast forward/reverse starts.
2. Turn the controller further.
The speed increases.
3. Release the controller.
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted. The
Mobility
current DVD begins to play from the

selected point.
Chapter skip
You can skip to the next or previous chapter
while a DVD is playing.
Reference
187
4. Select "Brightness" or "Contrast" and Selecting language
DVD changer
press the controller. 1. Press the controller during reception.

2. Select "SET" and press the controller.
3. Select "Language" and press the controller.
4. Select the language or sound track and

is obtained.
Resetting:
Select "Reset" and press the controller.
The language and sound tracks usually include

an indication of how many channels there are.
5.1 means multichannel.
Selecting subtitles
1. Press the controller during reception.
3. Select "Subtitle" and press the controller.
4. Select the language of the subtitles and
DVD format press the controller.
3. Select "DVD format" and press the control-
ler.
Selecting title
3. Select "Title" and press the controller.
> "Standard"
4. Select the desired title.
> "Zoom": full-screen replay
188
Selecting angle Closing settings menu
Notes or symbols that appear while a film is > Select "Return" and press the controller.
Overview
playing normally refer to a choice of camera
angles. These are usually available only for a
short time. Playing audio tracks
On cars with a single disc drive, you can play the
2. Select "SET" and press the controller. audio track of a DVD even if it is not possible to
3. Select "Angle" and press the controller. watch video tracks in the car.
Controls
"Entertainment".
to the uppermost field. Select "DVD" and
Driving hints
4. If necessary, move to the second field from
the top, select the desired DVD and press
the controller.
Calling up DVD-specific menu
Further functions may be stored on DVDs. For
instance, the viewer can choose from several
alternative plots or call up information on the
film.
Navigation
2. Select "Menu" and press the controller.
Displaying the DVD audio contents
Entertainment
DVDs are usually divided into titles, and the
titles into chapters. The DVD starts to play at
the title that contains the most chapters. The
advantage of this is that the introduction of a
DVD is not played first, for example.
All chapters of the DVD are displayed as a
3. Make the selection in the DVD's own menu.
numerical sequence, i.e. the numbering is not
To do this, move the controller in the appro-
priate direction to select the menu items, the same as on the DVD itself. The DVD's
numbering is displayed in the status line.
then press the controller.
Mobility
4. Select "Confirm selection" and press the

controller.
In the DVD-specific menu, the language,
subtitles, camera angle or title can also be
selected.
Reference
your DVD.<
189
An example: Selecting chapter
DVD changer
Turn the controller to select the chapter.
Chapter 06 in the selection corresponds to

chapter 4 of title 2 on the DVD. If the DVD does not continue to play automati-
cally at the end of a title, select the next chapter
Display in status line Display in chap- with the controller.
ter selection
A maximum of 99 chapters on a DVD are played.
Title 1 Chapter 1 01
Chapter 2 02 Tone settings
Title 2 Chapter 1 03 On DVDs with multichannel sound - Surround -
for optimum sound reproduction select a sound
Chapter 2 04
track with multichannel sound, see Selecting
Chapter 3 05 audio language, and set the tone settings to
Chapter 4 06 Surround, see Professional hifi system*,
page 167.
Title 3 Chapter 1 07
Chapter 2 08 Selecting audio language
If various languages are available on a DVD, you
As the first title is not played automatically, the
can select the language.
display in the chapter selection may start with a
higher number than 01. 1. Select "Set" and press the controller.
Depending on the DVD, the response
when playing DVDs may vary. It is possi- 2. Select "Language / Audio format" and press
ble that DVDs cannot be played or that they the controller.
stop playing prematurely. If this happens, the
next DVD in the DVD changer will usually start
to play.<
The various languages on the DVD are dis-

played.
190
3. Select the desired language and press the DTS
controller. "DTS" and "DTS Digital Surround" are regis-
Overview
tered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Controls
The language and sound tracks usually include
an indication of how many channels there are:
5.1 means multichannel.
Driving hints
Notes
The DVD changer can play the following for-
mats:
> Video DVD
> Video CD
> CD-DA
Navigation
> CD-DTS
> Compressed audio files
MACROVISION
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by U.S. patents
Entertainment
and other intellectual property rights. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be
authorised by Macrovision, and is intended for
home and other limited viewing uses only
unless otherwise authorised by Macrovision.
Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohib-
ited.
Dolby
Manufactured under license from Dolby Labo-
Mobility
ratories.
"Dolby", "Pro Logic", "MLP Lossless" and the
double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Lab-
oratories.
Reference
191
AUX-In connection
AUX-In connection
You can connect an item of external audio Starting sound playback

equipment, e.g. an MP3 player, and play back
music via the car's loudspeakers. You can The audio equipment must be switched on.
adjust the sound via iDrive.
Via iDrive
Connecting 1. Press the button.
Open the cover of the centre armrest. The start menu is called up.
2. Move the controller to the rear to call up
"Entertainment".
until "Audio AUX" is selected and press the
controller.
1 Connection for sound playback:

Jack plug, 3.5 mm or 1/8th inch
To play audio tracks over the car's loudspeaker
system, connect the headset or line-out port of
the external device to the AUX-In connection.
4. Select "AUX IN" and press the controller.

5. Adjust the volume and tone if necessary.

buttons
You can memorise the function "Audio AUX" on
the favourites/programmable memory buttons
in order to start sound playback, see page 19.
192
USB audio interface*
Overview
You can connect audio devices to the USB For sound playback via the car's speakers, con-
audio interface, e.g. an iPod or a USB device nect the USB device to connection 2.
(MP3 player, USB memory stick). You can oper- After connecting up for the first time, the infor-
ate them via iDrive. mation on all tracks (e.g. artist, musical genres)
The most common types of audio files, e.g. and the playlists from the USB device are trans-
MP3, WMA, WAV (PCM) and AAC, as well as ferred to the car. This process may take some
Controls
playlists in M3U format, can be played. time. The duration depends on the USB device
Due to the large number of audio devices on the and the number of tracks.
market, operation of every type of audio device You can select the tracks via the directories and
via the vehicle cannot be assured. filenames during the transfer process.
Ask BMW Service which audio devices are suit- After the transfer process, you can call up the
able. tracks via the information and playlists.
Driving hints
Information from up to four USB devices can be
stored in the car, equivalent to approx.
Connecting 20,000 tracks.
If a fifth USB device is connected up, the infor-
Open the cover of the centre armrest. mation on the tracks for the first USB device is
deleted from the car.
Music tracks with integrated Digital
Rights Management (DRM) cannot be
Navigation
played.<
Starting sound playback

Via iDrive
Entertainment
1 Connection for sound playback: If the audio device has a name, it may likewise
Jack plug 3.5 mm or 1/8 in be displayed.
2 USB interface 1. Press the button.
iPod 2. Move the controller backwards to call up
For sound playback via the car's speakers, con- "Entertainment".
nect the iPod with the connections 1 and 2. 3. If necessary, move the highlighted marker
Use an iPod adapter lead to connect up the to the uppermost field. Turn the controller
iPod.
The menu structure of the iPod is supported by
Mobility
the USB audio interface.
USB device
To connect up, use a flexible adapter lead
in order to protect the USB interface and
your USB device against mechanical damage.<
Reference
193
until "Audio AUX" is selected and press the 1. Make your selection, e.g. "Playlists" or
USB audio interface
controller. "Artists", and press the controller.
4. Select "USB audio" or the name of the 2. Select a track and press the controller.
audio device and press the controller.
Displaying information on the track
You can have any saved information about the
current track displayed, e.g. the name of the
artist.
2. Select "Details" and press the controller.
5. Playing starts with the first track.

buttons
You can memorise the function "USB audio" on
the favourites/programmable memory buttons
in order to start sound playback, see page 19.
The information is shown for the current track.
Selecting a track
You can call up the tracks via the playlists and
information. On USB devices, you can also call
up the tracks via the file register.
194
Repeating tracks Notes
Overview
1. Select current track and press the control- Do not expose the audio device to
ler. extreme ambient conditions, e.g. very
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con- high temperatures, see the operating instruc-
troller. tions for the audio device. Otherwise the audio
device could be damaged and driving safety
during a journey thus be impaired.<
Depending on the configuration of the audio
files, e.g. bitrates higher than 256 KBit/s, fault-
Controls
free playback cannot always be assured.
Notes on connecting up
> The USB audio interface provides the
power for the audio devices that are con-
nected to it, provided the audio device sup-
Driving hints
To stop the repeat function: ports this. You should therefore not con-
1. Press the controller. nect the USB audio device to a power
2. Select "Repeat track" and press the con- socket in the car while it is being operated.
troller. > Do not insert the plug forcibly in the USB
interface.
> Do not connect any devices such as fans or
Random play lamps to the USB audio interface.
> Do not connect up USB hard drives.
Navigation
You can play the tracks in the selected list in
random order, e.g. all tracks by a particular art-
ist.
1. Select current track and press the control-
ler.
Entertainment
Ending random play:
Buttons on steering wheel or on CD player:
Press and hold the button for the appro-
priate direction.
Mobility
Reference
195
TV*
TV
Calling up channel Channels

The TV system is equipped with a digital
receiver*. In areas where both analogue and
digital television is broadcast, both analogue
and digital channels can be received. You can
change between these channels.
Changing the channel

1. Press controller.
The channels are displayed on the left-hand
side.
Press the knob if sound output is switched off.
2. Select the desired channel and press the
Via iDrive controller.
"Entertainment".
3. Select "TV" and press the controller.
The set calls up the channel last selected.
For your own safety, the TV picture is only
on when the vehicle is moving at a speed You can also change the channel by turning the
of less than 3 km/h, approx. 2 mph. controller while the programme is on.
In certain national-market versions, the TV pic- In addition, the channel can be changed with
ture is only visible when the handbrake is buttons on the steering wheel, see page 9.
applied.<
To change to a different audio source: Updating display of receivable
Move the controller forward while a channel is channels
being received. If you have driven out of the transmission range
of the channels you were originally receiving,
you can update the display of receivable chan-
nels.
196
1. Press the controller during reception. until "Video" is selected and press the con-
2. Select "Autostore" and press the controller. troller.
Overview
Controls
The display of channels with the best reception 7. Select "Brightness" or "Contrast" and
is updated. press the controller.
Driving hints
Adjusting the picture*
Adjusting the brightness and contrast
"Entertainment".
Navigation
to the uppermost field. Select "TV" and is obtained.
press the controller to start the programme.
4. Whilst the programme is playing, press the Resetting
controller twice.
5. Select "Graphics settings" and press the
Entertainment
controller.
Select "Reset" and press the controller.

Mobility

Reference
197
Changing the standard
TV
The TV standard is not the same in every coun-

try. However, you can adapt your TV receiver to
accept all common TV standards.
"Entertainment".
to the uppermost field. Select "TV" and
press the controller to start the programme.
4. Whilst the programme is playing, press the
controller twice.
5. Select "Video" and press the controller.
to the second field from the top. Select "TV
standard" and press the controller.
7. Select the country in which you are cur-
rently driving and press the controller.
The display of receivable channels is automati-

cally updated.
198
DVD system at rear*
Overview
You can play CDs and DVDs with audio, video Controls
and picture data in the DVD system at the rear.
External audio and video devices can also be
connected up and played via the DVD system at
the rear.
The sound can be reproduced both via head-
phones and via the car's speakers.
Controls
You can operate the DVD system at the rear via
the buttons on the CD/DVD player or with the
remote control.
Certain functions can only be operated
via the remote control.<
Driving hints
Enabling the DVD system
Enabling the DVD system via iDrive, principle,
see page 14.
Navigation
1 Monitor
2 Infrared interface for headphones
4. Select "Enable rear menu" and press the
controller. 3 CD/DVD player
5. Select "Rear enabled" and press the con- 4 Connection for headphones:
troller. Jack plug, 3.5 mm or 1/8th inch
Entertainment
5 12 V power sockets, see page 119
Folding the monitor in

The monitor should be folded in if the ski bag is
in use or if you are carrying bulky items of lug-
gage, otherwise it could be damaged.
When the monitor is folded in, do not
open the covers in the centre armrest or
rest your arm on the monitor, otherwise the
monitor could be damaged.<
Mobility
The DVD system is enabled.

Reference
199
Connecting up headphones
DVD system at rear
You can connect headphones using a 3.5 mm

or 1/8th inch jack plug or operate them via the
infrared interface.
Ask BMW Service which infrared headphones
are supported by the infrared interface.
When using infrared headphones, take
care not to interrupt the infrared link
between the headphones and the infrared inter-
1. Pivoting the monitor, arrow 1.
face. In other words, do not obstruct the line of
The monitor is switched off.
sight between them in any way, or cover or
2. Folding the monitor in, arrow 2. scratch the infrared interface. Adverse light
The monitor is folded out by the reverse proce- conditions such as bright ambient light may
dure. interfere with reception.<
CD/DVD player Remote control

Controls
1 Menu guidance
1 Press: to switch the DVD system on/off 2 Volume for headphones with jack plug
Turn: volume of headphones on left 3 Track or chapter skip for CD or DVD replay,
2 Ejecting CD, DVD fast forward/reverse
3 Start of track/title, fast reverse 4 Change over between right/left head-

Stop phones
Play, pause, freeze 5 Call up start menu for DVD system
Next track/title, fast forward
4 CD/DVD slot Menu guidance
5 Connection for external device: cinch sock- You can navigate through the menus with the
ets with protective cap knurled wheel 1 and the buttons 1. Principle,
see also iDrive, page 14.
6 Press: to switch the DVD system on/off
Turn: volume of right-hand headphones > Turn knurled wheel 1:
To select a menu item.
> Press buttons 1:
To switch between fields.
> Press the button:
To activate a menu item.
200
Changing the batteries Switching DVD system on/off
Overview
Press the button on the CD/DVD player.
The DVD system comes on automatically when
a CD or DVD is inserted.
Playing a CD/DVD
The data on each CD or DVD determines which
Controls
menu items are used to call up the contents of
1. Press the catch and remove the cover. the CD/DVD:
2. Change the batteries. The battery type and > Video data via "DVD"
installed position are indicated on the base > Audio data via "CD"
of the battery compartment.
> Pictures via "Foto".
3. Close the cover.
Driving hints
Dispose of old batteries only at an author-
ised collecting point or hand them in to
BMW Service.<
Sound reproduction via

speakers
Navigation
As well as via the headphones, you can have the
sound reproduced via the car's speakers.
As soon as a plug is inserted in the AUX-In con- Playing videos from a
nection in the centre console, the DVD sys- CD/DVD
tem's sound reproduction via the car's speak-
ers is interrupted.
Country codes for DVDs
Entertainment
iDrive, for principle see page 14. Your DVD player will only play DVDs with the
1. Press the button. coding of your home region, e.g. Europe = 2.
The start menu is called up. Details of which country code your DVD sup-
2. Move the controller backwards to call up ports are supplied with every DVD.
"Entertainment". Summary of the coding zones:
3. Select "AUX / Rear" and press the control-
ler. Code Region
1 USA, Canada
2 Japan, Europe, Middle East,
Mobility
South Africa
3 South-East Asia
4 Australia, Central and South America,
New Zealand
5 North-West Asia, North Africa
Reference
6 China
201
Starting replay 1. Press the button on the remote con-
DVD system at rear
1. Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the trol while the DVD is playing.
label side uppermost.
The CD/DVD is pulled in automatically.
> The disc usually starts to play automati-
cally after a few seconds.
> If it does not start to play automatically:
Select "DVD".
Press the button.
2. If the DVD control options or the DVD-spe-
cific menu are displayed for a DVD, select
the desired option using the remote control 2. Press the buttons on the remote control
buttons for menu guidance. or turn the knurled wheel to select the
Or: desired function.
Press the button on the CD/DVD player. 3. Press the button.
You can control replay using the buttons on the Function

CD/DVD player or the DVD control.
Closing DVD control options
Video CDs, VCDs, and Super Video CDs,
SVCDs, can be played like DVDs if they "SET" Settings for DVD replay
do not have a separate DVD menu.<
Starting replay
Ejecting CD/DVD
Stopping replay
The DVD is ejected part way out of the drive. Switching freeze image on or off
Chapter skip
DVD control options Fast forward/reverse
Via the DVD control options, you can select "Menu" Calling up DVD-specific menu
titles and chapter, call up the DVD-specific
menu and operate functions such as language, The DVD control options disappear again after
fast forward and reverse, and freeze images. a short while if you have not selected a function.
A DVD may deactivate certain DVD control
Or:
options temporarily, or possibly even for the
entire duration of the DVD. It will then not be Press the button on the remote control
possible to select those DVD control options. If to exit the DVD control options.
this happens, try to make selections via the
DVD-specific menu. Fast forward/reverse
Fast forward/reverse via DVD control

options
1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol while the DVD is playing.
2. Select symbol.
4. Press the button repeatedly to increase
the speed of fast forward/reverse.
202
A distorted DVD picture is visible. Freeze image
Stopping fast forward/reverse: 1. Press the button on the remote con-
Overview
1. Select symbol. trol while the DVD is playing.

Or:
The DVD begins to play from the selected point.
Fast forward/reverse via remote
Controls
control
Press the button until the desired point is
reached.
2. Select symbol.
Or:
1. During replay, turn the knurled wheel.
Driving hints
To continue replay:
Fast forward/reverse starts.
1. Select the or symbol.
2. Turn the knurled wheel further.
The speed increases. 2. Press the button.
3. Press the button on the CD/DVD player. Alternatively, you can also halt and resume
Fast forward/reverse is interrupted. replay with the button on the CD/DVD
player.
The DVD begins to play from the selected point.
Making settings for DVD
Navigation
Chapter skip
1. Press the button during replay.
You can skip to the next or previous chapter
while a DVD is playing.
1. Press the button on the remote con-
trol while the DVD is playing.
2. Select symbol.
Entertainment
3. Press the button as often as necessary
until the desired chapter is reached.
Or:
Press the button on the remote control on
the left or right as often as necessary until the 2. Adjust the settings with the remote control:
desired chapter is reached.
> "Graphics settings":
> "Brightness", "Colour" and "Contrast"
of the screen display.
Mobility
> Further settings can be performed after

switching to the top box.
"Language": system language for DVD
system at rear.
"Display": background brightness of the
monitor.
Reference
203
> "Tone": Calling up DVD-specific menu
DVD system at rear
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance": Further functions may be stored on DVDs. For
adjustable separately for the left and instance, the viewer may be able to choose
right headphones and the infrared head- from several alternative plots or call up informa-
phones. tion on the film.
> "Reset": 1. Press the button on the remote con-
The settings are reset to the standard trol while the DVD is playing.
value. 2. Select "Menu".
> "DVD format": 3. Press the button.
> "Standard" On some DVDs, under "Main menu"
> "Zoom": full-screen replay and "Title" you will find further menus
> "Language": in which you can for instance select musical
Language or sound track for DVD replay. scenes.<
Each time the menu item is selected, the
language moves on one.
> "Subtitle":
Language of subtitles "00 n/a": no subtitles.
> "Title":
To select individual titles on the DVD.
> "Angle":
Camera angle
Notes or symbols that appear while a film is
playing normally refer to a choice of camera To make a selection:
angles. These are usually available only for 1. Select symbol.
a short time.
2. Press the button until the desired func-
> "Menu": tion is selected.
Calling up DVD-specific menu.
3. Select the arrow.
> "Return":
To exit a menu, or:
Press the buttons on the remote con- To return to the start menu:
trol. 1. Select the arrow.
Many DVDs contain dialogues and subtitles in 2. Press the button.
various languages or descriptions of scenes for In the DVD-specific menu, the language,
the hard of hearing. These functions are stored subtitles, camera angle or title can also be
on the DVD. selected.
On some DVDs, it is only possible to Refer to the information on your DVD.<
select the language, subtitles, camera
angle or title via the DVD-specific menu.
your DVD.
Entries marked grey in the menus cannot be
selected.<
204
Compressed video files 1. Select the directory.
Overview
Playing
1. Select the directory as appropriate.
Controls
Replay functions
2. Press the button. 1. Select the track.
3. Select the track. 2. Press the button.
Driving hints
3. To select a menu item:
> "Play":
Start replay.
> "Break":
To halt and resume replay.
> "Repeat track":
To repeat the selected track.
Navigation
> "Repeat directory":
To repeat the tracks in the current direc-
4. Press the button. tory.
5. Select "Play". 4. Press the button.
Entertainment
Playing audio tracks from a
CD/DVD
Starting replay
Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the label
side uppermost.
6. Press the button. > The disc starts to play automatically
To change the directory: after a few seconds.
Mobility
> If it does not start to play automatically:

Select "CD".
Press the button.
In the case of CDs/DVDs with compressed
audio files, see page 207, depending on the
directory structure it may take several minutes
Reference
for the device to read in the data.
205
To start to play a CD/DVD if it is already in the Settings and replay functions for audio
DVD system at rear
drive: CD/DVDs
1. Call up the start menu via the remote con- 1. Select "SET".
trol. 2. Press the button.
2. Select "CD".
3. Adjust the settings with the remote control:

Alternatively you can use the buttons on the > "Tone":
CD/DVD player to control replay.
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance":
To eject CD/DVD: adjustable separately for the left and
Press the button on the CD/DVD player. right headphones and the infrared head-
phones.
Selecting a track > "Reset":
The settings are reset to the standard
Buttons on the CD/DVD player value.
Press the button for the appropriate > "Break":
direction repeatedly until the desired track is To halt and resume replay.
reached.
> "Random":
The disc starts to play at the start of the track.
The tracks on the current CD/DVD are
played once each in random order.
Via the remote control
> "Scan":
Press the button for the appropriate
To sample all tracks on the CD/DVD auto-
direction repeatedly or turn the knurled wheel
matically once in succession.
until the desired track is reached.
The disc starts to play at the start of the track. > "Repeat":
To repeat the current track. Select it a fur-
ther time to end repeating.
Buttons on the CD/DVD player:
Press and hold the button for the appro-
priate direction.
Remote control:
Press the button until the desired point is
reached.
206
Compressed audio files Settings and replay functions for
Some CDs/DVDs may automatically start to compressed audio files
Overview
play at the first track. 1. Select the track.
Playing
1. Select the directory as appropriate.
Controls
Driving hints
> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance":
3. Select the track. adjustable separately for the left and
right headphones and the infrared head-
phones.
> "Reset":
value.
Navigation
> "Break":
To halt or resume replay.
> "Scan directory":
To sample the tracks briefly in the current
4. Press the button. directory.
To change the directory: > "Scan all":
Entertainment
1. Select the directory. To sample all tracks briefly.
> "Random directory":
The tracks in the current directory are
played in random order.
> "Random all":
To play all tracks in random order.
> "Repeat track":
To repeat the selected track.
> "Repeat directory":
Mobility
To repeat the tracks in the current directory.

2. Press the button. > "Details":
To display any stored information on the
current track.
Reference
207
Showing pictures from a 3. Select the view mode:
DVD system at rear
CD/DVD > Browsing with the menu guidance but-

tons on the remote control.
1. Insert the CD/DVD into the drive with the
> Showing slide show:
label side uppermost.
Turn the knurled wheel to adjust the dis-
play duration.
2. Call up the start menu via the remote con- Stopping slide show:
trol. Select "Stop".
3. Select "Foto".
4. Press the button. Settings
Showing overview
1. Select the subdirectory as appropriate.
2. Select "Overview".
2. To select a menu item:
Function
3. Press the button. Back to "Foto" menu

It may take a while before the overview is "SET" Adjusting "Display".
displayed in full. "Languages": the system's
4. Browse through the overview with the language can be changed after
remote control's menu guide. switching to the top box.
If a symbol is displayed instead of a pic- Starting slide show.

ture, the picture cannot be displayed in Showing first/last picture
the overview.< Rotating picture through 90°
Showing pictures "Overview" Switching to picture overview
1. Select a picture using the buttons on the

remote control.
2. Press the button. Ending display
2. Select the symbol.
Ejecting CD/DVD
208
Notes on the CD/DVD player Depending on the authoring, not all functions
may be available for replay.
Overview
Safety notes Commercially available dual-sided DVDs are
The BMW CD/DVD player is officially des- coated on both sides and do not display labels.
ignated a Class 1 laser product. Never use Both sides therefore carry information. To play
it if the cover is damaged or open, otherwise the information on the other side, turn over the
there is a risk of serious eye injuries.< DVD.
Suitable media Supported formats

Depending on the compression method, not all
Controls
Do not use CDs/DVDs with adhesive
labels that have been affixed subse- files of the aforementioned formats can be
quently, as these may peel off while in the drive played.
as a result of the temperatures to which these
media are exposed during playing, and could Pictures
damage the system irreparably. JPEG/JPG
Driving hints
Use only round CDs/DVDs with a standard If the image files are very large, the pictures may
diameter of 12 cm, approx. 5 in. take some time to appear.
Do not play CDs/DVDs in conjunction with an
adapter, e.g. CD singles, otherwise the CDs or Compressed audio files
the adapter could jam and be impossible to
> MP3
eject.
Do not use combined CD/DVDs, e.g. DVDPlus or > WMA
hybrid discs, otherwise the CD/DVD could jam > OGG
and be impossible to eject.<
> AAC
Navigation
The CD/DVD player is able to play the following
media: Compressed video files
> Video DVDs > VCD
> CD-DA (audio CDs) > SVCD
> CDs/DVDs with compressed picture files > MPEG1
Entertainment
> CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files > MPEG2
> CDs/DVDs with compressed video files > MPEG4
Audio DVDs and SACDs are not supported by
the DVD player. However, many commercially Digital rights management DRM
available audio DVDs contain a video track of It may not be possible to play CDs/DVDs with
DVD video format in addition to the audio track. integrated digital rights management.
These DVDs can be played by the DVD player.
The information supplied with your DVD will General malfunctions
indicate whether or not your audio DVD also has
The BMW CD/DVD player has been optimised
a video track.
Mobility
for in-car operation. In some instances, it may

be more sensitive to faulty CDs/DVDs than sta-
tionary devices would be.
If a CD/DVD cannot be played, first check if it
has been inserted properly.
Reference
209
Take care not to allow any foreign bodies External device
DVD system at rear
or liquids to penetrate the CD/DVD slot,

otherwise the CD/DVD player will be dam- Connecting
aged.<
Humidity
A high level of humidity may cause the laser
beam focusing lens to fog over and temporarily
prevent the CD/DVD being played.
Malfunctions with individual CDs/DVDs

Should malfunctions occur only with individual
CDs/DVDs, one of the following factors may be
1 Connections for audio/video lead:
the cause.
Note the socket colours when connecting
up.
Copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs
Yellow socket: video
With copied or self-recorded CDs/DVDs, possi- White socket: audio, left
ble causes of output malfunctions include an Red socket: audio, right
inconsistent data-creation or burning process,
2 Power supply for external device: power
or low quality or high age of the CD/DVD blank.
sockets with removable cap, see also
Only write on the label side of CDs/DVDs using page 119.
a special marker pen.
Playing
Damaged CDs/DVDs
1. Switch on the external device and start
Avoid leaving fingerprints and protect against playing.
dust, scratches and moisture.
2. Call up the start menu via the remote con-
Store CDs/DVDs in a case.
trol.
Do not expose CDs/DVDs to temperatures
above 506/122 7, high levels of humidity or 3. Select "AUX".
direct sunlight. 4. Press the button.
CDs/DVDs with copy protection

CDs/DVDs are often copy-protected by the
manufacturer. This could result in CDs/DVDs
being impossible to play, or only playable with
restrictions.
CDs/DVDs with compressed audio files

If the language set for the CD/DVD player is not
the same as the language of the music track,
the music track may be displayed incorrectly. On devices without a video signal, e.g. MP3
players, "No video signal" is displayed. The
sound is still reproduced.
Care notes
Do not use a cleaning CD with a brush.
210
Settings for external devices
1. Press the button during replay.
Overview
Controls
> "Graphics settings":
> "Brightness", "Colour" and "Contrast"
Driving hints
of video replay.
> "NTSC colours":
With NTSC-standard external devices,
the colour can be adjusted.
> "Standard":
The DVD system at the rear can be mod-
ified for external devices with various TV
formats; refer also to the operating
Navigation
instructions for the external device.
> "Reset":
value.
> "Tone":
> "Treble / Bass" and "Balance" can be
Entertainment
adjusted for the left and right head-
phones and the infrared headphones.
> "Reset":
Your settings are reset.
> Further settings can be performed after
switching to the top box.
"Tone": bring the volume of the external
device in line with the volume of the CD/
DVD player.
Mobility
"Languages": system language of the

DVD system at the rear.
"Display": background brightness of the
monitor.
> "DVD format (AUX)":
> "Standard"
Reference
> "Zoom": full-screen replay
211
Mobility
To assist you in preserving your car's mobility,
this section contains important information
about operating fluids, wheels and tyres,
maintenance routines and minor repairs.

Refuelling
Refuelling
Fuel filler flap Note when refuelling

When handling fuel, comply with
Opening the safety regulations displayed by
garages and filling stations.<
When refuelling, insert the filler nozzle fully into
the filler neck. Avoid lifting the filler nozzle dur-
ing refuelling, otherwise
> The supply of fuel will be cut off prematurely
> Fuel vapour and fumes will be fed back less
effectively
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle cuts
out for the first time.
1. Open the fuel filler flap. To do this, briefly
press its rear edge. Fuel tank capacity
2. Turn the fuel filler cap anti-clockwise. > X5 3.0si, 3.0d:
3. Place the tank cap in the holder on the flap. Approx. 85 litres, approx. 18.7 gal, including
a reserve of approx. 8 litres, approx. 1.8 gal.
Fastening > X5 4.8i:
Fit the tank cap and turn clockwise until it is Approx. 85 litres, approx. 18.7 gal, including
clearly heard to click into place. a reserve of approx. 10 litres, approx.
Do not crush the strap attached to the 2.2 gal.
cap. A message* will appear if the cap is If the range is below 50 km, approx.
loose or missing.< 30 miles, refuel the car, otherwise the
Manual release may occur.<
In the event of an electrical fault, you can
release the fuel filler flap manually.
1. Open the right-hand side trim in the load
area.
2. Pull the knob with the fuel pump symbol.
214
Fuel grade Diesel engines
Do not use rapeseed methyl ester RME,
Overview
Petrol engine biodiesel or petrol. If the wrong type of
Never use fuel containing lead, otherwise fuel has been added, do not start the engine,
the catalytic converter will be damaged. otherwise you risk causing damage to it.<
Do not fill the tank with E85, i.e. fuel consisting Contact BMW Service if the wrong type of fuel
of 85% ethanol or FlexFuel. Otherwise the has been added.
engine and fuel supply system will be dam- > Your BMW's engine is rated to run on:
aged.<
Diesel oil to DIN EN 590 standard.
Controls
Petrol should be sulphur-free or have a mini-
mum sulphur content. Since the engine has a Winter-grade diesel oil
knock control function, it can run on different
To ensure that the diesel engine operates relia-
grades of fuel.
bly during the cold season of the year, it must
> Super Plus, octane number 98 RON. be run on winter-grade diesel oil, which garages
Fill up with this grade of fuel so that the usually sell during the period in question. Fuel
Driving hints
nominal performance values are achieved. filter heating is installed as standard equipment
> You can also run the engine on: to prevent the fuel solidifying during operation.
Premium-grade unleaded petrol, octane Do not incorporate any additives, includ-
number 95 RON. ing petrol, as these could cause damage
This petrol is also known as: to the engine.<
DIN EN 228 or Eurosuper.
> The minimum permissible grade is:
Regular-grade unleaded fuel, octane
Navigation
number 91 RON.
Do not use fuel of a quality inferior to the
minimum grade indicated, otherwise the
engine could sustain damage.<
National-market versions supplied
Entertainment
to run on leaded fuel*
With this specification, in addition to the grades
listed above, you can run the engine on leaded
fuel. The minimum grade is likewise 91 RON.
Mobility
Reference
215
Wheels and tyres
Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressures Note tyre size

These tyre pressures apply to sizes of tyre
Information for your safety approved by BMW and makes of tyre recom-
The condition of the tyres and maintenance of mended by BMW; details are available from
the correct tyre pressures not only influence BMW Service.
tyre life but are also decisive factors in road
safety and ride quality.
Condition of tyres
Checking pressures Inspect tyres frequently for damage, the pres-
Check and adjust the tyre pressures – ence of foreign bodies, unusual wear and suffi-
including the compact wheel* – on a reg- cient tread depth.
ular basis, but at least twice a month and before
setting out on any long journey. Incorrect tyre Minimum tread depth
pressures can adversely affect the car's road-
The tyre tread depth should not be allowed to
holding and cause tyre damage, which could
drop below 3 mm, approx. 1/8 in. Below a tread
result in an accident.<
depth of 3 mm, approx. 1/8 in, there is an
After correcting tyre pressures, reinitial- increased risk of aquaplaning when driving on
ise the Run Flat Indicator, see page 87.< wet roads at fairly high speeds.
Below a tread depth of 4 mm, approx. 3/16 in,
Tyre pressure values winter tyres become noticeably less suitable for
winter driving conditions. New tyres should be
fitted in the interests of safety.
The tyre pressures for your standard tyres are

visible on the driver's door post, with the
driver's door open. Wear indicators in the base of the tread groove,
If you do not find your tyres' speed code indi- see arrow, are distributed around the tyre's cir-
cated alongside the inflation pressures, cumference; the letters TWI – Tread Wear Indi-
observe the tyre pressures for the correspond- cator – on the tyre's flanks identify tyres that
ing size, e.g. 255/55 R 18. incorporate these wear indicators. Once the
tyre tread has worn down to the wear indicators,
Tyre pressures for heavy loads and a tread depth of 1.6 mm, approx. 1/16 in, has
trailer towing been reached.
For trailer towing, the tyre pressures for the
higher load in the table apply.
216
Tyre damage that the tyre can continue to be used subject to
Unusual vibration while the car is being driven certain restrictions, even if depressurised.
Overview
could indicate a tyre fault or some other defect If you need to continue driving with a damaged
on your car. This may have been caused e.g. by tyre, see Indication of a flat tyre, page 87.
driving over a kerb or similar. The same applies
to any other abnormal road behaviour, such as
pulling severely to the right or left. New wheels and tyres
In such cases, reduce speed immediately
Have new wheels and tyres fitted only by
and have the wheels and tyres checked
BMW Service or by a specialist tyre dealer
without delay. Proceed with caution to the near-
Controls
that operates to BMW specifications and has
est BMW Service or specialist tyre dealer that
suitably trained personnel. If such work is per-
operates to BMW specifications and has suita-
formed inexpertly, it could result in consequen-
bly trained personnel. Have the car towed there
tial damage and thus constitute a safety risk.
if necessary. Tyre damage represents a risk of
Make sure that the new wheels are balanced.<
serious injury to occupants and to all other road
users.<
Driving hints
Retreaded tyres
Age of tyres BMW advises against the use of
retreaded tyres, as these could adversely
For a variety of reasons, including the tendency
affect the car's safety. Their carcasses may dif-
of tyres to become brittle along with increasing
fer in internal construction or have aged suffi-
age, BMW recommends that new tyres be fitted
ciently to limit their durability.<
after not more than 6 years, irrespective of the
actual level of wear. This also applies to the tyre
The correct wheels and tyres
on the compact wheel*.
Navigation
When fitting new tyres or changing over from
A tyre's date of manufacture is included in the
summer to winter tyres and vice-versa, for your
inscription on the tyre:
own safety you should fit run-flat tyres. BMW
DOT ... 1207 means that the tyre was manufac-
Service will be pleased to advise you on this.
tured in week 12 of 2007.
For safety reasons, BMW recommends
that damaged run-flat tyres be replaced
Entertainment
rather than repaired.<
Run-flat tyres
BMW recommends fitting only wheels
and tyres that it has approved for your
type of vehicle, otherwise the tyres may e.g.
make contact with the vehicle body due to
impermissible tolerances, even though they are
of an approved size; this could result in a serious
accident. BMW is unable to assess the suitabil-
ity of wheels and tyres it has not approved and
cannot therefore guarantee their safety.<
Mobility
When fitting larger wheels and tyres, it

The symbol identifying run-flat tyres is a circle may be necessary to have the wheel arch
with the letters RSC on the side wall. linings modified, to avoid endangering road
Run-flat tyres comprise a tyre that is self-sup- users or damaging the car itself. Always have
porting within certain limitations, and a special this work performed either by BMW Service or
rim. The reinforcement in the side walls ensures by a workshop that operates to BMW specifica-
Reference
tions and has suitably trained personnel.<
217
Details of the correct wheel and tyre combina- cialist tyre dealers and BMW Service can supply
Wheels and tyres
tions can be obtained from BMW Service. these labels.

The correct wheel and tyre combination also
has an influence on various systems, which Tyre storage
could otherwise malfunction, e.g. ABS, DSC, Store wheels and tyres in a cool, dry and prefer-
xDrive or Run Flat Indicator. ably dark place when not in use. Protect tyres
To maintain the car's good road behaviour, against contamination from oil, grease and fuel.
always fit tyres of the same make and tread pat-
tern to all wheels. After a tyre has been dam- Tyre rotation between axles
aged, fit the original wheel and tyre combination BMW recommends that you do not rotate the
again as soon as possible. front and rear wheels by swapping over in either
direction, as this may impair handling charac-
Recommended makes of tyre teristics.
Snow chains*
Only certain fine-link snow chains have been
tested by BMW, classified as safe for use and
recommended. BMW Service is able to provide
the details of these makes.
Fit snow chains in pairs and only to the rear
wheels.
Certain makes of tyre are recommended by When fitting, comply with the snow chain man-
BMW for each tyre size. They are marked with a ufacturer's instructions. When snow chains are
clearly visible BMW designation on the side wall in use, do not exceed 50 km/h, approx. 30 mph.
of the tyre.
Do not initialise the Run Flat Indicator if
When properly used, these tyres meet the high- snow chains are fitted, as the instrument
est standards in terms of safety and handling might issue an incorrect reading.
characteristics. When driving with snow chains, you may find it
helpful to activate DTC temporarily, see
Special characteristics of winter tyres page 84.<
BMW recommends you to fit winter tyres if the
car is used for driving in wintry conditions.
Although all-season tyres with an M+S marking
have better winter characteristics than summer
tyres, they do not normally match the perform-
ance of winter tyres.
Speed limit for tyres, noting

Always comply with the speed limit for the
winter tyres fitted to your car; failure to do
so could result in tyre damage and accidents.<
If the car is capable of speeds higher than that
permitted for the winter tyres, a sticker stating
the maximum permitted speed for the tyres fit-
ted must be displayed in your field of view. Spe-
218
In the engine compartment
Overview
Do not work on the car unless you pos- Closing
sess the necessary technical knowledge.
If you are unfamiliar with the statutory guide-
lines, have any work on the car performed only
by BMW Service or by a workshop that oper-
ates to BMW specifications and has suitably
trained personnel. If such work is performed
Controls
inexpertly, it could result in consequential dam-
age and thus constitute a safety risk.<
Engine compartment lid Close the engine compartment lid from a height
of about 40 cm, approx. 16 in, with some
Driving hints
Releasing momentum. It must be clearly heard to engage.
To avoid injuries, ensure that the closing
area of the engine compartment lid is
unobstructed.
If you notice during the journey that the engine
compartment lid has not been properly closed,
stop the car at the earliest possible moment and
close it correctly.<
Navigation
Pull the lever.
Opening
Entertainment
Press the release lever and open the lid.

Mobility
Reference
219
Important parts of the engine compartment
1 Filler neck for washer fluid for headlight 3 Jump-starting connection, see page 235
cleaning system and windscreen washer, 4 Coolant expansion tank, see page 222
see page 62
5 Filler neck for engine oil, see Adding engine
2 Vehicle Identification Number oil, page 221
Engine oil
Engine oil consumption depends on driving 3. Select "Info sources" and press the control-
style and the operating conditions. ler.
Checking engine oil level

Your car is equipped with an electronic oil-level
monitor.
To obtain as accurate an oil level reading as
possible, the engine should be at its normal
operating temperature. This will normally be the
case after it has been driven continuously for at
least 10 km, approx. 6 miles. You can call up the
oil level while driving or with the car stationary
on a flat surface and with the engine running.
220
until "Service requirements" is selected and Adding engine oil
Overview
Controls
Only add 1 litre, approx. 2 pints, of oil when you
6. If necessary, move the highlighted marker are instructed to do so by a message on the
to the second field from the top. Turn the control display.
controller until "Engine oil level" is selected Top up the oil level within the next
and press the controller. The oil level is dis- 200 km, approx. 120 miles, otherwise the
Driving hints
played. engine may suffer damage.<
Keep all oils, greases etc. out of the reach
Possible messages of children and read and comply with any
> "Engine oil level OK" warning instructions on the containers, to avoid
> "No measured value available: Update of any health risks.<
engine oil level in process...":
Oil level is being measured. This can take Oil change
about 3 minutes if the car is at a standstill on Have oil changes performed either by BMW
Navigation
a level surface and the engine is running, Service or by a workshop that operates to BMW
and about 5 minutes while the car is on the specifications and has suitably trained person-
move. nel.
> "Oil level at the minimum: Add 1 liter engine
oil.": Approved engine oils
Top up with 1 litre, approx. 2 pints, of The quality of the engine oil is a decisive factor
Entertainment
engine oil at the next opportunity. for the correct operation and long life of your
> "Engine oil level too high": car's engine. On the basis of extensive tests,
BMW regularly approves specific grades of
Have the car examined immediately,
engine oil.
otherwise too much oil could result in
engine damage.< BMW Service can provide details of the
oils approved by BMW for your car.<
> "Please note: recalculated Service interval
for engine oil": Do not use any oil additives, as these
Do not add engine oil. You can continue could in certain circumstances result in
your journey. Note the newly calculated dis- engine damage.<
tance remaining to the next Oil Service, see
Mobility
page 223. Have the system checked as

soon as possible.
Reference
221
Alternative oil grades Checking coolant level
If exceptionally none of the approved grades of 1. Allow the engine to cool down.
oil is available, you can top up the oil level in 2. Turn the cap on the expansion tank slightly
between oil changes with other grades of oil. anti-clockwise until it starts to open, then
The oil specification on the container must be allow the pressure to escape before open-
one of the following: ing it fully.
3. The coolant level is correct if it is between
Petrol engines
the minimum and maximum marks, see dia-
> Preferred: BMW Longlife-01, gram next to the filler neck.
BMW Longlife-01 FE or
4. If necessary, slowly top up to the correct
BMW Longlife-04
level; do not overfill.
> Alternatively: BMW Longlife-98 or
5. Turn the cap to close until it is heard to click.
ACEA A3
6. Have the cause of coolant loss rectified as
Diesel engines soon as possible.
> Preferred: BMW Longlife-04
> Alternatively: BMW Longlife-01,
BMW Longlife-98 or ACEA A3/B4
Coolant
Do not open up the cooling system while
the engine is hot, otherwise you may
scald yourself on the escaping coolant steam.<
Coolant is a mixture of water and an additive.
Not all commercially available additives are suit-
able for your BMW. BMW Service can provide
details of which additives are suitable.
Use only suitable additives, otherwise the
engine could incur damage. As these
additives are hazardous to health, observe the
notes on the containers.<
When disposing of coolant additives,
comply with the relevant environmental
protection regulations.<
222
Maintenance
Overview
BMW Maintenance System > Statutory vehicle inspections, depending
on national requirements
Service data in the remote control

Your car continuously stores information relat-
ing to service requirements in the remote con-
Controls
trol as the car is being driven. Your BMW Serv-
ice Advisor can read out this data from the
remote control, and propose an optimised
maintenance approach. Whenever you take
your car in for servicing you should therefore
The BMW Maintenance System contributes hand your BMW Service Advisor the remote
Driving hints
towards upholding the roadworthiness and control unit that you last used.
operating reliability of your BMW. It also covers Make sure that the date is always set cor-
comfort and convenience aspects, such as rectly, see page 76, otherwise the effec-
ensuring that filters for the air in the car's inte- tiveness of Condition Based Service CBS can-
rior are renewed in good time. Its purpose is to not be assured.<
optimise maintenance measures with a view to
minimising the cost of looking after your car. Service Booklet
If and when you come to sell your BMW, a com- More information about required service rou-
Navigation
prehensive record of servicing will prove a sig- tines is provided in the Service Booklet.
nificant benefit. BMW recommends that you have mainte-
nance and repair work carried out by
Condition Based Service CBS BMW Service.
Sensors and advanced algorithms take account Make sure that maintenance work is confirmed
of the varying conditions in which your BMW is in the Service Booklet after it has been carried
Entertainment
used. Condition Based Service uses these to out. These entries are evidence that your BMW
determine current and future servicing require- has been serviced regularly and correctly.<
ments. The system provides you with an oppor-
tunity to tailor the scope of maintenance work
to your personal standards, so that your BMW
will always be reliably operational.
On the control display, you can have the
remaining distances and times for selected
maintenance tasks as well as any legally pre-
scribed dates displayed to you individually, see
Mobility
page 69:
> Engine oil
> Brake linings, separately for front and rear
> Brake fluid
> Vehicle check
Reference
223
Socket for on-board General care
Maintenance
diagnosis OBD Useful hints on care of your BMW are provided

in the booklet Looking after your car.
Components which have a decisive effect on

exhaust emissions can be tested via the OBD
socket with a suitable device.
This on-board diagnosis socket is on the
driver's side, on the underside of the instrument
panel to the left, behind a cover.
Exhaust emissions
If the warning light lights up: exhaust
emission values have deteriorated.
Have the car checked as soon as pos-
sible.
Recycling
The very design of your car incorporates a recy-
cling-friendly concept that extends to both the
production methods used and the choice of
materials.
BMW recommends that you hand in your car to
a salvaging operator approved by the BMW
Group at the end of its operating life. In doing
this, you will be making an active contribution
towards protecting resources and the environ-
ment. The regulations concerning the returning
of end-of-life vehicles may vary from country to
country. Further information is available at the
Internet on www.bmw.com or from BMW Serv-
ice.
224
Replacing parts
Overview
Toolkit Rear
Controls
1. Lift off the entire wiper arm and pull off the
The toolkit is located in the load area, under the wiper blade, see arrow.
Driving hints
floor panel.
2. Insert the new wiper blade and press down
until it audibly engages.
Renewing wiper blades

Front
Lights and bulbs
1. Fold away the wiper arm. Lights and bulbs are an important aspect of
driving safety. They should, therefore, be han-
2. Swing up the wiper blade.
Navigation
dled carefully. BMW recommends that any rou-
3. Pull the wiper blade towards the wind- tines that you are not familiar with or that are not
screen to remove it, see arrow. described here be entrusted to BMW Service.
Do not touch the glass of a new bulb with
the fingers, because even slight amounts
of dirt or grease will then be burned into the bulb
Entertainment
and reduce its working life. Use a clean tissue,
cloth or similar, or hold the bulb by its base.<
A box containing spare bulbs is available from
BMW Service.
Wait for bulbs to cool down before chang-
ing, otherwise they could cause burns.<
When working on electrical systems,
always begin by switching off the con-
sumer in question, in order to avoid the risk of
short-circuits. Observe any instructions sup-
Mobility
plied by the bulb manufacturer, to avoid the risk

of injury or damage when changing bulbs.<
Please see the booklet Looking after your car
for notes on care of the headlights.
If you need to change a bulb not
described in the booklet, please contact
Reference
BMW Service or a workshop that operates to
225
BMW specifications and has suitably trained
Replacing parts
personnel.<
Light-emitting diodes LEDs

Controls, displays and other equipment items
inside your car have light-emitting diodes
behind a cover as their light source. These
LEDs resemble conventional lasers and are
classified by law as Class 1 light-emitting
diodes.
3. Take out the bulb and change it.
Do not remove the covers or expose the
4. Fit the cover and turn it clockwise until it
eyes directly to the unfiltered light source
audibly engages.
for several hours at a time, as this could cause
irritation to the retina.<
Low-beam headlights
Halogen headlights H7 bulb, 55 Watt
The halogen bulbs are pressurised, so 1. Release the cover's retaining bracket, see
wear goggles and gloves. There is other- arrow, and take off the cover.
wise a risk of injury if the bulb should sustain
damage.<
H7 bulb, 55 Watt
1. Turn the cover, see arrow, and remove.
2. Pull the cable connector, arrow 1, off the

bulb socket.
Press the bulb socket's retaining bracket
towards the bulb, arrow 2, and twist it to the
rear.
2. Pull the cable connector, arrow 1, off the

bulb socket.
Lift the retaining bracket on the bulb socket
slightly and twist it to the rear, arrow 2.
3. Take out the bulb and change it.

4. Fit the cover and engage its retaining brack-
ets.
226
Xenon headlights* Front flashing turn indicators
24 Watt bulb, PSY24W
Overview
Xenon bulbs
1. Turn the bulb holder with bulb anti-clock-
The operating life of these light units is wise to remove, see arrow, and change the
extremely long and the likelihood of failure very bulb.
low, provided that they are not switched on and
off a very great number of times. If a xenon
headlight should none the less fail, switch on
the front fog lights and continue the journey
with great care, provided that local legislation
Controls
does not prohibit this.
Have any work on the xenon light unit,
including bulb-changing, performed only
by BMW Service or by a workshop that oper-
ates to BMW specifications and has suitably
trained personnel. Otherwise there is a risk of 2. Install in the reverse order.
Driving hints
potentially fatal accidents if work is performed
inexpertly, because of the high electrical volt- Rear lights
ages present.< > Flashing turn indicator, brake light:
21 Watt bulb, P21W
Halogen bulbs:
> Reversing lights and rear fog light:
Side lights and daylight driving lights
16 Watt bulb, W 16 W
H8 bulb, 35 Watt
> Rear light: LED technology.
The bulb is pressurised, so protect the
Navigation
In the event of a fault, please contact BMW
eyes and wear gloves. There is otherwise Service or a workshop that operates to
a risk of injury if the bulb should sustain dam- BMW specifications and has suitably
age.< trained personnel.
1. Turn the cover to the left and take it off.
Arrangement of rear lights
Entertainment
2. Turn the bulb anti-clockwise, pull off the

plug and change the bulb. 1 Rear light
Mobility
3. Install in the reverse order. 2 Rear fog light

3 Flashing turn indicators
4 Brake light/tail light
5 Reversing lights
6 Additional brake light
Reference
227
Brake lights Reversing lights
Replacing parts
1. Open the side trim in the load area. 1. Open the side trim in the load area.
2. Remove the first aid pouch* and warning 2. Remove the first aid pouch* and warning
triangle* if necessary. Fold up the insula- triangle* if necessary. Fold up the insula-
tion. tion.
3. Turn the appropriate bulb holder to the left 3. Turn the bulb holder to the left and take it
and take it out. out.
4. Pull out the top bulb and change it. 4. Pull out the bulb and change it.
Press the bottom bulb in slightly and turn to 5. Fit the side trim again.
the left, take out and change.
5. Fit the side trim again. Rear fog lights
1. Carefully remove the cover in the tailgate
Flashing turn indicators trim with the aid of a screwdriver.
1. Open the side trim in the load area.
2. Remove the first aid pouch* and warning
triangle* if necessary. Fold up the insula-
tion.
3. Turn the bulb holder to the left and take it
out.
2. Turn the bulb holder to the left and take it

out.
4. Press the bulb in slightly and turn to the left,

take out and change.
5. Fit the side trim again.
3. Press the bulb in slightly, turn to the left and

change it.
228
4. Insert the bulb holder in the tailgate, making Centre brake light
sure that it engages. This light uses LED technology. In the event of a
Overview
5. Before inserting the cover, unclip the load fault, please contact BMW Service or a work-
area light. shop that operates to BMW specifications and
Then position the upper edge of the cover has suitably trained personnel.
and close it, see arrow.
Changing a wheel
Your BMW is equipped with run-flat tyres as
Controls
standard. It is therefore no longer necessary to
change a wheel immediately in the event of a
loss of tyre pressure following a puncture.
If you need to continue driving with damaged
tyres, see Indication of a flat tyre on page 87.
Run-flat tyres can be identified by the circular
Driving hints
6. Position the load area light and clip it in, see symbol with the letters RSC on the tyre's side
arrow. wall, see Run-flat tyres, page 217.
When fitting new tyres or changing over from
summer to winter tyres and vice-versa, for your
own safety you should fit run-flat tyres. There is
no spare wheel available in the event of a punc-
ture. BMW Service will be pleased to advise you
on this. See also New wheels and tyres,
Navigation
page 217.
Suitable tools for wheel-changing are
available as accessories from BMW Serv-
ice.<
Licence plate lights
5 Watt bulb, C11 12 W Jack mounting points
Entertainment
1. Push the light to the right with a screw-
driver, see arrow 1.
Mobility
The jacking points are at the positions marked.
2. Take out the light, arrow 2. Compact wheel*

3. Change the bulb. Safety precautions in the event of a punc-
ture or when changing a wheel: park the
4. Fit the light again. car as far as possible from moving traffic, on a
Reference
firm surface. Switch on the hazard warning

flashers.
229
Apply the parking brake and engage transmis- Removing compact wheel
Replacing parts
sion position P. The compact wheel is located in the load area,

All occupants must leave the car and be led to a under the floor panel.
point where they are not exposed to risk, for
example behind a crash barrier at the side of the
road.
If necessary, set up a warning triangle* or a
flashing warning light* at a sufficient distance
to the rear. Comply with relevant local laws.
Only change wheels on a flat, firm and non-slip
surface. On a soft or low-grip surface, such as
snow, ice, tiles or similar, there is a risk of the car
or the jack sliding sideways.
Position the car's jack on a firm surface. 1. Take out the tool holder.
Never place wood blocks or similar under the
2. Release the wing nut 1.
jack, or the maximum support capacity may not
be reached due to the restricted height. 3. Take out washer 2 to one side.
When the car is jacked up, do not lie under it or 4. Take out the compact wheel.
start the engine, as this could lead to a poten-
tially fatal accident.< Preparations for changing a wheel
1. Observe the safety notes further above.
What you need
2. Slacken off the wheel studs by half a turn.
To avoid rattling noises later, please make a
Thiefproof wheel studs*, see page 232.
note of the positions of the tools when they are
removed, and replace them in the same posi-
Jacking up the car
tions later.
The tools are located in the holder beneath the 1. Position the car jack beneath the jacking
floor panel flap. point closest to the wheel that needs to be
changed, with the jack base vertically
beneath the jacking point and resting on the
ground across its full surface.
Use the jack only for wheel changing.
Do not attempt to raise another type
of vehicle or any other load with this jack;
this could result in injury or damage.<
1 Jack*
2 Crank handle for jack*
3 Wheel stud wrench*
230
After fitting
1. Tighten the studs alternately on opposite
Overview
sides of the hub.
For safety reasons, have the wheel
stud tightening torque checked with-
out delay, using a calibrated torque wrench.
The correct tightening torque is 140 Nm,
approx. 103 lb ft.<
2. Stow the wheel with the faulty tyre in the
Controls
2. Introduce the head of the jack into the rec- load area.
tangular recess as it is extended, see detail. Because of its size, the wheel with the
faulty tyre will not fit beneath the floor
panel flap.<
3. Correct the tyre pressure at the earliest
opportunity.
Driving hints
Prevent dirt entering the tyre valves
by attaching screw-on dust caps. Dirt
in the tyre valve can often lead to a gradual
loss of air pressure.<
4. Initialise the Run Flat Indicator, see
3. Continue to turn the crank handle until the page 87.
wheel you wish to change is lifted clear of 5. Replace the damaged tyre as soon as pos-
the ground. sible and have the new wheel balanced.
Navigation
Fitting the wheel Driving with the compact wheel
1. Take out the wheel studs and remove the Drive with caution and do not exceed 80 km/h,
wheel. approx. 50 mph.
2. Remove heavy dirt deposits from the wheel The car's handling properties, such as track
and hub contact faces and clean the wheel
Entertainment
stability during braking, braking distances and
studs. the self-steering properties at the limits of han-
3. Fit the new wheel or the compact wheel and dling, may have changed. These effects will be
insert at least two diagonally opposed more pronounced in combination with winter
wheel studs. tyres.
If the car is not fitted with alloy wheels of the Only one compact wheel may be fitted at
Genuine BMW type, note that different one time. Fit a wheel/tyre combination
wheel studs may be needed. that matches that of the remaining wheels/tyres
4. Insert and screw up the remaining wheel at the earliest possible opportunity.<
studs, then tighten them all firmly, working
Mobility
across the hub rather than round it.

5. Lower the car and remove the jack.
Reference
231
Thiefproof wheel studs* Power failure
Replacing parts
After a temporary power failure, the functions of

certain equipment items may be restricted, as
they require reinitialising. Individual settings
may likewise have been lost and will have to be
reprogrammed:
> Seat, mirror and steering wheel memory
The positions must be reprogrammed, see
page 40.
> Time and date
1 Wheel stud for adapter These values must be updated, see
2 Adapter, in the recess beneath the load area pages 75, 76.
floor > Radio
It may be necessary to enter the stations in
Removing the memory again, see page 170.
1. Insert the adapter 2 into the wheel stud. > Navigation system
2. Unscrew wheel stud 1. Wait until the system starts, see page 160.
After inserting, remove the adapter again.

Please contact BMW Service in the event Fuses
of loss of the adapter.<
Do not repair blown fuses or replace them
with fuses with different colours or
Car battery ampere ratings, otherwise overloaded electrical
wires can cause a fire in the car.<
Maintenance Spare fuses, plastic tweezers and details of the
The battery needs no routine maintenance layout of the fuses are to be found with the
whatsoever, in other words the quantity of acid fuses in the load area.
it contains will normally last for the full operating
life of the battery in temperate climates. BMW In the interior
Service will gladly advise you on all matters The fuses are in the front passenger's footwell,
relating to batteries. on the underside of the instrument panel.
1. Unfasten the screws, see arrows, on the
Recharging the battery footwell trim.
Recharge the battery only with the engine
stopped, via the connections in the engine
compartment. Connections, see Starting with a
flat battery on page 235.
Disposal
After changing batteries, have any old
batteries disposed of by BMW Service or
take them to an official collecting point. Batter-
ies filled with acid should be transported and
stored upright. Protect batteries against falling 2. Set down the trim in the footwell.
over when in transit.<
232
3. Unfasten the screw, arrow 1, and fold down
the fuse carrier, arrow 2.
Overview
Controls
4. Change the blown fuse.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal. Make
sure that the footwell trim is secured cor-
rectly and securely.
Driving hints
In the luggage compartment
Navigation
Open the right-hand side trim in the load area.
Entertainment
Mobility
Reference
233
Mutual aid
Mutual aid
Emergency call* If the situation allows, wait in the car until voice
contact has been established. You can then
In order to make an emergency call: provide more precise details of the situation.
> Business mobile phone preparation. On cars where BMW Assist has been enabled,
This equipment configuration permits you telephone contact is established with the BMW
to make an emergency call even if a mobile Assist emergency call centre. If the car's cur-
phone has not been registered with the car. rent position can be determined, it is trans-
> Radio readiness is switched on. ferred to the emergency call centre.
> The mobile phone network must be receiv- If the LED is flashing but the emergency call
able. centre cannot be heard over the hands-free
> The emergency call system must be opera- system, the hands-free system may be mal-
tional. functioning. However, the emergency call cen-
tre may still be able to hear you speak.
Although the emergency number may differ
from country to country, it is still possible to ini- In certain circumstances, an emergency call
tiate an emergency call within most GSM net- may be placed automatically immediately after
works using the button. a serious accident. Use of the button does not
interfere with an automatic emergency call.
Misuse of the emergency call system is a pun-
ishable offence. For technical reasons, it may not be pos-
sible to make an emergency call in highly
Making an emergency call adverse conditions.<
1. Briefly press the cover flap to open it.

Ending an emergency call
The layout of the switches and indicator
lights may vary depending on the car's Press the button on the steering wheel, see
equipment. page 9.
Warning triangle*
2. Press the SOS button for at least

2 seconds.
The LED in the button lights up. As soon as a
telephone connection has been set up with the The warning triangle is located in the load area.
general emergency call centre, the LED flashes. Open the left-hand side trim.
If a cancel query appears on the control display,
you can interrupt the emergency call within
5 seconds.
234
First aid pouch* Preparations
1. Check whether the battery of the other
Overview
Certain items in the first aid pouch have a lim-
vehicle has a voltage of 12 Volt and approx-
ited useful life. Check the expiry dates of the
imately the same capacity in Amp/h. This
contents regularly and replace any items that
should be printed on the battery.
have expired.
2. Switch off the engine of the donor vehicle.
3. Switch off any consumers in both vehicles.
The bodies of the two vehicles must not
make contact, otherwise there is the risk
Controls
of a short-circuit.<
Connecting the jump leads

Connect the jump leads in the correct
order, so that no sparks which could
cause injury occur.<
Driving hints
The first aid pouch is located in the load area.
Open the left-hand side trim. On your BMW, the jump-starting connection in
the engine compartment acts as the battery's
positive terminal, see also overview of engine
Mobile Service* compartment on page 220. Its cap is marked +.
1. Fold open the cover on the BMW's jump-
The BMW Group's Mobile Service – Emergency
starting connection by pulling the tab.
Service – is there to assist you round the clock
in the event of a breakdown, including at week-
Navigation
ends and on public holidays.
The telephone numbers for Mobile Service in
your home country are in the Contact booklet.
In cars equipped with BMW Assist or TeleServ-
ice, you can establish contact with the BMW
Group's Mobile Service for breakdown assist-
Entertainment
ance directly via iDrive, see separate Owner's
Handbook.
2. Connect a terminal clamp on the positive/+
lead to the battery's positive terminal or to a
Starting with a flat battery jump-starting connection on the donor
vehicle.
If your car's battery is flat, the engine of your
3. Connect the other terminal clamp to the
BMW can be started with the aid of two jump
battery's positive terminal or to a jump-
leads from another vehicle's battery. In the
starting connection on the vehicle to be
same way, you can help another car to start.
started.
Use only leads with fully insulated terminal
Mobility
clamps.
Do not touch any electrically live parts
when the engine is running, or a fatal acci-
dent may occur. Do not depart from the proce-
dure described below, otherwise personal
injury could result or one or both vehicles sus-
Reference
tain damage.<
235
4. Connect a terminal clamp on the negative/– It is stored in the toolkit beneath the floor panel
Mutual aid
lead to the battery's negative terminal or to flap in the load area, see page 225.
the engine or body earth connection on the Use only the towing eye supplied with the
donor vehicle. car, and make sure that it is screwed in
Your BMW has a special nut to act as the fully and is tight. Only use the towing eye for
body earth or negative terminal. towing on roads. Avoid lateral loads on the tow-
ing eye, e.g. do not raise the car at the towing
eye. Otherwise, the towing eye and the car
could sustain damage.<
Access to screw thread

Cover in bumper: press the arrow symbol on the
cover.
Front
5. Connect the second terminal clamp to the

battery's negative terminal or to a ground/
earth connection on the engine or body of
the vehicle to be started.
Starting the engine

1. Start the engine of the donor vehicle and
allow it to run for a few minutes at a slightly
increased idle speed.
Rear
2. Start the engine of the other vehicle in the
customary way.
If an initial attempt to start the engine fails,
wait several minutes until the flat battery
has been recharged to a slightly greater
degree.
3. Allow the engines to run for a few minutes.
4. Disconnect the jump leads in the opposite
order from that in which they were originally
attached.
Check the battery if necessary and have it Being towed
recharged. Make sure that the ignition is switched on,
Do not use the spray products sold as see page 54, otherwise low-beam head-
starting aids.< lights, rear lights, turn indicators and wind-
screen wipers will not be available. When the
engine is not running, there is no power assist-
Tow-starting, towing away ance and the brake servo is out of action. The
steering and brakes will require extra effort to
operate. The active steering will not be active
Using towing eye
and more pronounced steering wheel move-
The screw-in towing eye must always be car-
ments will be necessary.<
ried on the car. It can be screwed into the front
or rear end of the BMW.
236
Switch on the hazard warning flashers, depend- With towrope
ing on local regulations. If the car's electrical Ensure that the towrope is taut when the towing
Overview
system has failed, the car to be towed must be vehicle moves off.
made identifiable to following vehicles, for
For towing, use nylon ropes or tapes, as
instance by placing a notice or the warning tri-
these will help to avoid sudden tensile
angle in the rear window.
loads. Only attach the towrope to the towing
Before starting to tow, engage transmission eyes. Attaching the towrope to other parts of
position N and release the parking brake. the car can result in damage.<
If transmission position N cannot be engaged,
release the transmission interlock manually, With breakdown truck
Controls
see page 59.
Do not tow away the X5 with just the front
Do not exceed a towing speed of or rear axle raised off the ground, other-
70 km/h, approx. 45 mph, and a towing wise the wheels could lock and the transfer box
distance of 150 km, approx. 90 miles, otherwise be damaged.<
the automatic transmission could sustain dam-
age.<
Driving hints
Towing methods
Do not raise the car at the towing eye or
by body or suspension components, oth-
erwise it could sustain damage.<
In some countries, it is prohibited to tow
another vehicle on public roads by means of a
towbar or towrope. Familiarise yourself with the
Navigation
relevant legislation in the country in question. Always have the X5 hoisted onto a loading plat-
form for transporting.
With towbar
The towing vehicle must not be lighter
Tow-starting
than the towed vehicle, otherwise it may The engine cannot be started by tow-starting.
be impossible to maintain control.< Jump-start the engine, see page 235.
Entertainment
Have the cause of the starting difficulties recti-
The towing eyes of both vehicles should be on
fied.
the same side. If it is impossible to avoid attach-
ing the towbar at an angle, note the following:
> Towbar clearance may be restricted when
cornering.
> The towbar will generate lateral forces if it is
attached offset.
Only attach the towbar to the towing
eyes. Attaching the towbar to other parts
Mobility
of the car can result in damage.<

Reference
237
Reference
This chapter contains technical data, the
short commands for the voice input system
and the index, which will help you find
specific items of information with ease.

Technical data
Technical data
Dimensions
All dimensions in mm. Smallest turning circle dia.: 12.8 m, approx. 42 ft

With mixed tyres*, the vehicle width may be greater than the dimension quoted.
240
Weights
Overview
X5 3.0si X5 4.8i X5 3.0d
Kerb weight, ready for road, with 75 kg, kg 2125 2245 2180
approx. 165 lb, load, tank 90 Ξ full, (lb) (4685) (4950) (4805)
without optional extras
Permitted gross weight kg 2680 2785/2870 2740/2825
(lb) (5910) (6140/6325) (6040/6230)
with third seat row kg 2900 3000/3000 2955/2955
Controls
(lb) (6395) (6610/6610) (6515/6515)
Front axle load limit kg 1245 1345 1295
(lb) (2745) (2965) (2855)
with third seat row kg 1250 1350 1300
(lb) (2755) (2975) (2865)
Driving hints
Rear axle load limit kg 1535 1540/1625 1545/1630
(lb) (3385) (3395/3580) (3405/3590)
(lb) (3825) (3835/3835) (3845/3845)
Roof load kg 100 100 100
(lb) (220) (220) (220)
Load area capacity acc. to VDA Litres 620-1750 620-1750 620-1750
(cu ft) (22-62) (22-62) (22-62)
Navigation
The values after the / refer to vehicles with the
maximum trailer load of 3500 kg, approx.
7715 lb
Entertainment
Mobility
Reference
241
Towing a trailer
Technical data
X5 3.0si X5 4.8i X5 3.0d

Permitted gross weight kg 2800 2905/3010 2860/2965
(lb) (6170) (6400/6635) (6305/6535)
(lb) (6655) (6880/6920) (6780/6820)
Rear axle load limit kg 1700 1705/1820 1710/1825
(lb) (3745) (3760/4010) (3770/4020)
(lb) (4200) (4200/4255) (4210/4255)
Towing loads according to EU operating permit. Note and comply with different values in certain
countries. BMW Service will have details of possible increases.
> Unbraked kg 750 750 750
(lb) (1650) (1650) (1650)
> Braked on slopes of up to 12Ξ kg 2700 2700/3500 2700/3500
(lb) (5950) (5950/7715) (5950/7715)
> Braked on slopes of up to 8Ξ kg 2700 2700/3500 2700/3500
(lb) (5950) (5950/7715) (5950/7715)
Trailer nose weight kg 120 120/140 120/140
(lb) (265) (265/310) (265/310)
The values before the / refer to vehicles with the

5950 lb
The values after the / refer to vehicles with the
7715 lb
242
Filling capacities
Overview
Litres Note
(Imp. units)
Fuel tank approx. 85 Fuel grade: page 215
(18.7 gal)
including a reserve of
X5 3.0si, 3.0d approx. 8
(1.8 gal)
Controls
X5 4.8i approx. 10
(2.2 gal)
Windscreen washer incl. headlight cleaning approx. 6.5 Further details: page 61
system (11.4 pints)
Driving hints
Navigation
Entertainment
Mobility
Reference
243
Short commands for the voice input
Short commands for the voice input system
system*
Short commands enable you to perform certain item is selected. Important short commands for
functions directly irrespective of which menu the voice input system are listed below.
Assistance window
Function Command
Calling up assistance window 18 {Assistance window}

Selecting display in assistance window 19 {Assistance window map north orientated},
{Assistance window map direction of travel},
{Assistance window arrow view},
{Assistance window perspective},
{Assistance window vehicle position},
{Assistance window journey computer} or
{Assistance window computer}
Changing the scale in the assistance window 153 {Assistance window scale ... kilometres} or
{Assistance window scale ... metres}
Communication
Function Command
Further information, see separate Operating Instructions:
Calling up BMW Assist {BMW Assist}
Calling up "BMW Service" {BMW Service}
Calling up "BMW Contact" {BMW Contact}
Calling up "BMW Contact Numbers" {BMW Contact Numbers}
Calling up "Nearest BMW dealer" {Nearest BMW dealer}
Calling up Information Plus {Info Service}
Calling up My Info {My Info}
Calling up BMW Online {BMW Online}
Calling up telephone {Telephone}
Dialling phone number {Dial number}
Displaying phone book {A to Z}
Dialling from the phone book {Call ... } or
{Dial name}
Displaying "Top 8" {Top 8}
Redialling {Last number redial}
Displaying "Calls accepted" {Calls accepted}
244
Function Command
Displaying "Calls not accepted" {Calls not accepted}
Overview
Displaying "Bluetooth" {Bluetooth}
Calling up "BMW Mobile Service" {BMW Mobile Service}
Navigation
Function Command
Calling up navigation 138 {Navigation}
Controls
Calling up "Address input" 138 {Address input}
Calling up "New destination" 138 {New destination}
Displaying "Destination input map" 143 {Destination input map}
Displaying destination list 146 {Destination list}
Displaying address book 146 {Address book}
Driving hints
Displaying route criteria 149 {Route criteria}
Starting route guidance 151 {Start guidance}
Exiting route guidance 151 {Guidance off}
Displaying arrow view 152 {Arrow view}
Displaying map view 153 {Map},
{Map north oriented},
{Map indicating direction of travel} or
Navigation
{Perspective}
Changing the scale 153 {Scale ... kilometres} or
{Scale ... metres}
Displaying streets or towns/cities along the {Route list}
route 153
Entertainment
Switching on spoken instructions 154 {Navigation info on}
Switching off spoken instructions 154 {Navigation info off}
Repeating spoken instructions 154 {Repeat navigation info}
Calling up route 149, 155 {Route menu}
Calling up "New route for" 155 {New route for}
Calling up traffic information 155 {Traffic information}
Calling up "TMC" 155 {TMC}
Displaying the car's position 159 {Vehicle position}
Mobility
Reference
245
On-board information
Function Command
Calling up "On-board Info" 67 {On-board info}

Displaying computer 67 {Computer}
Displaying journey computer 68 {Journey computer}
Calling up stopwatch 74 {Stopwatch}
Calling up limit speed 74 {Limit}
Activating speed limit 74 {Limit on}
Deactivating speed limit 74 {Limit off}
Entertainment
Function Command
Tone control 165 {Tone}

Switching on radio 168 {Radio on} or
{FM} or
{AM}
Calling up "FM" 168 {FM menu}
Calling up "AM" 168 {AM menu}
Calling up "All stations" 168 {FM all stations}
Selecting radio stations 168 {Station ...}, e.g. {Station BBC}, or
{Select station}
Calling up "Memorised stations" 168 {FM memorised stations},
{SW memorised},
{MW memorised} or
{LW memorised}
Selecting a memorised radio station 168 {Memorised station ...},
e.g. {Memorised station 1}
Calling up "Manual frequency selection" 169 {FM manual frequency selection},
{SW manual},
{MW manual},
{LW manual},
{Select frequency} or
{Frequency ... Megahertz}
Calling up radio stations with best reception {SW autostore},
signal 169 {MW autostore} or
{LW autostore}
Calling up "TP" 172 {TP}
Switching on Traffic Programme 172 {Traffic reports on}
Switching off Traffic Programme 172 {Traffic reports off}
Calling up CD player 179 {CD menu}
246
Function Command
Switching on CD player 179 {CD}
Overview
Calling up CD changer 179 {CD changer menu}
Switching on CD changer 179 {CD changer}
Selecting CD 179 {CD 1...6}
Selecting a music track 180 {CD track ...}
Selecting CD and music track 180 {CD 1...6 track ...}
Starting sound playback with external audio {Audio Aux}
Controls
equipment 192
Calling up TV 196 {Television menu}
Switching on TV 196 {Television}
Adjusting the picture 197 {Picture}
Driving hints
Climate
Function Command
Adjusting temperature distribution for seat {Seat-heating distribution}

heating 45
Calling up "Centre vent" {Centre vent}
Calling up "Air distribution" {Air distribution}
Calling up "Automatic programs" 103 {Automatic programmes}
Navigation
Calling up "Independent ventilation" 110 {Independent mode}
Calling up "Direct operation" 110 {Direct operation}
Displaying switch-on times 110 {Switch-on times}
menu
Entertainment
Function Command
Calling up the menu {Settings menu}

"Display off" 19 {Display off}
Calling up "Info sources" {Info sources}
Calling up "Settings" {Settings}
Calling up "Door locks" 28 {Door locks}
Calling up "Steering wheel buttons" 49 {Steering wheel buttons}
Mobility
Calling up "Light" 60, 93 {Light}

Calling up "Service requirements" 69 {Service requirements}
Calling up "Service" 69 {Service}
Calling up "BMW Service" settings {BMW Service settings}
Displaying "Check Control messages" 73 {Check Control messages}
Reference
Calling up "Head-Up Display settings" 90 {HUD settings}
247
Function Command
Adjusting brightness of control display 76 {Brightness}

Calling up "Units" 76 {Units}
Calling up "Languages" 77, 154 {Languages}
Calling up "Clock" 76 {Clock}
Calling up "Date" 76 {Date}
Calling up "Flat Tyre Monitor" 87 {RPA}
Calling up "HDC" 84 {HDC}
Calling up "PDC" 79 {PDC}
Calling up "Traffic information settings" 155 {Traffic information settings}
Displaying "Bluetooth" {Bluetooth}
248
249
Reference Mobility Entertainment Navigation Driving hints Controls Overview
From A-Z
From A-Z
Index
"..." Identifies texts on the Adjusting thigh "All stations" displaying on
control display for selecting support 39, 40 radio 168
functions and refers you to Adjusting units of All-wheel drive, see xDrive 84
the page where these texts measurement on the control "AM",
are to be found. display 76 waveband 165, 168, 175
Adjustments Ambient air, see Automatic Air
A – on the control display 75 Recirculation Control
"After door opens" 41 AUC 105
ABS, see Anti-lock Brake "After unlocking" 41 "Angle" for DVD system at
System 83 Air, drying, see Cooling rear 189, 204
"Accept as destination" 145 function 101, 105 Antifreeze
"Accept current speed" 74 Airbags 89 – coolant 222
Access to the third seat – safe seated position 38 – washer fluid 62
row 43 – warning light 89 Anti-lock Brake System
Accident, reporting, see "Air circulation on / off" 49 ABS 83
Making an emergency "Air distribution" 100, 105 Anti-theft alarm system, see
call 234 Air distribution Alarm system 32
Activated charcoal – adjusting manually 100, 104 Anti-theft protection, see
filter 102, 107 – automatic 99, 103, 108 Central locking 28
"activation phase..." 87 Air pressures, checking, see Approved oil grades, see
Active seat 46 Tyre pressures 216 Approved engine oils 221
Active seat ventilation 46 Air recirculation Aquaplaning 127
Active steering 88 – recirculated-air Armrest, see Centre
– warning light 88 mode 101, 105 armrest 117
Adapter for spare key 26 Air vents 98 Around the centre console 12
Adaptive brake light, see Two- – see Ventilation 101, 106 Around the steering wheel 8
stage brake lights 88 Air volume 100, 104, 108 Arrival time, see Computer 67
Adaptive Drive 85 Alarm system 32 Arrival time, see Starting route
Adaptive fixing system 121 – avoiding false alarms 33 guidance 151
Adaptive Head Light 94 – interior movement Arrow view for navigation 152
"Address book" in detector 33 "Arrow view" in
navigation 146 – switching off the alarm 33 navigation 152
Address in navigation – switching off tilt alarm Ashtrays
– deleting 148 sensor and interior – front 118
– entering 138, 146 movement detector 33 – rear 119
– memorising 146 – tilt alarm sensor 33 Assist, see separate
– memorising the car's "All doors" 28 Operating Instructions
position 147 Alloy wheels, care, see Assistance systems, see
– selecting 147 booklet Looking after your Driving stability control
"Address input" 139 car systems 83
"Add to destination All-season tyres, see Winter Assistance window 18
list" 142, 143 tyres 218 AUC, see Automatic Air
Recirculation Control 105
250
Audible signal, see Check Automatic lights B
Control 72 – see Automatic driving lights
Overview
Audio 164 control 92 Backrests, see Seats 39
– controls 164 – see Daytime running Balance, tone setting 166
– switching on/off 164 lights 93 "Balance" for DVD system at
– tone control 165 – see Headlight courtesy delay rear 204
– volume control 165 feature 93 "Band III" 177
"Audio AUX" 165, 192, 193 – see High-beam headlights "Band III + L" 177
– AUX-In connection 192 assistant 95 "Band L" 177
– USB audio interface 193 – see Interior light 97 Bass, see Treble and
Controls
Audio CD for DVD system at "Automatic off" 41 bass 166
rear 205 "Automatic programmes" 104 Bass, tone control 166
Audio equipment, Automatic station Battery
external 117 search 169, 176 – power failure 232
"Audio Offset" for DVD Automatic transmission with – recharging 232
system at rear 211 Steptronic 57 – starting with a flat
Driving hints
Automatic – kick-down 58 battery 235
– air distribution 99, 103, 108 – releasing transmission Battery, changing
– air volume 99, 103, 108 interlock manually 59 – remote control for comfort
– channel memory 196 – selector lever interlock 58 access 35
– driving lights control 92 – tow-starting 237 – remote control for DVD
– memorising of stations 169 – with comfort access 35 system at rear 201
– steering wheel adjustment, AUTO program for – remote control for
see Easy entry/exit 48 automatic air independent ventilation
Automatic air conditioning 99 conditioning 99, 103, 108 system/auxiliary heater 111
Navigation
– at rear 107 "Autostore" Battery, see Car battery 232
– automatic air – for radio 170 Battery disposal
distribution 99, 103, 108 – for TV 197 – car battery 232
– ventilation at rear 101, 107 "Autostore", digital radio 175 – remote control for comfort
– with extended range of "AUX / Rear" 201 access 35
features 103 "AUX" for DVD system at Being towed 236
Entertainment
Automatic Air Recirculation rear 210 Belts, see Seat belts 44
Control AUC 105 AUX-In connection 117, 192 Belt tensioner
Automatic anti-glare control, "AUX IN" for audio mode 192 – see Airbags 89
see High-beam headlights Average fuel consumption 67 – see Seat belts 44
assistant 95 – setting units of Biodiesel, see Diesel
Automatic car washes 128 measurement 76 engine 215
Automatic-dim mirrors 48 Average speed, see Blind
"Automatic FM Computer 67 – roller sun blinds 116
changeover" 178 Avoiding congestion 158 Blower, see Air
Avoiding false alarms 33 volume 100, 104, 108
Mobility
Axle load limits BMW homepage 4

– see Trailer towing 242 BMW Internet site 4
– see Weights 241 BMW Maintenance
Axle loads System 223
– see Trailer towing 242 Bottle holder, see Drinks
– see Weights 241 holders 118
Brake assist 83
Reference
Brake discs 128
251
Brake lights Can holder, see Drinks CD, see Playing audio tracks,
From A-Z
– bulb changing 227 holders 118 DVD system at rear 205

– two-stage brake lights 88 Capacity of load area 241 CD/DVD player, DVD system
Brake pads, running in 126 Car at rear 200
Brakes – battery 232 CD changer 179
– Anti-lock Brake System – care, see booklet Looking – compressed audio files 179
ABS 83 after your car – controls 164
– brake assist 83 – general care 224 – fast forward, reverse 183
– brake pads 126 – laying up out of use, see – random play 182
– Cornering Brake Control booklet Looking after your – repeating track 182
CBC 83 car – sampling tracks 181
– disc brakes 128 – loads 129 – selecting CDs 179
– Electronic Brake Force – stopping 55 – selecting tracks 180
Distribution 83 – trailer loads 242 – switching on/off 164
– parking brake 55 – washing, see booklet – tone control 165
– running in 126 Looking after your car – volume control 165
– see Safe braking 127 – weight 241 "CD" for DVD system at
– two-stage brake lights 88 Car's position rear 201
– warning light 11 – displaying 159 CD player 179
Brake system 126 – saving 147 – compressed audio files 179
– running in 126 Caravan-towing, see Towing a – controls 164
– warning light 11 trailer 130 – fast forward, reverse 183
Breakdown Service, see Care products, see booklet – random play 182
Mobile Service 235 Looking after your car – repeating track 182
"Break" for DVD system at Car key, see Key/remote – sampling tracks 181
rear 205 control 26 – selecting tracks 180
"Brightness" 76 Carpets, care, see booklet – switching on/off 164
Brightness Looking after your car – tone control 165
– of Head-Up Display 90 Car phone – volume control 165
– of rear view camera 82 – installed position, see "Central locking" 28
"Brightness / Position" 91 Centre armrest 117 Central locking 28
"Brightness" for DVD system Car radio, see Radio 168 – comfort access 33
at rear 203 Carrying children in safety 50 – engaging from interior 30
"Brightness" for TV 188, 197 Car telephone Centre armrest 117
Brightness of the control – see separate Operating Centre brake light 229
display 76 Instructions Centre console 12
"Building number" in Car wash 128 Changing a wheel 229
destination input 141 – before entering 55 Changing bulbs, see Lights
Bulb changing, see Lights and – see booklet Looking after and bulbs 225
bulbs 225 your car Changing scale in
Button for starting engine 54 – with comfort access 35 navigation 153
Buttons on the steering Catalytic converter, see Hot Changing the country for
wheel 9 exhaust system 126 TV 198
CBC, see Cornering Brake Changing the route 155
C Control 83 Changing the TV
CBS, see Condition Based standard 198
Camera, see Rear view Service 223 Channel, starting 196
camera 80 "CD" 165, 179, 186 Check Control 72
252
"Check Control Comfort operation Consumption statistics, see
messages" 73 – panorama glass roof 29, 30 Average fuel
Overview
Child restraint systems 50 – panorama glass roof with consumption 67
Child safety catches 53 comfort access 34 "Continue guidance?" 152
Child seat mountings, – windows 29, 30 "Contrast" for DVD system at
ISOFIX 51 – windows with comfort rear 203
Child seats 50 access 34 "Contrast" for TV 188, 197
Chrome parts, care, see – with comfort access 34 Control centre, see iDrive 14
booklet Looking after your Compact Disc, see Control display, see iDrive 14
car – CD changer 179 – brightness adjustment 76
Controls
Cigarette lighter, see – CD player 179 Controller, see iDrive 14
Lighter 119 Compact wheel Controls, see Driving area 8
Cigarette lighter socket 119 – changing 229 Controls for DVD system at
"City" in destination input 139 – tyre pressure 216 rear 199
Cleaning, see booklet Looking Compartment for remote Convenient starting, see
after your car control, see Ignition lock 54 Starting the engine 54
Driving hints
Clearance warning, see Park Compass, digital 115 Coolant 222
Distance Control PDC 78 "Computer" 67 – checking level 222
"Climate" 45, 100 Computer 67 – temperature 66
Climatic comfort – displays in the instrument Cooling, maximum 105
windscreen 127 cluster 67 Copyright 2
Climbing assistance, see – displays on the control Cornering Brake Control
Starting assistance 86 display 67 CBC 83
"Clock" 75 – journey computer 68 Cornering lights, see Adaptive
Clock 65 Computer, see iDrive 14 Head Light 94
Navigation
– setting time 75 Condition Based Service "Country" in destination
– 12-hour/24-hour mode 76 CBS 223 input 139
"Clock / Date" 75 "Confirmation" 30 Cover
Closing Confirmation signals, – roller cover 120
– from inside 30 adjusting, for locking and Cross-hairs in navigation 143
– with the remote control 28 unlocking vehicle 29 Cruise control 62
Entertainment
Closing tank cap 214 "Confirm tyre pressure" 87 Cup holder, see Drinks
Coat hooks 117 Congestion holders 118
Cold start, see Starting the – avoiding 158 Current consumption 66
engine 54 – displaying traffic Current position
"Colour" for DVD system at information 155 – entering 147
rear 203 Connecting up
Combined instrument, see headphones 200 D
Instrument cluster 10 Connecting vacuum cleaner,
Comfort/convenience, see see Connecting electrical "DAB", digital radio 174, 176
Around the centre appliances 119 Data 240
Mobility
console 12 Consumption, see Average – dimensions 240

Comfort access 33 fuel consumption 67 – filling capacities 243
– changing the battery 35 Consumption display, see – technical data 240
– observing in a car wash 35 Fuel gauge 66 – trailer loads 242
Consumption indicator – weights 241
– computer, average fuel "Date" 76
consumption 67
Reference
– energy control 66
253
Date 65 Displaying "Memorised Dry air, see Cooling
From A-Z
– calling up 65 stations" on the radio 168 function 101, 105

– format 76 "Display off" 19 DSC, see Dynamic Stability
– setting 76 "Display on / off" 49 Control 83
"Date format" 76 Displays, see Instrument DTC, see Dynamic Traction
"Daytime running lights" 93 cluster 10 Control 84
Daytime running lights 93 "Display settings" 76, 90 Dust caps on tyre valves, see
Defrosting windows and Displays in the windscreen, After fitting 231
removing mist 100, 104 see Head-Up Display 90 DVD changer
Defrost setting 100, 104 Disposal – chapter skip 187
"Delete address book" in – battery of remote – fast forward 187
navigation 148 control 201 – reverse 187
"Delete data" in – car battery 232 "DVD" for DVD system at
navigation 148 – remote control battery for rear 201
Demisting windows 100, 104 independent ventilation "DVD format" for DVD system
Descent control, see HDC 84 system/auxiliary heater 111 at rear 204
Designation – remote control battery with DVD for navigation 136
– run-flat tyres 217 comfort access 35 DVD system at rear 199
Destination address Distance, see Computer 67 – CD/DVD player 200
– deleting 148 Distance from destination, see – connecting up
– entering 138, 142 Computer 67 headphones 200
Destination in navigation "Distance to dest." 68 – controls 199
– destinations list 146 Door entry lighting 97 – DVD country codes 201
– entering 138 Door key, see Key/remote – external device 210
– home address 148 control 26 – notes on the CD/DVD
– manual input 138, 142 Door locking, confirmation player 209
– memorising 146 signals 29 – playing audio tracks from a
– selecting from address "Door locks" 28, 29, 70 CD/DVD 205
book 147 Door locks 30 – playing video from a CD/
– selecting from map 143 Doors DVD 201
– selecting via Information 144 – manual operation 30 – remote control 200
– selecting via language 142 – remote control 28 – showing pictures from a CD/
"Destination input map" 144 Downhill gradients 127 DVD 208
Destination list for navigation Draught-free – switching on/off 201
system 146 ventilation 101, 106 "Dynamic route" in
"Details", DVD system at Drawbar load, see Trailer nose navigation 149
rear 207 weight 242 Dynamic Stability Control
"Details" for audio mode 194 Drinks holders 118 DSC 83
Diesel fuel 215 "Driver's door only" 29 – indicator light 11, 83
Diesel particle filter 126 Driving area 8 Dynamic Traction Control
Digital clock 65 Driving hints 126 DTC 84
Digital compass 115 Driving lights, see Side lights/ – activating 84
Dimensions 240 low-beam headlights 92 – indicator light 11, 84
Direction instructions, see Driving lights control,
Spoken instructions 154 automatic 92 E
"Direct operation" 110 Driving on left 128
"Display" 76 Driving on rough tracks 132 Easy entry/exit 48
Display, see iDrive 14 Driving stability control Eject button, see Buttons next
systems 83 to CD player 164
254
Electrical fault Engine oil F
– automatic transmission with – adding 221
Overview
Steptronic 59 – additives, see Approved Fader, tone control 166
– door lock 30 engine oils 221 Failure message, see Check
– driver's door 30 – approved engine oils 221 Control 72
– fuel filler flap 214 – checking oil level 220 False alarms, avoiding 33
– parking brake 56 – electronic oil level check 220 Fasten seat belts, see Seat
– upper tailgate 32 "Engine oil level" 221 belts 44
Electric seats 39 Engine overheating, see – warning light 44
Electric steering wheel Coolant temperature 66 Fastest route in
Controls
adjustment 48 Engine starting, see Starting navigation 149
Electric windows, see the engine 54 Fast forward
Windows 35 Entering a destination 139 – CD changer 183
Electronic Brake Force Entering destination – CD player 183
Distribution 83 country 139 – DVD changer 187
Electronic oil level check 220 Entering the house number or Fast reverse
Driving hints
Electronic Stabilisation junction 141 – CD changer 183
Program ESP, see Dynamic Entering the street 141 – CD player 183
Stability Control DSC 83 "Entertainment" 165 "Fast route" in navigation 149
Emergency call 234 "Equaliser", see Tone Fault
Emergency operation, see settings 167 – door lock 30
Manual operation Equalizer, see Tone – driver's door 30
– door lock 30 settings 167 – fuel filler flap 214
– driver's door 30 ESP Electronic Stabilisation – parking brake 56
– fuel filler flap 214 Program, see Dynamic – upper tailgate 32
Navigation
– transmission interlock, Stability Control DSC 83 Fault indications 72
automatic transmission 59 "Exclude ferries" in Fault messages, see Check
– upper tailgate 32 navigation 149 Control 72
Emergency Service, see "Exclude motorways" in "Favourites", displaying on
Mobile Service 235 navigation 149 radio 172
"Enable rear menu" for DVD "Exclude toll roads" in Favourites, see Sorting
Entertainment
system at rear 199 navigation 149 stations with the radio 171
Energy-conscious driving, see Excluding motorways in Favourites buttons 19
Energy control 66 navigation 149 Filler neck for washer fluid 62
Energy control 66 Exhaust system, see Hot Filling capacities 243
Engine exhaust system 126 Final drive, running in 126
– overheated, see Coolant "Exit assist. window" 19 First aid pouch 235
temperature 66 Expanding the load area 121 Fixture for remote control, see
– running in 126 External audio device, see Ignition lock 54
– starting 54 AUX-In connection 192 Flashing on locking/unlocking,
– starting, comfort access 35 External audio equipment 117 see Adjusting confirmation
Mobility
– stopping 55 Eye for tow-starting and signals 29

Engine compartment 220 towing away, see Towing Flashing turn indicators 60
Engine compartment lid 219 eye 236 – bulb changing 227
Engine coolant 222 Eyes for lashing, see Securing – indicator light 10
the load 129
Reference
255
Flat tyre G Hands-free unit, see
From A-Z
– changing a wheel 229 Microphone 12

– compact wheel 229 Garage door opener, see Hazard warning flashers 13
– Run Flat Indicator RPA 86 Integrated universal remote HDC, see Hill Descent
– run-flat tyres 87 control 113 Control 84
Floods, see Wading 127 Gearbox Head-level airbag 89
"FM", waveband 165, 168 – starting assistance 86 Headlight beam throw
Fog lights 96 Gear changes, automatic adjustment
Folding rear seat back 121 transmission with – automatic for xenon
Footbrake, see Safe Steptronic 58 headlights 94
braking 127 General care 224 – for halogen headlights 94
Footwell lights 97 General driving notes 126 Headlight courtesy delay
For your own safety 5 Glass roof, electric feature 93
Four-wheel drive, see – comfort operation from Headlight flasher 60
xDrive 84 outside 30 Headlights 92
"Frequency selection" 177 – comfort operation with – beam throw adjustment 94
Frequency selection, comfort access 34 – bulb changing 225
manual 169 – remote control 29 – care, see booklet Looking
Fresh-air nozzles, see Air Glove box 116 after your car
outlets 98 – light 116 – cleaning, see Wiper
Front airbags 89 – opening manually 116 system 61
Front fog lights 96 Gong, see Check Control 72 – setting, see Rule of the
– indicator light 11, 96 GPS navigation, see road 128
Front passenger airbags 89 Navigation system 136 Head restraints 42
– see Exception for the front "Graphics settings" for DVD – removing 42
passenger's seat 50 system at rear 203 – safe seated position 38
Front seat adjustment 39 Grilles, see Air outlets 98 "Head-Up Display" 90
Frost protection Grilles, see Head-Up Display 90
– coolant 222 Ventilation 101, 106 Heated
– washer fluid 62 Grilles for automatic air – mirror 47
Fuel 215 conditioning 98 – rear window 100, 104
– additives 215 Gross weight – seats 45, 46
– fuel gauge 66 – see Trailer towing 242 – steering wheel 49
– grade 215 – see Weights 241 Heating 98
– see Average fuel Gross weight limit – interior 98
consumption 67 – see Trailer towing 242 – outside mirrors 47
– see Fuel grade 215 – see Weights 241 – rear window 100, 104
– tank capacity 243 Ground lights, see Interior – residual heat 106
Fuel filler flap 214 light 97 – seats 45, 46
– closing 214 – steering wheel 49
– opening 214 H Heating with the engine off,
– releasing manually 214 see Residual heat 106
Fuel level 66 Halogen headlights Heavy loads, see Securing the
Fuses 232 – driving on left/right 128 load 129
Halogen lights 226 Height, see Dimensions 240
Handbrake, indicator light 11 Height adjustment
Handbrake, see Parking – seats 39
brake 55 – steering wheel 48
Hand lamp 117 "High-beam assistant" 96
256
High-beam headlights 60, 95 Ignition 54 "Info on destination" 146
– bulb changing 226 – switched off 54 Information
Overview
– headlight flasher 60 – switched on 54 – about another town/city 144
– indicator light 11 Ignition key, see Key/remote – about the car's position 144
High-beam headlights control 26 – about the destination 144
assistant 95 Ignition key position 1, see – on country 144
Hill Descent Control HDC 84 Radio readiness 54 "Info sources" 70
Hints for driving, see Driving Ignition key position 2, see Infrared-reflecting
hints 126 Ignition on 54 windscreen, see Climatic
Holder for drinks 118 Ignition lock 54 comfort windscreen 127
Controls
Holder for telephone or mobile – starting the engine with Initialising
phone 117 comfort access 35 – Run Flat Indicator 87
Home address 148 Imitation leather, see booklet – seat, mirror and steering
"Home address" in Looking after your car wheel position memory 40
navigation 149 "Independent heater" 110 – see Power failure 232
"Home lights" 93 Independent heater, see – see Setting date 76
Driving hints
Homepage 4 Auxiliary heater 109 – see Setting time 75
Horn 8 "Independent mode" 110 Inside mirror 47, 48
Hot exhaust system 126 "Independent ventilation" 110 – automatic-dim 48
"Hour memo" 76 Independent ventilation Installed position
Hydraulic brake assist, see system – mobile phone 117
Brake assist 83 – switching on and off – navigation DVD drive 136
directly 110 Instructions from navigation
I Independent ventilation system, see Spoken
system/auxiliary heater 109 instructions 154
Navigation
Ice warning, see Outside – activating switch-on Instrument cluster 10
temperature warning 65 times 111 Instrument lighting 97
ID3 tag, see Information about – preselecting switch-on Instrument panel, see Driving
the track 181 times 110 area 8
iDrive 14 – remote control 111 Instrument panel lighting, see
– assistance window 18 Indicator and warning Instrument lighting 97
Entertainment
– brightness adjustment 76 lights 11 Integrated key 26
– changing language 77 – active steering 88 Integrated universal remote
– changing settings 75 – airbags 89 control 113
– changing units of – DSC 11, 83 Interesting destination for
measurement and form of – DTC 11, 84 navigation 144
expression 76 – fasten seat belts 44 Interior light 97
– confirming a selection or – fog lights 11, 96 – switching on with the remote
input 17 – Run Flat Indicator 87 control 29
– controller 14 Indicators, see Flashing turn Interior mirror
– controls 14 indicators 60 – compass 115
Mobility
– displays, menus 15 Individual air distribution 105 Interior movement

– selecting a menu item 17 Individually programmable detector 33
– setting date 76 buttons on the steering – switching off 33
– setting time 75 wheel 49 Intermittent wiper
– start menu 15 Individual settings, see operation 61
– status information 18 Personal Profile 27 "Interm. time" 74
– switching menu pages 17 Inflation pressures, see Tyre ISOFIX child seat
Reference
– symbols 16 pressures 216 mountings 51
257
J Lashings, see Securing the Load area cover, see Roller
From A-Z
load 129 cover 120

Jack 230 Last destinations, see Loads 129
– mounting points 230 Destinations list 146 – car 129
Jacking points 230 "Last seat pos." 41 – loading 129
"Journey computer" 68 Lateral incline, see Driving on – securing 129
Journey computer 68 rough tracks 132 – trailer 131
Joystick Laying up car out of use, see Load-securing equipment,
– see iDrive 14 booklet Looking after your see Securing the load 129
– see Selector lever, engaging car Lockable wheel studs, see
transmission positions 57 Leather care, see booklet Thiefproof wheel studs 232
Jump-starting, see Starting Looking after your car "Lock button" 28
with a flat battery 235 LED light-emitting diodes 226 Locking
Junction input 141 Length, see Dimensions 240 – adjusting confirmation
Licence plate lights, bulb signals 29
K changing 229 – from inside 30
"Light" 60, 92 – without a key, see Comfort
Kerb weight, see Weights 241 Light-emitting diodes access 33
Key LED 226 – with the remote control 28
– key-specific settings, see Lighter 119 Low-beam headlights 92
Personal Profile 27 Lighting – automatic 92
Keyless Go, see Comfort – car, see Lights 92 – bulb changing 226
access 33 – instruments 97 – headlight beam throw
Keyless locking and – lights and bulbs 225 adjustment 94
unlocking, see Comfort Lights Lower tailgate 32
access 33 – see High-beam headlights Low fuel level warning light 66
Key Memory, see Personal assistant 95 Luggage compartment, see
Profile 27 – see Side lights/low-beam Load area 120
Keys 26 headlights 92 Luggage compartment, see
Kick-down, automatic Lights and bulbs 225 Load area, capacity 241
transmission with Light switch 92 Luggage compartment
Steptronic 58 "Limit" 74 capacity 241
Knock control 215 Limit, see Speed limit 74 Luggage net, see Partition
List in navigation, see Address net 120
L book 146 Luggage rack, see Roof
Load rack 130
Language, altering on the – securing in ski bag 123 Lumbar support 40
control display 77 Load area
"Language / Units" 76, 77 – emergency operation, see M
"Language / Units" for Opening manually 32
navigation 136, 154 – opening/closing 31 M+S tyres, see Winter
"Language" for DVD system – opening/closing, see Lower tyres 218
at rear 204 tailgate 32 "Main menu" for DVD system
"Languages" 77 – opening/closing, see Upper at rear 204
"Languages" for DVD system tailgate 31 Maintenance, see Service
at rear 203 – opening from inside 31 requirements 69
"Languages" in – opening from outside 31 Maintenance system 223
navigation 136, 154 – opening with remote Making a call, see Telephone
control 29 Operating Instructions
258
Manual air Mirrors 47 Navigation disc drive, installed
distribution 100, 104 – folding in and out 47 position 136
Overview
"Manual frequency selection", – heating 47 Navigation DVD 136
digital radio 175 – inside mirror 48 Navigation system 136
"Manual frequency selection" – memory, see Seat, mirror – address book 146
for radio 169 and steering wheel position – adjusting volume 155
Manual operation memory 40 – calling up 138
– door lock 30 – outside mirrors 47 – changing route 155
– driver's door 30 – parking position 47 – destination input 138
– fuel filler flap 214 Mobile communication – destinations list 146
Controls
– transmission interlock, equipment 127 – displaying route 152
automatic transmission 59 Mobile phone – displaying the car's
Manual operation, automatic – installed position, see position 159
transmission with Centre armrest 117 – ending/resuming route
Steptronic 58 – see separate Operating guidance 151
Map Instructions – entering a destination
Driving hints
– changing the scale 153 – use inside the car, see address manually 138, 142
– destination input 143 Mobile communication – last destinations 146
"Map, indicating dir. of equipment 127 – navigation DVD 136
travel" 153 Mobile Service 235 – route guidance in assistance
"Map north-oriented" 153 Modifications, technical, see window 136
Markings For your own safety 5 – route list 153
– tyres 218 Monitor, folding in/out, DVD – searching for a special
Master key, see Key/remote system at rear 199 destination 144
control 26 Monitor, see iDrive 14 – selecting destination from
Navigation
Maximum cooling effect 105 "Monitor brightness" for DVD map 143
"Memorised stations", digital system at rear 203 – selecting route criteria 149
radio 175 Motorways, see Route – selecting the destination via
Memorising radio criteria 149 Information 144
stations 170 MP3, see Compressed audio – spoken instructions 154
Memory, see Seat, mirror and files 179 – starting route guidance 151
Entertainment
steering wheel position Multifunctional steering – switching off 151
memory 40 wheel, see Buttons on the Neck restraints, see Head
"Menu" for DVD system at steering wheel 9 restraints 42
rear 189, 204 Multifunction switch "New address" in
"Menu" for rear – see Flashing turn indicators/ navigation 147
entertainment 187, 202 headlight flasher/high-beam "New destination" 139, 143
Menus, see iDrive 14 headlights 60 New remote control
Message list, traffic – see Wiper system 61 – for independent ventilation
information 157 Music tracks, see Tracks 180 system/auxiliary heater 112
Microfilter 102, 107 "Mute on / off" 49 "New route for" 155
Mobility
Microphone New wheels and tyres 217

– for telephone 12 N "Next entertainment
– for voice input system 12 source" 49
"Navigation" 67, 138, 144 North-oriented route map 153
Navigation announcements, Nose weight 131, 242
see Switching voice "No Signal" 175
messaging on/off 154 "No video signal" for DVD
Reference
system at rear 210
259
Nozzles, see Outlets for automatic air "PDC in main screen" 79
From A-Z
Ventilation 101, 106 conditioning 98 Personal Profile 27

Nozzles for automatic air Outside mirrors 47 "Perspective" 153
conditioning 98 – adjusting 47 Petrol, see Fuel grade 215
"NTSC colours" for DVD – automatic-dim 48 "Photo" for DVD system at
system at rear 211 – automatic heating 47 rear 201, 208
Nylon rope, see Tow-starting – folding in and out 47 Pivoting headlights, see
and towing away 236 – passenger-side mirror tilt- Adaptive Head Light 94
down 47 "Plan detour" in
O – towing a trailer 131 navigation 158
Outside temperature Plasters, see First aid
OBD socket 224 display 65 pouch 235
Octane numbers, see Fuel – changing unit of "Play" for DVD system at
grade 215 measurement 76 rear 205
Odometer 65 Outside temperature Pollen, see Microfilter and
Oil warning 65 activated charcoal
– adding, see Adding engine "Overview" for DVD system at filter 102, 107
oil 221 rear 208 Position
– additives, see Approved – displaying 159
engine oils 221 P – storing, see Storing current
– approved engine oils 221 position 147
– consumption, see Checking Paintwork care, see booklet Power failure 232
engine oil level 220 Looking after your car Preheating, see Auxiliary
– level 220 Panic mode 29 heater 109
Oil change intervals, see Panorama glass roof 36 Preheating, see Diesel
Service requirements 69 – automatic opening and engine 55
Old batteries closing 37 Preselecting switch-on times
– see Changing the battery 35 – comfort position 37 for independent ventilation
– see Disposal 232 – power failure 37 system/auxiliary heater 110
"On-board Info" 67 – raising, opening, closing 37 Pressure, tyres 216
"On destination" 145 Park Distance Control PDC 78 Pressure monitoring for tyres,
"On location" 145 Parking aid see Run Flat Indicator
Opening, see Unlocking 34 – see Park Distance Control RPA 86
Opening and closing PDC 78 Programmable buttons on the
– comfort access 33 – see Rear view camera 80 steering wheel 49
– from inside 30 Parking assistant, see Park Programmable memory
– panorama glass roof 37 Distance Control PDC 78 buttons 19
– via the door lock 30 Parking brake 55 Protective function, see Trap
– with the remote control 28 – indicator light 11 protection
Opening without a key, see Parking lights 95 – panorama glass roof 37
Comfort access 33 Parking position 47 – windows 36
Orientation menu, see Start Particle filter, see Diesel Punctures
menu 15 particle filter 126 – compact wheel 229
"Other place" in Partition net 120 – Run Flat Indicator RPA 86
navigation 145 Passenger-side mirror tilt- – run-flat tyres 217
Outlets down 47
– see Air outlets 98 "PDC" 79
PDC, see Park Distance
Control 78
260
R Reading lights 97 Recirculation of air
Rear automatic air – Automatic Air Recirculation
Overview
Radio conditioning 107 Control AUC 105
– autostore 169 – activating on control Reclining seat, see Seats 39
– controls 164 display 108 Recycling 224
– listening to stations 168 – air supply 108 Reflecting tail lights, see Rear
– memorising stations 170 – switching off 108 lights 227
– sampling stations 169, 176 "Rear climate control" 108 Refuelling 214
– selecting a "Rear enabled" 199 Registering a Bluetooth
waveband 165, 168 Rear entertainment, see DVD mobile, see separate
Controls
– selecting frequency system at rear 199 Operating Instructions
manually 169 Rear fog lights 97 Releasing
– station search 169, 176 – bulb changing 227 – engine compartment lid 219
– stations with best – indicator light 11, 97 "Relock if no door opened" 31
reception 169 Rear lights 227 Remote control 26
– switching on/off 164 – bulb changing 227 – changing the battery 35
Driving hints
– tone control 165 Rear power socket 119 – comfort access 33
– traffic reports 172 Rear seat back, folding 121 – faults 30, 35
– volume control 165 Rear seats – garage door opener 113
Radio-control key, see Key/ – adjusting 43 – tailgate 29
remote control 26 – adjusting head restraints 43 Remote control, DVD system
Radio position, see Radio – folding back 121 at rear 200
readiness 54 – heated 46 Remote control, new 26
Radio readiness 54 – heating 46 Remote control,
– switched off 54 Rear ventilation 101, 107 replacement 26
Navigation
– switched on 54 – rear automatic air Remote control for
– with comfort access 34 conditioning 107 independent ventilation
Rain sensor 61 – third seat row 102, 107 system/auxiliary heater 111
Random Rear view camera 80 – battery, changing 111
– CD changer 182 – cleaning 82 – new remote control 112
– CD player 182 – displays 82 "Repeat directory" for audio
Entertainment
"Random", see Random – driver assistance mode 182
play 182 functions 80 "Repeat directory" for DVD
"Random all" for audio – switching off 80 system at rear 205, 207
mode 182 – switching on 80 "Repeat" for audio mode 182
"Random all" for FDVD Rear window "Repeat" for DVD system at
system at rear 207 – heater 100, 104 rear 206
"Random directory" for audio – renewing wiper blade 225 "Repeat track" for audio
mode 182 – wiper 62, 128 mode 182
"Random directory" for DVD Rear window wiper, changing "Repeat track" for DVD
system at rear 207 wiper blade 225 system at rear 205, 207
Mobility
"Random" for DVD system at Recently used Replacement fuses 232

rear 206 destinations 146 Replacing tyres 217
Random play 182 Reception, TV channels 196 Reserve warning, see Fuel
Range 67 Recirculated-air gauge 66
Rapeseed methyl ester mode 101, 105 Reset, see Resetting the tone
RME 215 – air recirculation 101, 105 settings 167
"RDS" Radio Data – Automatic Air Recirculation "Reset" for DVD system at
Reference
System 171 Control AUC 105 rear 203, 204
261
"Reset" for stopwatch 74 Route guidance 151 Safety lock buttons on doors,
From A-Z
"Reset" for tone settings 167 – altering route see Locking 31

Residual distance, see specifications 149 Safety switch for rear
Range 67 – displaying the route 152 windows 36
Residual heat 106 – distance and arrival time 151 Safety systems
Restraint systems – ending/resuming 151 – airbags 89
– for children 50 – interrupting spoken – Anti-lock Brake System
– see Seat belts 44 instructions 49 ABS 83
Retreaded tyres 217 – spoken instructions 154 – driving stability control
"Return" for DVD system at – starting 151 systems 83
rear 189, 204 – volume of spoken – Dynamic Stability Control
Reverse instructions 155 DSC 83
– DVD changer 187 Route instructions, see Route – seat belts 44
Reverse, automatic guidance by voice Safety tyres, see Run-flat
transmission with messages 154 tyres 217
Steptronic 58 RPA, see Run Flat Indicator "Save address" in
Reversing lights, bulb RPA 86 navigation 147
changing 227 RSC Runflat System "Save" for radio 170
Revolution counter 66 Component, see Run-flat Saving the car's position 147
"Rhomb button" 49 tyres 217 "Scan"
Right-hand/left-hand driving, Run Flat Indicator RPA 86 – sampling radio stations 169
headlight adjustment 128 – false alarms 87 – sampling tracks on CD 181
RME, see Rapeseed methyl – flat tyre message 87 "Scan all" for audio mode 181
ester 215 – initialising the system 87 "Scan all" for DVD system at
Road map 153 – malfunction 88 rear 207
Roller cover 120 – snow chains 218 "Scan directory" for audio
Roller sun blinds 116 – system limits 87 mode 181
RON, see Fuel grade 215 – warning light 87 "Scan directory" for DVD
Roof load 241 Runflat System Component system at rear 207
Roof rack 130 RSC, see Run-flat tyres 217 "Scan" for DVD system at
Rope, see Tow-starting and Run-flat tyres 217 rear 206
towing away 236 – flat tyre 87 "Schedule date for
Rotary/pushbutton control, – new tyres 217 service" 71
see iDrive 14 – new wheels and tyres 217 Screen, see iDrive 14
Rough tracks, driving on 132 – replacing tyres 217 Screw thread for towing
Route 149 – resuming a journey with a eye 236
– displaying 152 damaged tyre 87 Search
– displaying arrow view 152 – tyre pressure 87, 216 – CD changer 181
– displaying map view 153 Running in 126 – CD player 181
– displaying streets and – radio 169
towns/cities 153 S – TV channels 196
– displaying towns 153 Seat back contour, see
– list 153 Safe braking 127 Lumbar support 40
– selecting 149 Safe seated position 38 Seat back width
– selecting criteria 149 – with airbags 38 adjustment 40
Route, see Displaying – with head restraints 38 Seat belts 44
route 152 – with seat belt 38 – damage 45
Safety 5 – safe seated position 38
– warning light 44
262
"Seat climate, driver" 46 Service Interval indicator, see Song search, see Sampling
"Seat climate, front Service requirements 69 tracks 181
Overview
passenger" 46 "Service Soot particle filter, see Diesel
Seat heating 45, 46 requirements" 70, 220 particle filter 126
"Seat-heating distribution" 45 Service requirements 69 SOS, see Making an
Seats 39 – see also Condition Based emergency call 234
– adjusting 39 Service CBS 223 Spare fuses 232
– at rear 43 "Set date" 76 Spare key 26
– electrical adjustment 39 "Set" for audio mode 165 – adapter 26
– heating 45, 46 "Set" for journey computer 68 Spare wheel, see Changing a
Controls
– lumbar support 40 "SET" for rear wheel 229
– manual adjustment 39 entertainment 187, 202 Spare wheel, see Compact
– memory, see Seat, mirror "Set time" 75 wheel 229
and steering wheel position Settings Special oils, see Approved
memory 40 – clock,12-hour/24-hour engine oils 221
– position memory 40 mode 76 Speed
Driving hints
– safe seated position 38 – configuring, see Personal – when towing a trailer 131
– seat back width 40 Profile 27 – with compact wheel 231
– shoulder support 40 "Settings" for unlocking 28 "Speed dependent volume",
– thigh support 39, 40 Setting time, see Preselecting see Tone settings 166
– ventilation, see Active seat switch-on time 110 Speed-dependent volume
ventilation and seat Short commands for the voice control 166
heating 46 input system 244 Speed limit, setting 74
Second seat row 43 Shortest route in navigation, Speed limit for tyres,
Securing luggage see Selecting route 149 noting 218
Navigation
– in ski bag, see Securing the "Short route" in Speed limit with winter
load 123 navigation 149 tyres 218
– see Securing the load 129 Shoulder support 40 Speedometer 10
Securing system, "Show destination Spoken instructions for
adaptive 121 position" 144 navigation system 154
Securing the load 129 Showing pictures 208 – muting 49
Entertainment
Selecting a country for "Show vehicle position" 144 – repeating 49, 154
navigation 139 Side airbags 89 – switching on/off 49, 154
Selecting an audio source 165 Side lights 92 – volume control 155
Selecting "Lock after moving Signal horn, see Horn 8 Sport program, automatic
off" 31 Ski bag 122 transmission with
Selecting menu items 17 Slide show, see Showing Steptronic 58
Selector lever, automatic pictures 208 Stability control, see Driving
transmission with Sliding/tilt sunroof, see stability control systems 83
Steptronic 57 Panorama glass roof 36 "Standard" for DVD system at
Selector lever interlock, see Slippery roads, see Outside rear 204, 211
Mobility
Reverse 58 temperature warning 65 "Star button" 49

Self-levelling suspension 86 Smokers' package, see Start/stop button 54
"Service" 70, 220 Ashtray 118 "Start" for stopwatch 74
Service, see Mobile Snow chains 218 "Start guidance" 141
Service 235 Socket for on-board Starting assistance 86
Service car, see Mobile diagnosis 224
Service 235 Sockets, see Connecting
Reference
electrical appliances 119
263
Starting difficulties "Subtitle" for DVD system at Telephone reception signal
From A-Z
– starting with a flat rear 204 level, see Status

battery 235 Summer tyres, see Wheels information 18
Starting on uphill gradients, and tyres 216 Television, see TV 196
see Starting assistance 86 Supply reservoir, see Filler Temperature
Starting with a flat battery 235 neck for washer fluid 62 – adjustment for the upper
Start menu, iDrive 15 Switches, see Driving area 8 body area 100, 104
Station Switching cooling function on – changing units of
– see Radio 168 and off 101, 105 measurement 76
– see TV 196 Switching off automatic air – see Coolant temperature 66
"Status" 71 conditioning 101, 106, 108 Temperature adjustment
Status at time of printing 5 Switching off tilt alarm – for automatic air
"Stat. vehicle insp." 71 sensor 33 conditioning 99, 104, 108
Steering wheel Switching on/off – for automatic air
– adjusting 48 – audio 164 conditioning with extended
– automatic adjustment, see – CD changer 164 range of features 104
Steering wheel position – CD player 164 Temperature display
memory 40 – radio 164 – outside temperature 65
– buttons on the steering – TV 196 – setting unit of
wheel 9 Switching on hour signal 76 measurement 76
– easy entry/exit 48 Switching sound output for – temperature warning 65
– heating 49 entertainment systems on/ Temperature warning 65
– memory, see Seat, mirror off 165 "Text language" 77
and steering wheel position "Switch-on times" 110 Theft protection for wheel
memory 40 Symbols 4 studs, see Thiefproof wheel
– programmable buttons 49 – indicator and warning studs 232
"Steering wheel buttons" 49 lights 11 Third brake light, see Centre
Steering with variable ratio, – navigation system 157 brake light 229
see Active steering 88 – traffic info with navigation Third seat row 43
Steptronic, see Sport program system 155 Tightening torque of wheel
and manual-shift mode studs, see After fitting 231
M/S 58 T "Time format" 76
Sticking plasters, see First aid Timekeeping, see
pouch 235 Tachometer, see Stopwatch 74
"Stop" for stopwatch 74 Speedometer 10 Timer, see Preselecting
Stop light, see Rear lights 227 Tailgate switch-on times 110
– bulb changing 227 – opening from inside 31 "Timer 1" for independent
Stopping – opening manually 32 ventilation system/auxiliary
– car 55 – unlocking and locking from heater 110
– engine 55 inside 30 "Timer 2" for independent
"Stopwatch" 74 Tail lights, see Rear lights 227 ventilation system/auxiliary
Stopwatch 74 Tank capacity, see Filling heater 110
Storage compartments 117 capacities 243 "Title" for DVD system at
Storing tyres 218 Technical data 240 rear 204
Stowage, see Storage Technical modifications, see TMC stations, see Traffic
compartments 117 For your own safety 5 information 155
"Street" in destination Telephone, see separate "Tone" 166, 167
input 141 Operating Instructions
"Telephone list" 49
264
Tone for audio mode Traffic reports 172 TV 196
– adjustment, see Tone – switching on/off 172 – changing channel 196
Overview
control 165 – TMC stations 156 – changing standard 198
– central setting 167 – TP 172 – controls 164
"Tone" for DVD system at – volume control 165 – picture settings 197
rear 204 Trailer pulling, see Towing a – receivable channels 196
Toolkit 225 trailer 130 – tone control 165
Tools, see Toolkit 225 Trailer Stability Control 132 – volume 164
Top speed Trailer swinging, see Trailer Two-stage brake lights 88
– for winter tyres 218 Stability Control 132 Tyre changing 217
Controls
– when towing a trailer 131 Trailer towing 131 – changing a wheel 229
– with compact wheel 231 – see Technical data 242 – new wheels and tyres 217
Torch, see Hand lamp 117 – towing loads and gross Tyre pressure loss 87
Torque weight 242 Tyre pressure monitoring, see
– wheel studs, see After Transmission Run Flat Indicator RPA 86
fitting 231 – automatic transmission with Tyre pressures 216
Driving hints
Towing a trailer 130 Steptronic 57 – checking 216
Towing away 236 – releasing transmission – for heavy loads and trailer
Towing eye 236 interlock manually on towing 216
Town/city for destination automatic transmission with Tyres
input 139 Steptronic 59 – age 217
Tow-starting 236, 237 Transmission positions, – air loss 87
"TP" 172 automatic transmission with – changing 229
"TP AUTO" 173 Steptronic 57 – condition 216
TP Traffic Programme 172 Transporting children 50 – damage 217
Navigation
Tracks Transport securing – new wheels and tyres 217
– random play 182 equipment, see Securing – pressure monitoring 86
– sampling, scan 181 the load 129 – pressures 216
– searching for 181 Trap protection – punctures, see Changing a
Track width, see – electric windows 36 wheel 229
Dimensions 240 – panorama glass roof 37 – replacing 217
Entertainment
Traction aid, see Dynamic Tread depth, see Minimum – retreaded 217
Stability Control DSC 83 tread depth 216 – run-flat 217
Traffic information during Treble, see Tone settings 166 – running in 126
navigation "Treble / Bass" for DVD – size 216
– switching on/off 155 system at rear 204 – tread 216
Traffic information for Trip distance recorder 65 – wear indicators 216
navigation "Triple turn signal – wheel/tyre combination 217
– calling up 157 activation" 60 – winter tyres 218
– during route guidance 158 Turning circle, see
– representation in the route Dimensions 240 U
Mobility
map 158 Turning up and down

– selecting stations 156 automatically, see High- Underseal, see booklet
– symbols 157 beam headlights Looking after your car
"Traffic information assistant 95 "Units" 77
settings" 156 "TV" 165 Units of measurement
Traffic jams – average fuel
– traffic information consumption 76
Reference
announcements 172 – temperature 76
265
Universal garage door opener, Venting Website 4
From A-Z
see Integrated universal – see Ventilation 101, 106 Weights 241

remote control 113 VHF waveband 168 "Welcome light" 93
Universal remote control 113 "Video" 197 Wheel/tyre combination, see
Unlocking Videos, playing, DVD system New wheels and tyres 217
– tailgate 29 at rear 201 Wheel/tyre replacement, see
– without a key, see Comfort Vocal instructions, see Voice New wheels and tyres 217
access 33 messages from navigation Wheelbase, see
– with the remote control 28 system 154 Dimensions 240
Unlocking and locking doors Voice input system 21 Wheels and tyres 216
– adjusting confirmation – short commands 244 Wheelslip control, see
signals 29 Voice messages from Dynamic Stability Control
– from inside 30, 31 navigation system DSC 83
– with the remote control 28 – muting 154 Wheel studs 230
Upper tailgate 31 "Voice output of nav. – keys 230
– closing 32 system" 49, 137 – thiefproof 232
– opening from inside 31 Volume – tightening torque, see After
– opening from outside 31 – audio sources 164 fitting 231
– opening manually 32 – TV 164 Width, see Dimensions 240
"USB audio" for audio Volume control 164 Windows 35
mode 194 – speed-dependent – comfort operation 29
USB audio interface 193 adjustment 166 – comfort operation from
"Use motorways" in – spoken instructions 155 outside 30
navigation 149 – traffic reports 165 – comfort operation with
Volume distribution for audio comfort access 34
V mode – opening, closing 36
– front/rear 166 – safety switch 36
Vehicle – right/left 166 – trap protection 36
– Identification Number, see Windscreen
Engine compartment 220 W – cleaning, see Wiper
– measurements, see system 61
Dimensions 240 Wading 127 – defrosting, see Defrosting
– running in 126 Warning lights, see Indicator windows 100, 104
"Vehicle / Tyres" for and warning lights 11 – infrared reflecting, see
unlocking 28 Warning messages, see Climatic comfort
Vehicle battery, see Car Check Control 72 windscreen 127
battery 232 Warning triangle 234 – with displays, see Head-Up
Vehicle identification number, Washer fluid 62 Display 90
see Engine – reservoir capacity 62 Windscreen washer
compartment 220 Washer jets, see Windscreen – jets 61
"Vehicle position" 159 washer jets 61 – see Wiper system 61
Ventilation 101, 106 Washing the car, see booklet Windscreen wiper blades,
– at rear 101, 107 Looking after your car changing 225
– draught-free 101, 106 Water on roads, see Windscreen wipers, see Wiper
– rear automatic air Wading 127 system
conditioning 109 Waveband for radio 168 – renewing wiper blades 225
– third seat row 102, 107 Wear indicators in the tyres, Winter-grade diesel oil 215
– with engine off 109 see Minimum tread Winter tyres 218
depth 216 – tyre storage 218
266
Wiper system 61
– rain sensor 61
Overview
– washer fluid 62
– windscreen washer jets 61
Wordmatch principle for
navigation 150
Working in the engine
compartment 219
Wrench/screwdriver, see
Toolkit 225
Controls
X
xDrive 84
Xenon headlights 94, 227
– automatic headlight beam
Driving hints
throw adjustment 94
– bulb changing 227
– driving on left/right 128
Y
Your car 5
Navigation
"Zoom" for DVD system at
rear 204
Entertainment
Mobility
Reference
267
More about BMW
The Ultimate
www.bmw.com Driving Machine
01 41 0 013 209 en
*BL001320900L*
X5 En

X5

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

X5

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Owner's Handbook

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 013 209 - © 04/07 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 013 209 - © 04/07 BMW AG

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 013 209 - © 04/07 BMW AG

179 CD player and CD changer

199 DVD system at rear

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 013 209 - © 04/07 BMW AG

About this Owner's Symbols used

Symbol for components and

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 013 209 - © 04/07 BMW AG

Around the steering wheel: controls and displays

1 Safety switch for rear windows 36

14 Horn, entire surface

17 Releasing the engine compartment lid 219

1 Flashing turn indicators 7 Display for

4 Revolution counter 66 > Computer 67

5 Energy control 66 > Date and remaining distance to next

Indicator lights not accompanied by

Parking brake applied 56

Indicator and warning lights can light up in a

Some lights in the panel are checked for proper

You can call up further information, e.g. about

Cooling function 101, 105 19 Favourites/programmable memory

Maximum cooling effect* 105

Heated rear window 100, 104

Heated seats* 45, 46

Active seat ventilation* 46

Calling up menu items in the start menu

The comfort selection feature enables you to:

1 Each menu is subdivided into different

Navigation or on-board information

> Press the controller 5 To perform adjustments:

Additional information can be displayed in the

2. Select a menu item.

Destinations for navigation*

1. Press the button. 2. Press button ... for longer than

map, the coordinates under the cross-hairs

Entertainment No function assigned

Displaying assignment of buttons

Displaying brief information

Symbols in the Owner's Handbook

Press the button on the steering wheel {Main menu}

Calling up functions immediately using

Online Edition for Part-No. 01 41 0 013 209 - © 04/07 BMW AG

Key/remote control Integrated key

Press button 1 to release the key.

> Locking the car after a short time or after

Press the button.

Operating from inside

with the remote control

Unlocking upper tailgate

This function enables you to locate the car, for

troller. tem* is triggered when the door lock is

Opening and closing:

This button unlocks or locks the doors and

Opening from inside

Unlocking and opening

unlock all doors at once, then pull the door

button on the remote control for approx.

be swung upwards. sharp ends or edges of items of luggage

Opening manually Lower tailgate

Pull the lever and swing the tailgate down.

2. Open the tailgate and press the handle back

Even when the alarm system is armed, you can